LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volumes 1 & 2

LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volumes 1 & 2
Our policy is one of continuous product development and the right is reserved to supply equipment which may vary from that described.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Contents
SAFETY SECTION THIS MUST BE READ BEFORE COMMENCING ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT. VOLUME 1 VOLUME 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Contents
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
Health and safety The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section. Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal. Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective/ safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*Note:The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct equivalent of the North American term ground.
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
5SS/16A/1098
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating and polarity; CT circuit rating and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection (where applicable) Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. External resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
5SS/16A/1098
Older Products
Electrical adjustments Pieces of equipment which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed before making the change, to avoid any risk of electric shock. Mechanical adjustments The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock. Draw out case relays Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
Decommissioning and Disposal

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
5SS/16A/1098
Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Insulation class: IEC 61010-1: Class I EN 61010-1: Class I Installation Category (Overvoltage): IEC 61010-1: Category III EN 61010-1: Category III 1990/A2: 1993/A2: 1990/A2: 1993/A2: 1995 1995 1995 1995 This equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure user safety. Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards. Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive. 1993/A2: 1995 1992/A11: 1997 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.
Environment:
IEC 61010-1: 1990/A2: Pollution degree 2 EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: Pollution degree 2 73/23/EEC
1995 1995
Product safety:
EN 61010-1: EN 60950:
5SS/16A/1098
LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volume 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934D Volume 1 Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3
INTRODUCTION APPLICATION NOTES TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
ISSUE C ISSUE B ISSUE C
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 1 Chapter 1 Introduction
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 3.4.1.2 3.4.1.3 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.4.1 3.4.4.2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4. 5. 6 7 8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.3 8.4 9 Figure 1 Figure 2 Table 1 Table 2 INTRODUCTION RELAY VERSIONS LFZR111 model LFZR112 model LFZR113 model PROTECTION FEATURES Phase selector Distance protection Zones of protection Phase-to-phase distance characteristics Phase-to-ground distance characteristics Directional earth fault characteristics Level detectors Phase current level detectors Fixed setting High-set (loss-of-load) Extra high-set Phase voltage level detectors Neutral current level detectors Neutral voltage level detectors Fixed setting Variable setting Protection schemes Independent channel DEF Block auto-reclose logic (BAR) Power swing blocking (PSB) Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Circuit breaker failure protection RELAY SELF-MONITORING IN-SERVICE TESTING COMMUNICATIONS USER INTERFACE PERIPHERAL FEATURES Records Events records Fault records Disturbance records Calendar clock Fault location Metering LABELS FIGURES Phase fault characteristics Phase-to-ground distance characteristics TABLES Relay versions Standard features 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 6 7 2 4
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 1 of 16
SECTION 1.
INTRODUCTION
This manual serves as a description and set of instructions for type LFZR100. It is intended for: the protection engineer who is responsible for selection of the distance relay application of the distance relay for the protection of the power system the test engineer who is responsible for installation of the distance relay testing and maintenance of the distance relay Applications manual Introduction General information and overview of features for all three models Applications How to apply and set the relay Technical description Detailed technical description of each feature Operation testing and maintenance manual Introduction General information and overview of features for all three models User interface, communications and records User interface and protocol Event, fault and disturbance records Installation Wiring and configuration Commissioning, test and maintenance Initial checkout and tests A B C D E Front panel menu tree Courier data base, relay settings description Relay settings sheets Test results sheets Repair/return form
The manual has the following format: Volume 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Volume 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 2.
RELAY VERSIONS
Common features All three relay models have the following protective features: up to 5 independent zones of protection mho characteristics for phase and ground faults additional quadrilateral characteristics for ground faults if required comprehensive directional earth fault protection voltage transformer supervision power swing blocking independent high-speed overcurrent/stub-bus protection circuit breaker failure protection comprehensive range of protection schemes 8 independent, user selectable, setting groups
In addition to the previously mentioned protective functions, all three relay models have the following features: networked substation communications via K-Bus modem communications using IEC 60870 protocol IRIG-B port for real time clock synchronisation fault recording with automatic downloading to a printer disturbance recording (oscillography) real time calendar clock with 1ms resolution fault location and metering sequence of events recording All three models of the relay have 4Mb of RAM available for storage of the recorded information. An additional 4Mb of RAM is available if needed to capture additional disturbance records. The LFZR range of distance protection relays has been designed specifically for use on transmission systems. The relays are available in three basic variants, the LFZR111, 112 and 113. Each of the three models has 30 impedance measuring elements, providing 5 independent zones of protection. All models are suitable for application to overhead lines or underground cables. LFZR111 Single or three pole tripping, having 31 user programmable output contacts and 14 opto-isolator inputs Three pole tripping only, with selection of the setting group using opto-isolator inputs having 15 user programmable output contacts and 14 opto-isolator inputs Three pole tripping only, having 15 user programmable output contacts and 7 opto-isolator inputs Relay versions
LFZR112
LFZR113
Table 1:
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.1
LFZR111 model The standard LFZR111 model has 14 opto-isolator inputs, 31 normally open user programmable output contacts and a single normally closed output contact to provide a relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR111 is available where 4 of the 31 user programmable output contacts are normally closed. The relay provides single and three pole tripping facilities and channel independent directional earth fault protection.
2.2
LFZR112 model The standard LFZR112 version of the relay is designed for use either in spare line relaying applications or where it is required to switch setting groups via external contacts. The relay has 14 opto-isolator inputs, 5 of which are dedicated to changing between the 8 alternate setting groups available in the relay, and 15 normally open, user programmable output contacts. As with the LFZR111, an additional normally closed output contact is provided for the relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR112 is available where 2 of the user programmable output contacts are normally closed. The relay provides 3 pole tripping only and channel independent directional earth fault protection.
2.3
LFZR113 model The standard LFZR113 version of the relay has 7 opto-isolator inputs and 15 normally open, user programmable output contacts. As with the LFZR111, an additional normally closed output contact is provided for the relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR113 is available where 2 of the user programmable output contacts are normally closed. Unlike the LFZR111 and 112, the LFZR113 relay does not have the option for channel independent directional earth fault protection. Application of the directional earth fault scheme is restricted to using the same pilot as the distance protection. The relay provides 3 pole tripping only. Standard features of the three models are summarised in Table 2.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Zone 1 forward directional instantaneous Zone 1X reversible directional time-delayed zone Zone 2 forward directional time-delayed zone Zone 3 offset time-delayed zone Zone 4 reverse time-delayed zone Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground protection Phase-to-ground protection user selectable quadrilateral element Instantaneous, forward or non-directional Two time-delayed elements either forward, reverse, or non-directional Inverse definite minimum time element, non-directional Basic Z1X PUR PUR unblock POR1 POR1 unblock POR2 POR2 WI POR2 unblock POR2 unblock WI Blocking 1 Blocking2 POR POR unblock POR WI POR WI unblock Blocking 1 Blocking 2 SOTF Trip on reclose Instantaneous phase overcurrent Loss of load Direct transfer trip Stub bus protection VTS Power swing blocking CB failure protection Storage of 8 setting groups Non-isolated parallel and serial port Isolated serial printer port Isolated RS232 port Isolated K-Bus serial port Isolated IRIG-B port Sequence of event recording fault records disturbance records fault location metering
Distance zones
DEF
Schemes
Independent DEF (LFZR111 and LFZR112 only)
Features
Communications
Non-protection features
Table 2:
Standard Features
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
3.1
PROTECTION FEATURES
Phase selector A superimposed current phase selector detects the faulted phase(s) and provides full phase selection for all fault types. The phase selector decisions are used to determine which distance elements can initiate a trip. This avoids the problems of overreach which can occur for ground fault quadrilateral characteristics in the presence of double phase-toground faults. The phase selector is capable of making changes in the selection when additional phases become involved in the fault.
3.2 3.2.1
Distance protection Zones of protection Five zones of distance protection are provided. Zone 1 is a forward directional instantaneous trip zone. Zone 1X is a reversible directional zone for use as zone 1 extension scheme extra time-delayed zone busbar or transformer back-up (reversed) A single control is used to reverse both phase fault and ground fault elements. Zone 2 is a forward directional zone for use as time delayed zone and/or permissive underreach scheme tripping element permissive overreach scheme tripping element blocking schemes Zone 3 is an offset zone used as a time-delayed zone for remote back-up and busbar/transformer protection Zone 4 is a reverse directional zone that has a high-speed output used for POR2 for weak infeed echo current reversal guard blocking element for blocking schemes Speed of operation is of more significance than accuracy for the blocking schemes. Zone 4 is also available for time-delayed busbar/transformer back-up using the more accurate algorithm of the other zone elements. Phase-to-phase protection and phase-to-ground protection each consist of three mho elements for each zone, and phase-to-ground protection also includes three user selectable quadrilateral elements for each zone. Every zone has separate positive-sequence reach settings for phase and ground faults.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Zone 3 (forward offset)
Blinder (forward)
Directional (reverse)
Zone 2 Zone 1X Zone 1 Zone 3 (reverse offset)
Zone 1X (reverse) Blinder (reverse)
Directional (forward)
Zone 4
Figure 1: 3.2.2
Phase-to-phase distance characteristics
Phase-to-phase distance characteristics The distance characteristics used for phase-to-phase faults are shown in Figure 1. There are three sets of these connected across phases A-B, B-C and C-A. The characteristics are supervised by a directional line and are restricted by load blinders.
3.2.3
Phase-to-ground distance characteristics The distance characteristics used for phase-to-ground faults are shown in Figure 2. There are three sets of these connected across phase A-N, B-N, and C-N. The characteristics are supervised by a directional line and are restricted by load blinders in a similar manner to the phase-to-phase characteristics. The blinders, which are omitted from the figure for clarity, are used to restrict the resistive coverage of the mho elements. In common with the phase fault elements, the forward blinder is monitored by the forward directional decision and the reverse blinder by the reverse directional decision. The zones are similar to the phase-to-phase zones but the user may select a quadrilateral in addition to the mho element. A single selection enables the quadrilaterals for all zones. When quadrilateral characteristics are selected, the resistive reach line for each zone is used to limit the reach of the associated mho element.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

zone 3 reverse offset zone 3 forward offset
zone 2 zone 1x zone 1
zone 1x reversed
zone 4
Figure 2: 3.3
Phase-to-ground distance characteristics
Directional earth fault characteristics Two alternative DEF directional measurements are provided. Forward and reverse directional decisions are used in conjunction with neutral current level detectors for both instantaneous and time-delayed ground fault protection, and for pilot schemes. The directional measurements are disabled if any pole of the circuit breaker is open. The normal choice for the directional element is neutral (zero-sequence) quantities, but a negative-sequence based measurement is provided for use on parallel line applications where the busbars at one or both ends are not common.
3.4
Level detectors A number of current and voltage level detectors are provided.
3.4.1
Phase current level detectors A fixed setting level detector is provided for each phase current for use in pole dead logic and switch on-to-fault (SOTF).
3.4.1.1 Fixed setting
3.4.1.2 High-Set (Loss of load) A variable setting level detector is provided for each phase current for use in an optional loss of load feature.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.4.1.3 Extra high-set An extra variable setting level detector is provided for each phase current. This can be used as instantaneous overcurrent elements or for stub-bus protection. 3.4.2 Phase voltage level detectors A fixed setting level detector is provided for each phase voltage for use in pole dead logic and SOTF. 3.4.3 Neutral current level detectors Three high-set level detectors are provided. The first set provides instantaneous ground overcurrent protection while the others are used for definite timedelayed ground overcurrent protection. 3.4.4 Neutral voltage level detectors
3.4.4.1 Fixed setting A fixed setting neutral voltage level detector is provided as part of the VT supervision feature. 3.4.4.2 Variable setting A variable setting neutral voltage level detector is provided for use in DEF schemes with weak infeed. 3.5 Protection schemes The relay includes basic scheme logic for stand-alone operation (without signalling channel) and logic for optional schemes. The features of the basic scheme are available whether or not an additional scheme is selected. A list of the schemes follows: Non-pilot schemes Basic scheme Zone 1 extension scheme Pilot schemes Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) Permissive overreach schemes (POR1 and POR2) Blocking schemes (Blocking 1 and Blocking 2) 3.6 Independent channel DEF The DEF schemes are also available as independently selectable schemes, using a separate signalling channel. It is also possible to select any combination of DEF and distance schemes, eg. POR distance can be used with DEF blocking. 3.7 Block auto-reclose logic (BAR) The relay blocks an external auto-reclose relay following a three pole trip. The user is able to select blocking or enabling of an external auto-reclose relay. Both normally open and normally closed contacts are available for this feature, ie. by suitable selection of the relay version. On the single pole tripping version of the relay any condition requiring BAR will result in a three pole trip.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.8
Power swing blocking (PSB) The presence of a power swing is detected using the continuous presence of superimposed currents. A power swing indication is produced if any zone element operates while a power swing is detected. The user may select to block the operation of any or all zones (including pilot trip) in the presence of a power swing, or may select indication of swing only.
3.9
Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Failure of a VT fuse is detected by the neutral voltage level detector and the biased neutral current level detector. Logic is included to ensure that a VTS decision is not produced under inappropriate conditions, eg. while a single pole is open. The VTS feature may be selected to block all voltage dependant tripping functions of the relay and issue an indication and alarm, or to issue the indication and alarm only.
3.10
Circuit breaker failure protection Detection of breaker failure results in the issue of a local alarm. The user is able to choose to operate a contact for remote alarm or initiate a breaker fail trip. If such a trip is initiated, the user is also able to block auto-reclose if desired.
SECTION 4.
RELAY SELF-MONITORING
In addition to the VTS and circuit breaker failure features, the relay performs tests of its hardware and software and issues alarms and diagnostic information in the event of failure or potential failure. These tests are performed at power-up and/or continuously while the relay is in service.
SECTION 5.
IN-SERVICE TESTING
Menu options are provided to allow the user to display and monitor, via the parallel port: the status of all opto-isolator inputs the status of all output contacts the status of all relay elements (distance measurements, level detectors, etc.) These signals are available in groups of eight and their selection does not affect the normal operation of the relay.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 6.
COMMUNICATIONS
Two non-isolated communication ports, accessible only when the relay cover is removed, are provided on the front of the relay: a parallel port for connection to a local printer (centronics) for printing settings, fault records, or sequence of events records, and for test points. This port is also able to print event and/or fault records as they occur. a serial port for connection to a local PC. Three isolated communication ports, for permanent connection to external equipment, are provided on the rear of the relay: a serial port for connection to remote equipment via a modem an IRIG-B port for automatic setting and synchronisation of the relay's calendar clock a K-Bus serial port
SECTION 7.
USER INTERFACE
Facilities allow the relay to be set locally, using an integral display and keypad. It is also possible to download, and retrieve settings in file form using a local or remote PC. Additional software (LFZRCOM) is available to allow settings files to be prepared remotely (off-line). It is possible to retrieve event records, fault records, and disturbance records in file form via the serial ports or the K-Bus port.
SECTION 8.
8.1 8.1.1
PERIPHERAL FEATURES
Records Events records The relay records and makes available for local or remote display or print-out, time-tagged details of any chosen event. All relay starts (operation of any element which initiates a delayed trip timer) and trips will be recorded, and the user may elect to include events in any or all of the following categories: the opening or closing of any output contact the receipt of any signal to a relay opto-isolator input the issue of a scheme alarm (eg. PSB or VTS) the change of any setting or selection of a new setting group the issue of a relay self-test error (eg. digital signal processor (DSP) program memory error). The relay stores, in non-volatile memory, at least 48 events in chronological order, and it is possible to view any or all of the stored records. When the available record storage space is exhausted, the relay automatically deletes the oldest record to make room for the new one.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
8.1.2
Fault records When a fault occurs, causing a relay start or trip, additional information is stored in the event record. It is possible to view or print out on an external printer, on demand, any or all of these fault records, independently of the other event records. Each fault record includes time-tagged details of relay trips, faulted phase(s), trip type, operating time and fault location. The record also includes the system frequency, prefault and fault currents and voltages, and positive-, negative- and zero- sequence quantities, all expressed in magnitude and phase angle. The user has the option of displaying the fault record information as phase-toground or phase-to-phase quantities.
8.1.3
Disturbance records A separate system of recording time-tagged disturbance data is provided. Disturbance recording is initiated by one or more of the following options: any relay start or trip any scheme alarm (eg. VTS or PSB) external trigger by specific opto-isolator input The disturbance recordings have the following characteristics: nine analog channels 32 status channels, selected from any combination of relay contacts, optoisolator inputs and scheme logic inputs or outputs prefault time 100ms to 500ms in 100ms steps post fault time 100ms to 5s in 100ms steps number of samples per nominal cycle: 12 or 36 These records are stored in RAM and are therefore not available following a power failure or after the relay has been de-energised. Versions of the relay with the standard 4Mb of RAM are able to store two disturbance records of the maximum duration and the maximum sample rate. The optional additional 4Mb permits the storage of an additonal 4 records of this type. Reducing the duration of the records, and/or reducing the sample rate, permits the storage of more records. When the memory allocated for the storage of disturbance records is full, the oldest record is discarded to make way for the new one. Disturbance records are made available for local or remote display using Courier Access Software, Protection Access Software or LFZRCom.
8.2
Calendar clock The calendar clock used for event and disturbance record time-tagging has a resolution of 1ms. It can be set via the menu or remotely via the serial ports. Synchronisation is by IRIG-B. The accuracy of the real time clock when not synchronised is better than 12 parts per million which represents approximately 1s per day.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
8.3
Fault location The integral fault location uses a new single-ended algorithm developed at Bath University. The algorithm is designed to minimise errors in fault location caused by fault resistance and remote infeed.
8.4
Metering The relay is able to display locally, and make available for remote display, the values of frequency, phase currents and voltages, watts, VArs and positive-, negative- and zero-sequence currents and voltages. These quantities can be expressed as rms magnitude, and phase angle with respect to A phase volts and may be displayed as phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase quantities and as either primary or secondary values.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 9.0 LABELS

LFZR
111S500016D
ZF8468 002
800939D Serial No. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS EXTERNAL RESISTANCE BOX ARRANGEMENT/OUTLINE POS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ASSEMBLY GJ0346 001 GM0009 016 GJ0331 001 GJ0343 002 GJ0334 001 ZJ0268 002 ZJ0268 001 ZJ0267 001 ZJ0267 002 ZJ0267 002 ZJ0267 001 ZJ0269 001 ZJ0271 001 ------ZJ0270 001
:10LFZR111 06/2 :GJ0378/1
DESCRIPTION CASE FRONT BUS FRONT PANEL POWER SUPPLY INPUT MODULE OPTO INPUT PCB OPTO INPUT PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB BACKPLANE BUFFER PCB HOST PROCESSOR SPARE SLOT PROTECTION PROCESSOR
8 9
1 2
3 4
5 6
!
REFER TO HANDBOOK BEFORE CHANGING MODULE
1999 ALSTOM T&D PROTECTION & CONTROL LTD Software contained within this equipment shall not be copied or otherwise reproduced
Terminals of each circuit must be connected together before flash testing between circuits or to earth
Use external resistor(s)
Translations of these labels appear in publication R4125.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 1 Chapter 2 Application Notes
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 1 Chapter 2 Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.1.1 1.2.1.2 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.1.3 4.4.2 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.1.1 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 RELAY CHARACTERISTICS Phase fault characteristics Distance zones Directional line Load blinders Ground fault characteristics Distance zones Distance zones (mho) Distance zones (quadrilateral) Directional line Load blinders Neutral compensation Resistive reach setting of quadrilateral elements Automatic compensation of quadrilateral reach line angle DISTANCE PROTECTION SETTINGS Zone 1 reach Zone 1x reach Zone 2 reach Zone 2 time delay Zone 3 reach Zone 3 time delay Zone 4 reach Mutual coupling Effect of mutual coupling on zone 1 setting Effect of mutual coupling on zone 2 setting DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION Instantaneous element Time delayed element Channel aided tripping DEF directional line PROTECTION SCHEMES Basic scheme Zone 1 extension scheme Loss of load accelerated tripping Channel-aided distance schemes Permissive schemes Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) Permissive overreaching schemes Permissive scheme unblocking logic Blocking schemes Blocking 1 scheme Blocking 2 scheme DEF channel-aided schemes DEF permissive overreach scheme (DEF POR) DEF permissive overreach weak infeed trip (DEF POR WI) DEF blocking schemes DEF blocking 1 scheme 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 15 16 17 17 17 17 23 24 24 25 27 27 28 29 29
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 1 Chapter 2 Contents 30 31 31 31 34 34 36 36 36 36 36 41 41 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 44 45 46 48 48 48 49 49 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 53 53 53 53 54 55 56
4.5.2.2 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.1.1 4.6.1.2 4.6.1.3 4.6.1.4 4.6.2 4.6.2.1 4.6.2.2 4.6.2.3 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 10.1 10.2 11. 12. 12.1 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.3 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 17.9 17.10 17.11 17.12 17.13 17.14 17.15 17.16
DEF blocking 2 scheme Current reversal guard logic Permissive overreach schemes Permissive overreach scheme POR1 Permissive overreach schemes, POR2 and POR2 WI trip DEF scheme POR Blocking 2 scheme DEF schemes current reversal logic DEF scheme POR Directional earth fault blocking 1 scheme Directional earth fault blocking 2 scheme BLOCK AUTO-RECLOSE (BAR) VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION (VTS) POWER SWING BLOCKING (PSB) SWITCH-ON-TO-FAULT (SOTF) TRIP ON RECLOSE (TOR) HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENT Instantaneous overcurrent element Stub bus protection CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION TAPPED FEEDER PROTECTION Apparent impedance seen by relay Permissive schemes Permissive underreach schemes Permissive overreach schemes Blocking schemes ALTERNATIVE SETTING GROUPS FAULT LOCATOR RELAY SENSITIVITY CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS WORKED EXAMPLE Objective System data Relay settings Zone 1 reach settings Zone 2 reach settings Zone 3 reach settings Ground fault neutral compensation settings Power swing blocking Load blinders Permissive overreach schemes for POR2, POR2 WI trip Reverse-looking zone 4 setting (if required) Current reversal guard Instantaneous overcurrent protection Loss-of-load accelerated trip (LOL) Check on comparison voltage at zone 1 reach Current transformer requirements
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 1 of 60
1.
1.1
RELAY CHARACTERISTICS
Phase fault characteristics Figure 1 depicts the phase fault characteristics common to all basic models of the LFZR.
Blinder (forward)
Zone 4
Figure 1. 1.1.1 Distance zones
Phase fault characteristics
Zones 1 and 2 are forward-looking mho elements. The following polarizing options are menu selectable. Memory polarized mho This uses a 20 cycle memory of the prefault voltage, tending to crosspolarization when the memory is not available. The cross-polarizing signal is derived from the remaining phase-to-ground voltage. For example, the A-B element is memory-polarized from the C-G voltage signal. This method of polarizing may produce a large dynamic expansion of the relay characteristic (effectively 100% memory or memory-polarized) which provides a high degree of resistive expansion under fault conditions. Directional offset mho This characteristic is provided for underground cable applications when the effects of sound phase and memory polarizing are undesirable. A reverse offset, set to 16% of the forward reach, is provided to ensure operation for close-up faults. A self-polarized characteristic may not operate for close-up faults when the polarizing voltage collapses to zero. Directionality is achieved by the directional element described in Section 1.1.2.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Figure 2a illustrates the application of a memory-polarized characteristic applied to a cable circuit. The impedance of the cable is typically small and at a relatively low angle. As can be seen from the generated characteristic, faults on the cable present impedances away from the effective relay characteristic angle and approach the relay operating boundary. This may result in increased relay operating time.
ZL R Solid fault -Zs
Memory-polarized Mho
Figure 2a X
ZL R Solid fault
-Zs
Directional line (memory polarized) Figure 2b
Figure 2.
Fault characteristics - memory-polarized and directional offset
Figure 2b shows the directional offset characteristic employed in the LFZR. As can be seen, a solid fault on the cable presents an impedance on the relay characteristic angle.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Zone 1X is similar to zones 1 and 2 but its direction is reversible. Zone 3 is an offset mho element. The offset can be set either forward or reverse. The reverse offset provides back-up protection for busbars behind the relay location. A forward offset provides more effective back-up protection for remote forward resistive faults, without the load encroachment problems of a mho element with no forward offset. Figure 3 shows how the use of a forward offset allows zone 3 to avoid load impedance and provides optimum resistive coverage for remote faults.
X Z3 Forward load blinder
Enhanced resistive coverage for remote faults Z2
Z3 o/s
Directional line
Figure 3.
Use of zone 3 forward offset and load blinder
Zone 4 is a reverse-looking mho element with the same polarizing options as zones 1, 1X and 2. Zone 4 has two separate modes of operation that control separate output contacts. One mode provides similar accuracy and operating time to the other zones, and is intended to provide reverse back-up protection. The second mode is high-speed with a reduced accuracy, and is used to detect reverse faults for blocking schemes and also to provide reverse decisions for permissive overreach schemes.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
1.1.2
Directional line The operation of the mho elements of the relay are supervised by directional elements (shown in Figure 1) having a characteristic angle of 45. These elements are polarized by the memory voltage used for the memory polarized mho when available, or from a signal derived from the unfaulted phase (phaseto-ground) voltage. These elements directionalize the offset mho characteristic and also add a further degree of directional security to the memory/memorypolarized characteristics for complex resistive fault and load conditions.
1.1.3
Load blinders Forward and reverse load blinders are provided to restrict operation of the mho elements in the load impedance area. Load blinders are used in preference to a lenticular characteristic due to the limited resistive coverage afforded by lenticular zones for remote faults. It is also possible to remove the blinder from zone 3 when a forward offset is used. Figure 3 shows an example. The angles of the blinders are the same as the angle settings for the zone 2 (forward) and zone 4 (reverse) elements. Blinder operation is also gated by operation of the directional line; ie. the forward blinder will operate only if the directional line has indicated a forward fault, and vice versa for the reverse element. It should be ensured that the reverse load blinder reach is set to approximately 120% of the forward load blinder reach when a reverse distance element is used (zone 4) in either the blocking schemes or the POR2 scheme. This will avoid remote zone 2 operation without local zone 4 operation for marginal fault conditions.
1.2 1.2.1
Ground fault characteristics Distance zones Figure 4 shows the phase-to-ground fault characteristics common to all models of the LFZR. When quadrilateral elements are selected, both mho and quadrilateral elements are enabled at the same time. In this case the load blinders of the relay are inhibited and the resistive reach of the mho elements is restricted by the quadrilateral resistive reach lines.
1.2.1.1 Distance zones (mho) When mho elements are selected for phase-to-ground fault protection, the same zones of operation and polarizing options are available as for the phase fault mho elements. As discussed for the phase fault elements, the memory/memorypolarized characteristics can produce a large dynamic expansion. This is beneficial for ground fault applications where the highest level of fault resistance is present.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
zone 1x reversed
zone 4
Figure 4.
1.2.1.2 Distance zones (quadrilateral) The dynamic expansion of the mho elements may not provide sufficient resistive coverage for all applications (eg. short transmission lines). The quadrilateral elements should be enabled for ground fault protection when this is encountered. Independent resistive reach settings are available for each zone. The directional quadrilateral zones (zone 1, 1X, 2 and 4) are each produced by combining a reactance line, a resistance blinder and a directional line. The reactance line has the same reach on the characteristic angle as the mho element for that particular zone. It is polarized from negative-sequence current to provide optimum reach control for single phase-to-ground faults. When negative-sequence current is not a reliable polarizing signal (eg. when one phase of the circuit breaker is open) then the reactance line is polarized from the faulted phase current. The offset zone 3 characteristic is produced from two reactance lines and two resistance blinders. The forward and reverse reaches are the same as for the corresponding zone 3 mho elements and the reach lines are polarized in the same way as the directional quadrilateral reach lines.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
1.2.2
Directional line The ground fault mho elements are supervised by the same directional elements which form part of the quadrilateral characteristics. They have a characteristic angle of 45 and are polarized by the 20 cycle memory of the phase-to-ground voltage, or by a signal derived from the healthy phase-to-phase voltage when the memory signal is not available. Alternatively, the DEF directional line is available for both the quadrilateral and the mho elements when the system is resistively grounded at multiple points. Under certain conditions reverse ground fault current can be 'swamped' by the forward load current, making directional discrimination difficult for a close-up reverse fault. Use of a zero-sequence directional element to control ground fault tripping means that a directional decision is made using fault induced signals only. The negative-sequence DEF directional line is recommended when problems with mutual coupling are expected. The user should note that when the DEF directional line is chosen then it will have its chosen characteristic angle; ie. not necessarily 45.
1.2.3
Load blinders Load blinders are available as described in Section 1.1.3. These blinders are operational when only the mho ground fault elements are selected. When quadrilateral characteristics are selected, the resistive reach lines are used as the load blinders for the mho elements.
1.2.4
Residual compensation Vectorial residual compensation is applied to ground fault impedance elements of each zone independently. Vectorial compensation provides accurate compensation on systems when the zero-sequence impedance angle differs significantly from the positive-sequence impedance angle. This is most common for cable circuits. Separate compensation for each zone allows more accurate ground fault reach control for elements which are set to overreach the protected line; ie. they cover other circuits which may have different zero-sequence to positive-sequence impedance ratios.
1.2.5
Resistive reach setting of quadrilateral elements The resistive reach setting of the quadrilateral element should be set to cover the desired level of ground fault resistance, but to avoid operation during minimum load impedance. Fault resistance is generally comprised of arc resistance and tower footing resistance. In addition, to ensure zone 1 reach accuracy, the resistive reach of the relay should not be greater than 15 times the zone 1 ground loop reach.
1.2.6
Automatic compensation of quadrilateral reach line angle If the reactance line of a quadrilateral characteristic was polarized from the phase current it would be parallel to the resistive axis. If a ground fault is applied to the system the fault resistance is represented by a vector on the R-X diagram with an angle which is dictated by the relative phase of the fault current and relay current. In addition, the magnitude of the fault resistance
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
vector is amplified by the ratio of fault current to relay phase current magnitude. If the angle of the fault current is not the same as that of the relay phase current, then a tilt will occur in the fault resistance vector in either an upward or downward direction, depending on the prefault power flow as shown in Figure 5. If the quadrilateral reach line remains parallel to the resistive axis a resultant underreaching or overreaching effect may occur for resistive ground faults on double-ended systems.
Pre-fault power flow B
jX B RF
RF
Negative sequence reactance line A
Non-compensated reactance line R
(a) Preventing zone -1 overreach
Pre-fault power flow A B
jX
RF B Negative-sequence polarized line
Phase current polarized line A
RF R
(b) Preventing zone -1 underreach
Figure 5.
Prevention of zone 1 overreach and zone 1 underreach
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
It can be shown that under a single phase-to-ground fault condition the angle of the relay negative-sequence current is approximately equal to that of the total fault current. If the reactance line of the quadrilateral element is polarized from negative-sequence current instead of the phase current, then it will tilt at a similar angle to that of the fault resistance vector (shown in Figure 5). For this technique quadrilateral element underreach and overreach can be avoided for double-end fed resistive ground faults.
2.
2.1
DISTANCE PROTECTION SETTINGS

Zone 1 reach The zone 1 elements of a distance relay should be set to cover as much of the protected line as possible, allowing instantaneous tripping for as many faults as possible. In most applications the zone 1 reach should not be set to respond to faults beyond the protected line. For an underreaching application the zone 1 reach must be set to account for any possible overreaching errors. These errors come from the relay, the VTs and CTs and inaccurate line impedance data. Therefore, it is recommended that the reach of the zone 1 distance elements is restricted to 80 - 85% of the protected line impedance, with zone 2 elements set to cover the final 20% of the line.
2.2
Zone 1X reach Zone 1X is a reversible directional zone. The setting chosen for zone 1X, if used at all, depends upon its application. Typical applications include its use as: zone 1 extension scheme additional time-delayed zone reverse back-up protection zone for busbars and transformers, especially when zone 3 is chosen to have a forward offset. Use of zone 1X as an additional forward zone of protection may be required by some users to follow any existing practice of using more than three forward zones of distance protection. Zone 1X may also be useful for dealing with mutual coupling effects when protecting a parallel set of lines.
2.3
Zone 2 reach The zone 2 elements should be set to cover the last 20% of the line not covered by zone 1. Allowing for underreaching errors, the zone 2 reach should be set in excess of 120% of the protected line impedance for all fault conditions. When channel-aided schemes are used, fast operation of the zone 2 elements is required. Therefore, it is beneficial to set zone 2 to reach as far as possible, such that faults on the protected line are well within its reach. A constraining requirement is that, when possible, zone 2 does not reach beyond the zone 1 reach of adjacent line protection. When this is not possible it is necessary to coordinate with the zone 2 elements of relays on adjacent lines. For this reason the zone 2 reach should be set to cover less than or equal to 50% of the shortest adjacent line if possible.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.3.1
Zone 2 time delay The zone 2 time delay is set to co-ordinate with zone 1 fault clearance time for adjacent lines. The total fault clearance time consists of the downstream zone 1 operating time plus the associated breaker operating time. Allowance must also be made for the zone 2 elements to reset following clearance of an adjacent line fault and also for a safety margin. A typical minimum zone 2 time delay is in the order of 200ms. This time may have to be adjusted when the relay is required to co-ordinate with other zone 2 protection or slower forms of back-up protection for adjacent circuits.
2.4
Zone 3 reach The zone 3 elements usually provide overall back-up protection for adjacent circuits. The forward reach is therefore set to approximately 120% of the combined impedance of the protected line plus the longest adjacent line, possibly allowing for a higher apparent impedance of the adjacent line. When the offset is set to reverse, providing back-up protection for the local busbar, the offset reach is typically set to 25% of the zone 1 reach of the relay for short transmission lines (<30km) or 10% of the zone 1 reach for long transmission lines. When a forward offset is selected, it must be ensured that all faults up to the zone 3 reach can be cleared. For this reason the forward offset reach should be less than the zone 2 forward reach. To allow an adequate overlap between zone 2 and zone 3, the offset should be at least 20% of the diameter of the zone 3 characteristic; ie. Z3offset < 1.25(Z2 - (0.2xZ3)).
2.4.1
Zone 3 time delay The zone 3 time delay is typically set with the same considerations made for the zone 2 time delay except that the delay needs to co-ordinate with the downstream zone 2 fault clearance. A typical minimum zone 3 operating time is in the region of 400ms. Again, this may need to be modified to co-ordinate with slower forms of back-up protection on adjacent circuits.
2.5
Zone 4 reach The reverse-looking zone 4 element can be set to provide back-up protection for busbars or transformers. However, when zone 4 is used to provide blocking signals or reverse directional decisions for the blocking or permissive overreach schemes, its reach must be greater than the zone 2 reach setting of the remote relay (accounting for the dynamic expansion of the remote zone 2 directional impedance characteristic). The reverse load blinder must also be set greater than the foward load blinder in these applications (typically 120% of the forward reach).
2.6
Mutual coupling When overhead lines are connected in parallel or run in close proximity for the whole or part of their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. The positive- and negative-sequence coupling is small and can be neglected. The zero-sequence coupling is more significant and will affect relay measurement during ground faults with parallel line operation.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Zero-sequence mutual coupling causes a distance relay to either underreach or overreach, depending on the direction of zero-sequence current flow in the parallel line. However, it can be shown that this underreach or overreach will not affect relay discrimination during parallel line operation; ie. it is not possible to overreach for faults beyond the protected line and neither is it possible to underreach to such a degree that no zone 1 overlap exists. A channel-aided scheme will therefore still respond to faults within the protected line and remain secure during external faults. Some applications exist, however, where the effects of mutual coupling should be addressed. 2.6.1 Effect of mutual coupling on zone 1 setting For the case shown in Figure 6, where one circuit of a parallel line is out of service and grounded at both ends, a ground fault at the remote bus may result in incorrect operation of the zone 1 ground fault elements. It may be desirable to reduce the zone 1 ground fault reach for this application. The alternative setting groups of the LFZR can be used to provide this facility.
Z1 G/F (Optional) Z1 G/F (Normal)
Z MO
Figure 6. 2.6.2
Zone 1 reach considerations
Effect of mutual coupling on zone 2 setting When setting zone 2 ground fault elements on parallel circuits, the effects of zero-sequence mutual coupling must be considered. Mutual coupling results in the zone 2 ground fault elements underreaching. To ensure adequate coverage an extended reach setting may be required. For the case of parallel lines, where the line to be protected is long and there is a relatively short adjacent line, it is difficult to set the reach of the zone 2 elements to cover 120% of the protected line impedance for all faults but not more than 50% of the adjacent line. This problem can be exacerbated when a significant additonal allowance has to be made for the zero-sequence mutual impedance in the case of ground faults (see Section 2.6). Some alleviation is possible via the independent phase and ground fault reach settings. For the case of parallel lines, operation of the zone 2 ground fault elements tends to underreach. It is therefore desirable to boost the setting of the ground fault elements such that they will have a comparable reach to the phase fault elements.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Under single circuit operation, no mutual coupling exists and the zone 2 ground fault elements may overreach beyond 50% of the adjacent line, necessitating the need for co-ordination with other zone 2 elements. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the ground fault settings to that of the phase fault elements for single circuit operation, as shown in Figure 7(ii). Changing between these two settings can be achieved by using the alternative setting groups available on the LFZR.
Z2 ' Boost ' G/F Z2 PH
ZMO
(i) Group 1 Z2 ' Reduced' G/F Z2 PH
(ii) Group 2
Figure 7.
Mutual coupling example - zone 2 reach considerations
3.
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

For high resistance ground faults, the situation may arise where no distance elements can operate. In this case it is necessary to provide supplementary ground fault protection. There are 3 modes of operation for the LFZR directional earth fault protection: instantaneous tripping time-delayed tripping channel-aided scheme
3.1
Instantaneous element The instantaneous tripping element of the relay can be set to be either nondirectional or forward-looking. For most applications, the setting of the instantaneous element is high and chosen such that tripping can only occur for faults on the protected line. Figure 8 is a simplified illustration of how this is achieved. In this diagram the fault level decreases for faults away from the source. The settings of relays 1, 2 and 3 must be in excess of fault levels If1, If2 and If3 respectively to provide discrimination. The settings must be based on maximum generation plant conditions.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The instantaneous DEF elements are capable of performing single pole tripping when the sensitive phase selector can identify a single phase-to-ground fault. Any other type of fault will result in three pole tripping.
If
If1 If2 If3
E R1 Setting R2 R1 > If1 R2 > If2 R3 > If3 R3
Figure 8. 3.2
Instantaneous element setting
Time delayed element There are three independent directional time delayed elements within the relay to aid protection co-ordination and to give multiple stages of ground fault protection. The first is an inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) element and the others are definite time delay elements. The IDMT characteristic can be selected from 8 curves (4 IEC curves and 4 IEEE curves). All time-delayed tripping elements perform three pole tripping.
3.3
Channel aided tripping Channel aided DEF protection is available on all models of the LFZR. The option of using the same channel as the distance scheme or an independent channel is offered in all models except the LFZR113, where only a common channel can be used. When a common channel is used the DEF protection shares the distance protection scheme logic. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. When independent channels are used it is possible to use different schemes for the distance and DEF protection. For example, PUR distance can be used with a POR DEF scheme. The channel-aided schemes can perform single pole tripping.
3.4
DEF directional line Two directional lines are available for DEF. One version is zero-sequence polarized while the other is negative-sequence polarized. The zero-sequence version is the normal choice but the negative-sequence based measurement should be selected when problems with mutual coupling exist.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
It is possible to select the DEF directional line as the directional line used by the mho and quadrilateral ground distance elements. The zero-sequence polarized DEF directional line should be chosen when the power system is multiple resistance grounded. The negative-sequence polarized DEF directional line should be chosen when problems with mutual coupling exist. It should be noted that when either of these directional lines are chosen then they will have their associated characteristic angle.
4.
PROTECTION SCHEMES
The relays include basic multi-zone distance scheme logic for stand-alone operation (no channel is available) and logic for a number of optional additonal schemes. The features of the basic scheme are available whether or not an additional scheme has been selected. The following features are available for all schemes: On the LFZR111 version of the relay, the user is able to select either three pole tripping only or single and three pole tripping. If a fault occurs on one of the remaining phases during two phase operation, both the remaining phases are tripped. An opto-isolator input is available to allow external conversion of single pole trips to three pole trips; eg. when auto-reclose is out of service. A menu setting allows the direction of the relay to be reversed. A warning is given on the relay display when the direction is reversed. This feature is intended for special operational use; eg. when a substitute breaker is used. This feature should not be used to correct for errors in CT wiring. The relay is capable of storing up to eight groups of settings (not including settings which are common to all groups) where each group can be set to cover requirements of different system configurations. It is possible to select the active group of settings either locally via the menu, or remotely. An option is available on the opto selectable setting group version of the relay (LFZR112) which will allow the setting group to be selected by a set of five opto-isolator inputs. This permits the automatic changing of settings by control contacts in response to changes in the system configuration.
4.1
Basic scheme The BASIC distance scheme is suitable for applications where no channel is available. Figure 9 shows the simplified scheme logic.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Zone 3
Zone 2 Zone 1 A Z B
Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3
Typical application Relay A Z1 TZ1 1 Z1X TZ1X Trip A Trip B Relay B TZ1 1 TZ1X Z1X Z1
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
Z2
Z3
TZ3
TZ3
Z3
Z4
TZ4 Note: All timers can be set instantaneous
TZ4
Z4
Figure 9.
Simplified scheme logic - BASIC scheme
The BASIC scheme incorporates the following features: Instantaneous zone 1 tripping. Zone 1 can be enabled or disabled for phase faults and/or ground faults and has an optional time delay of 0 to 1s. Time delayed tripping by zones 1X, 2, 3 and 4. Any of these zones may be enabled or disabled for either phase or ground faults. The measuring elements of these zones are available for use with channel-aided schemes irrespective of whether the time delayed trip paths are enabled. Directional earth fault protection (see Sections 3.1 and 3.2) Switch-on-to-fault logic Trip on reclose logic Loss of load logic Direct transfer tripping logic Conversion to three pole tripping (when single pole tripping is selected on the LFZR111). An opto-isolator input is provided to convert all trips to three pole. Stub bus protection
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The BASIC scheme is suitable for single or parallel lines fed from one or both ends. The limitation of the BASIC scheme is that faults in the last 20% of the line are cleared after the zone 2 time delay. This is overcome by the use of one of the following schemes. 4.2 Zone 1 extension scheme Auto-reclose is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish the supply following a transient fault. A zone 1 extension scheme may be applied to a radial overhead feeder in order to provide high-speed protection for transient faults along the entire protected line. Figure 10 shows the simplified scheme logic for this application. In this scheme, zone 1X is set to overreach the protected line and its associated time delay is set to zero. A fault on the line, including one in the last 20% not covered by zone 1, now results in instantaneous tripping followed by autoreclosure. Operation of the auto-reclose relay is used to inhibit tripping from zone 1X so that upon reclosure the relay will operate with BASIC scheme logic
Zone 3 Zone 2 A Zone 1 Z Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 B
CRx CTx & Z1 TZ1 1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 TZ1X TZ2 TZ3 TZ4
CRx CTx & TZ1 1 TZ1X TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z1
Trip A Trip B
Optional features of scheme
Figure 10.
Simplified logic - zone 1 extension scheme
only. This allows co-ordination with downstream protection for permanent faults. With this scheme transient faults on the line are cleared instantaneously, which reduces the probability of a transient fault becoming permanent. However, the scheme can also operate for some faults on an adjacent line. Although this is followed by auto-reclosure with correct protection discrimination, increased breaker operations occur together with transient loss of supply to a substation. When this scheme is selected, trip on reclose logic should be disabled such that the protection following reclosure is scheme logic rather than switch-on-to-fault.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.3
Loss of load accelerated tripping The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in Figure 11. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole length of a doubleended circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the advantage of requiring neither a channel nor an external connection; ie. a zone 1 extension scheme requires an input from an auto-reclose relay. Any fault located within the reach of zone 1 will result in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker is tripped in zone 1 by the remote relay and the local relay can recognize this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy phases. This coupled with operation of a zone 2 element causes tripping of the local circuit breaker.
Z2 Z1
Z1 Z2
LOL-A LOL-B LOL-C
Z1
Z1
& 0
40ms
&
18ms
& Z2
Trip
Figure 11.
Loss-of-load accelerated trip scheme
For an accelerated trip to occur load current must be detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a 40ms window during which time a trip will occur if a zone 2 element operates. The accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be deduced as follows: t = Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18ms where Z1d = maximum downstream zone 1 trip time CB = Breaker operating time LDr = upstream level detector reset time For circuits with load teed off the protected line care must be taken in setting the loss of load feature to ensure that the level detector setting is above the teed load current. When selected, the loss of load feature operates in conjunction with the main distance scheme that is selected. In this way it provides high-speed clearance for end zone faults when the BASIC scheme is selected, or with permissive schemes it provides high-speed back-up clearance for end zone faults if the channel fails.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Note that Loss of load tripping will only operate where 3 pole tripping is used. 4.4 Channel-aided distance schemes When high-speed protection is required over the entire line a channel-aided scheme should be employed. The following channel-aided distance tripping schemes are available: Permissive underreach Permissive underreach unblocking Permissive overreach 1 Permissive overreach 1 unblocking Permissive overreach 2 Permissive overreach 2 unblocking Permissive overreach 2 weak infeed Permissive overreach 2 weak infeed unblocking Blocking 1 Blocking 2 4.4.1 Permissive schemes PUR PUR UNB POR1 POR1 UNB POR2 POR2 UNB POR2 WI POR2 WI UNB BLK1 BLK2
4.4.1.1 Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) To provide fast fault clearance for all faults, both transient and permanent, along the length of the protected circuit, it is necessary to use a channel-aided scheme. The simplest of these is the permissive underreach scheme (shown in Figure 12). The channel for a PUR scheme is keyed by operation of the underreaching zone 1 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 2 upon receipt of this signal then the relay will operate with no additional delay. Faults in the last 20% of the protected line are therefore cleared with no intentional time delay. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Z1 Z2 + CRX
Listed below are some of the main features/requirements for a permissive underreaching scheme: Only a simplex channel is required. The scheme has a high degree of security since the channel is only keyed for faults within the protected line. If the remote terminal of a line is open then faults in the remote 20% of the line are cleared via the zone 2 time delay of the local relay. If there is a weak or zero infeed from the remote line end (current below the relay sensitivity) then faults in the remote 20% of the line will be cleared via the zone 2 time delay of the local relay. If the channel fails only BASIC distance scheme tripping is available. 4.4.1.2 Permissive overreaching schemes Permissive overreach scheme 1 (POR1) Figure 13 shows the simplified scheme logic for the permissive overreach 1 scheme. The channel for a POR scheme (whether it is POR1 or POR2) is keyed from operation of the overreaching zone 2 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 2 then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Zone 3 Zone 2 A Zone 1 Z Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 B
CRx CTx & Z1 TZ1 1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 TZ1X TZ2 TZ3 TZ4
CRx CTx & TZ1 1 TZ1X TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z1
Trip A Trip B
Figure 12.
PUR scheme Z2 Z2 + CRX CB open + CRX
Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Open terminal echo:
The POR1 scheme has the following features/requirements: The scheme requires a duplex channel to prevent possible unwanted tripping of the relay due to spurious keying of the signalling equipment. This is necessary due to the fact that the channel is keyed (via zone 2) for faults external to the protected line. This scheme may be more advantageous than the permissive underreach scheme for the protection of short transmission lines since the resistive coverage of the mho zone 2 elements is greater than that of the zone 1 elements. To provide high-speed tripping when a line terminal is open, a signal echo feature is offered in the scheme logic which can be initiated when the line terminal circuit breaker is open (circuit breaker auxiliary contact initiation). By this means the permissive overreach scheme is able to provide fast tripping for any fault along the whole length of the line.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
To cater for the protection of parallel lines when sequential clearance of a fault on one circuit might lead to reversal of current in the parallel circuit and when the zone 2 elements are set to reach greater than 150% of the protected line, current reversal guard timers TP and TD are used to prevent maloperation of the healthy line protection. If the channel fails the permissive overreach 1 scheme will operate in the conventional BASIC mode.
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 A Z B
Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3
CRx CB Open & 1 & Z1 CTx
CRx CTx & 1 & Z1 CB Open
TZ1 1
Trip A Trip B
TZ1 1 TZ1X
Z1X
TZ1X
Z1X
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
Z2
Z3 Z4
TZ3
TZ3
Z3 Z4
TZ4
TZ4
Figure 13.
POR scheme 1
Permissive overreach scheme 2 (POR2) The POR2 scheme includes all the features applicable to POR1. In addition, the POR2 scheme uses the reverse-looking zone 4 of the relay as a reverse fault detector. This is used in the current reversal guard logic and in the weak infeed echo feature. The simplified scheme logic is shown in Figure 14.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 20 of 60 Z2 Z2 + CRX CB open + CRX no element operation + CRX
Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Open terminal echo: Weak infeed echo:
Zone 4 Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 A Z B
Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 4 Zone 3
Zone 4 CB Open
& CRx & 1 & CTx CRx CTx
& & 1 &
Zone 4
CB Open
Z1
TZ1 1
Trip A Trip B
TZ1 1 TZ1X
Z1
Z1X
TZ1X
Z1X
Z2 Z3 Z4
TZ2
TZ2
Z2 Z3 Z4
TZ3
TZ3
TZ4 Optional features of scheme
TZ4
Figure 14.
POR scheme 2
The scheme requires a duplex channel to prevent possible unwanted tripping of the relay due to spurious keying of the signalling equipment. This is necessary due to the fact that the channel is keyed (via zone 2) for faults external to the protected line. This scheme may be more advantageous than the permissive underreach scheme for the protection of short transmission lines since the resistive coverage of the mho zone 2 elements are greater than that of the zone 1 elements.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
To provide high-speed tripping when a line terminal is open, a signal echo feature is offered in the scheme logic which can be initiated when the line terminal circuit breaker is open (circuit breaker auxiliary contact initiation). By this means the permissive overreach scheme is able to provide fast tripping for any fault along the entire length of the line. High-speed current reversals in parallel lines (for cases where the required TP setting of the POR1 scheme is too long) are prevented by the use of the reverselooking zone 4 elements. To allow fast tripping at the sending end, in the event of a weak infeed at the remote end, weak infeed logic is used to echo the received signal back from the remote relay if the reverse zone 4 elements have not operated. If the channel fails, the permissive overreach 2 scheme will operate in the conventional BASIC mode. Permissive overreach scheme 2 weak infeed trip The POR2 WI trip scheme has all the features of the standard POR2 scheme and in addition it includes weak infeed tripping logic such that under weak infeed conditions tripping of the weak infeed breaker can occur. Figure 15 shows the simplified scheme logic for POR2 WI trip. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Open terminal echo: Weak infeed echo: weak infeed trip: Z2 Z2 + CRX CB open + CRX no element operation + CRX no element operation + LDOV reset + CRX
The scheme requires a duplex channel to prevent possible unwanted tripping of the relay due to spurious keying of the signalling equipment. This is necessary due to the fact that the channel is keyed (via zone 2) for faults external to the protected line. This scheme may be more advantageous than the permissive underreach scheme for the protection of short transmission lines since the resistive coverage of the zone 2 mho elements is greater than that of the zone 1 elements. To provide high-speed tripping when a line terminal is open, a signal echo feature is offered in the scheme logic which can be initiated when the line terminal circuit breaker is open (circuit breaker auxiliary contact initiation). By this means the permissive overreach scheme is able to provide fast tripping for any fault along the whole length of the line. High-speed current reversals in parallel lines (for cases where the required TP setting of the POR1 scheme is too long) are prevented by the use of the reverselooking zone 4 elements. To allow fast tripping at the sending end, in the event of a weak infeed at the remote end, weak infeed logic is used to echo the received signal back from the remote relay if the reverse zone 4 elements have not operated. An additional check that a voltage level detector (LDOV) has reset is necessary to allow tripping at the weak infeed terminal after a short time delay. The voltage check prevents tripping during spurious operations of the channel or during channel testing. A neutral voltage level detector is also available, when three pole tripping is selected, to provide increased sensitivity.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Zone 4
CB Open
& CRx CRx CTx
&
CB Open
Zone 4
& 1
CTx
& 1
Zone 4
LD0V
&
&
LD0V
& Z1
& Z1
TZ1
Trip A Trip B
TZ1
Z1X
TZ1X
TZ1X
Z1X
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
Z2
Z3
TZ3
TZ3
Z3
Z4
TZ4 Optional features of scheme
TZ4
Z4
Figure 15.
POR2 WI trip
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
If the channel fails then the permissive overreach 2 WI trip scheme will operate in the conventional BASIC mode. 4.4.1.3 Permissive scheme unblocking logic Permissive schemes using power line carrier as the communications medium may be required to transmit the permissive trip signal via a fault in the protected line. The signal may be attenuated by the fault which would prevent channel-aided tripping. This problem can be alleviated by using unblocking signal receive logic. In the normal state, voice frequency signalling equipment transmits a continuous guard frequency which is changed to the trip frequency under fault conditions when initiated by the associated distance scheme. The permissive scheme logic is converted from the standard form to the unblocking form by the addition of the signal receive logic as shown in Figure 16. This logic requires a permissive trip signal input CRX and a loss of guard signal input LGS from the signalling equipment.
0 T1
& 1 T2 0 & TDW 0 PSD
&
LGS CRX &
& 1
CRX1A CRX1B
LGS = 1 When guard signal is lost CRX = 1 When permissive trip signal is received PSD Permissive scheme disabled CRX1A Permissive trip signal to distance scheme CRX1B Permissive trip signal to DEF scheme T1 200ms Delay on drop off T2 150ms Delay on pick up TDW 0-98ms Delay on pick up
Figure 16.
Unblocking logic
When a fault occurs on the protected line and the distance scheme element that initiates signalling operates, it causes the signalling equipment to change transmission from the guard to the trip frequency. At the remote end this produces a CRX1A output in the unblocking signal receive logic. This signal, when passed to the permissive trip scheme logic, provides an immediate trip if the associated zone 2 element has operated. When a common channel is being used in the POR scheme this condition will also produce output CRX1B to permit tripping via the DEF scheme. When independent channels are used unblocking logic is selected separately for distance and DEF schemes when applicable.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
In the event of the permissive trip signal being attenuated by an internal fault both the guard and the trip signals might be lost. Under this condition the signal receive logic will give a permissive trip output via CRX1A after a discriminating delay TDw ( 0 - 98ms). If the condition is maintained for greater than the setting of T2 (150ms) the permissive distance scheme is disabled and a signalling equipment failure alarm is raised. The time delay TDW should be set to give time for the signalling equipment to change frequency and also to prevent tripping for faults outside the protected line in the event of short time signalling disturbances. To activate the scheme the guard signal must be present for the time of T1 (200ms). 4.4.2 Blocking schemes
4.4.2.1 Blocking 1 scheme Figure 17 shows the simplified scheme logic for the blocking 1 scheme. With a blocking scheme the channel is keyed from the reverse-looking zone 4 element. This scheme requires a simplex channel. It can also include logic to enable successful operation with a duplex channel, however an increase in the scheme timer TD may be required. (Refer to Section 4.6.2.1.) Reverse-looking zone 4 is used to send a blocking signal to the remote end to prevent unwanted tripping. When a simplex channel is used a blocking scheme can easily be applied to a multi-terminal line provided that outfeed does not occur for any internal faults. The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line. Therefore, there are no problems associated with power line carrier signalling equipment. This scheme provides similar resistive coverage to the permissive overreach scheme. If a line terminal is open fast tripping will still occur for faults along the whole of the protected line length. If the channel fails to send a blocking signal during a fault, fast tripping will occur for faults along the whole of the protected line, but also for faults within the next line section. If the channel is taken out of service then the relay will operate in the conventional BASIC mode. Fast tripping will still occur at a strong source line end for faults along the protected line section if there is weak or zero infeed at the other end of the protected line. A current reversal guard timer is included in the signal receive logic to prevent unwanted tripping of the relay on the healthy circuit under current reversal situations on a parallel circuit. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive a short time delay on channel-aided tripping TP must be used. Recommended TP setting = maximum channel operating time + 14ms Send logic: Reverse Z4 + not Z2 Trip logic: Z2 + not CRX
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Zone 4
CRx Fast Z4 & CTx
CRx CTx Fast Z4 &
& Z1
& Z1
TZ1
Trip A Trip B
TZ1
Z1X
TZ1X
TZ1X
Z1X
Z2
TZ2
TZ2
Z2
Z3 TZ3 Z4 TZ4 Optional features of scheme
TZ3
Z3
TZ4
Z4
Figure 17.
Blocking 1 scheme
4.4.2.2 Blocking 2 scheme Figure 18 shows the simplified scheme logic for the blocking 2 scheme. This scheme requires a simplex channel. It can also include logic to enable successful operation with a duplex channel, however an increase in the scheme timer TD may be required. (Refer to Section 4.6.2.2.) Reverse-looking zone 4 is used to send a blocking signal to the remote end to prevent unwanted tripping. When a simplex channel is used a blocking scheme can easily be applied to a multi-terminal line provided that outfeed does not occur for any internal faults.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Zone 4 Zone 2 A Zone 1 Z B
Zone 3
Z Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 4 CRx Start Stop CTx CRx Zone 3
Fast Z4
Start CTx Stop
Fast Z4
& Z1 TZ1
& TZ1 Z1
Trip A Trip B
Z1X
TZ1X
TZ1X
Z1X
Z2 Z3 Z4
TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 Optional features of scheme
TZ2 TZ3 TZ4
Z2 Z3 Z4
Figure 18.
Blocking 2 scheme
The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line. Therefore there are no problems associated with power line carrier signalling equipment. This scheme provides similar resistive coverage to the permissive overreach scheme. If a line terminal is open, fast tripping will still occur for faults along the whole of the protected line length. If the channel fails to send a blocking signal during a fault, fast tripping will occur for faults along the whole of the protected line, but also for some faults within the next line section. If the channel is taken out of service the relay will operate in the conventional BASIC mode.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Fast tripping will still occur at a strong source line end for faults along the protected line section if there is weak or zero infeed at the other end of the protected line. The scheme includes dual contact arrangement for start/stop control of the channel. This allows fast removal of a block signal in the event of a forward fault. A current reversal guard timer is included in the signal send logic to prevent unwanted tripping of the relay on the healthy circuit, during current reversal situations on a parallel circuit. The current reversal guard is arranged to aid compatibility with other manufacturers' existing blocking schemes. (The LFZR is of course compatible with existing ALSTOM schemes.) To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on channelaided tripping TP must be used. Recommended TP setting = maximum channel operating time + 14ms Send logic: Reverse Z4 + not Z2 Stop logic: Zone 2 + not TD Trip logic: Z2 + not CRX 4.5 DEF channel-aided schemes In addition to these distance schemes, the relay has the following directional earth fault schemes available: Permissive overreach Permissive overreach unblocking Permissive overreach weak infeed Permissive overreach weak infeed unblocking Blocking 1 Blocking 2 When a separate channel for DEF can be employed (LFZR111 and 112 only) the above DEF schemes are independently selectable. When a common channel is employed the distance and DEF must use a common scheme. 4.5.1 DEF permissive overreach scheme (DEF POR) The DEF POR scheme is shown in Figure 19. The scheme is based on the distance POR2 scheme logic with a weak infeed echo feature. When an independent channel scheme is chosen the DEF weak infeed echo logic and open terminal logic are also independent. When a common channel is chosen the DEF foward and reverse elements use the distance logic. The channel for the DEF POR scheme is keyed via operation of the DEF_F (forward) element. If the remote relay's DEF_F element has also picked up on receipt of this signal then channel-aided tripping is allowed. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Open terminal echo: Weak infeed echo: DEF_F DEF_F + CRX CB open + CRX No DEF element operation + CRX
The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance ground faults.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CB Open DEF-R
& CRx & 1 CTx CRx CTx
& & 1
CB Open
DEF-R
DEF-F DEF Inst
&
&
DEF-F DEF Inst
1 DEF Bu1 t Bu1 t Bu2

t IDMT
Trip A Trip B
1 t Bu1 t Bu2
t IDMT
DEF Bu1
DEF Bu2 DEF IDMT
DEF Bu2 DEF IDMT
Figure 19.
DEF POR scheme
4.5.1.1 DEF permissive overreach weak infeed trip (DEF POR WI) The DEF POR WI scheme is shown in Figure 20. The scheme is based on the distance POR2 WI trip scheme logic which includes the weak infeed trip feature. When an independent channel scheme is chosen (LFZR111 and LFZR112) the DEF weak infeed echo logic, trip logic and open terminal logic are also independent. When a common channel is used the DEF forward and reverse elements are incorporated into the distance logic. The channel for the DEF POR WI scheme is keyed via operation of the DEF_F (forward) element. If the remote relay's DEF_F element has also picked up on receipt of this signal then channel-aided tripping is allowed. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Open terminal echo: Weak infeed echo: Weak infeed trip: DEF_F DEF_F + CRX CB open + CRX No DEF element operation + CRX No DEF element operation + CRX + LDOV reset
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Weak infeed tripping is phase selective and can be used to provide single pole tripping if required. A weak infeed trip can be initiated if LDVN (neutral voltage level detector) picks up rather than the reset of LDOV when three pole tripping only is selected. 4.5.2 DEF blocking schemes
4.5.2.1 DEF blocking 1 scheme The DEF blocking 1 scheme is based on the distance blocking 1 scheme. The simplified logic for the scheme is shown in Figure 21. The channel for the DEF blocking 1 scheme is keyed via operation of the DEF_R (reverse) element. If the remote relay's DEF_F element has picked up and no blocking signal is received from the remote relay then channel-aided tripping is allowed. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive a short time delay on channel-aided tripping TPG must be used. Recommended TPG setting = maximum channel operating time + 14ms Send logic: DEF_R + not DEF_F Trip logic: DEF_F + not CRX The scheme has the same features/requirements as the distance blocking 1 scheme.
& CRx DEF-R & 1 CTx CRx CTx & 1 DEF-R & CB Open
CB Open
LD0V
&
&
LD0V
DEF-F DEF Inst
& Trip A Trip B
&
DEF-F DEF Inst
1 t Bu1 t Bu2
t IDMT
1 t Bu1 t Bu2
t IDMT
DEF Bu1
DEF Bu1
DEF Bu2
DEF Bu2
DEF IDMT
DEF IDMT
Figure 20.
DEF POR WI scheme
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CRx DEF-R & CTx
CRx CTx & DEF-R
DEF-F DEF Inst
& Trip A Trip B
&
DEF-F DEF Inst
1 DEF Bu1 t Bu1 t Bu2

t IDMT
1 t Bu1 t Bu2
t IDMT
DEF Bu1
DEF Bu2
DEF Bu2
DEF IDMT
DEF IDMT
Figure 21. DEF Blocking 1 scheme 4.5.2.2 DEF blocking 2 scheme The DEF blocking 2 scheme is based on the distance blocking 2 scheme. The simplified logic for the scheme is shown in Figure 22. The channel for the DEF blocking 2 scheme is keyed via operation of the DEF_R (reverse) element. If the remote relay's DEF_F element has picked up and no blocking signal is received from the remote relay then channel-aided tripping is allowed. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive a short time delay on channel-aided tripping TPG must be used. Recommended TPG setting = maximum channel operating time + 14ms Start logic: DEF_R + not DEF_F Stop logic: DEF_F + not TPG Trip logic: DEF_F + not CRX The scheme has the same features/requirements as the distance blocking 2 scheme.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

CRx Start Stop CTx CRx Start CTx Stop DEF-R
DEF-R
DEF-F DEF Inst
& Trip A Trip B
&
DEF-F DEF Inst
1 DEF Bu1
t Bu1
1
t Bu1
DEF Bu1
DEF Bu2 DEF IDMT
t Bu2
t Bu2 t IDMT
DEF Bu2 DEF IDMT
t IDMT
Figure 22. 4.6
DEF Blocking 2 scheme
Current reversal guard logic For double circuit lines the fault current direction can change in one circuit when circuit breakers open sequentially to clear the fault on the parallel circuit. The change in current direction causes the overreaching distance elements to see the fault in the opposite direction to that which the fault was initially detected (settings of these elements must exceed 150% of the line impedance at each terminal). The race between operation and resetting of the overreaching distance elements at each line terminal can cause the permissive overreach, blocking, and DEF schemes to trip the healthy line. A system configuration that could result in current reversals is shown in Figure 23. For a fault on line L1 close to circuit breaker B, circuit breaker B tripping, causes the direction of current flow in line L2 to reverse.
4.6.1
Permissive overreach schemes Figure 24 shows the simplified scheme logic for the POR1 current reversal guard. The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when a healthy line relay receives a permissive trip signal but does not have a zone 2 element operated. A delay on pick-up, TP, in the current reversal guard timer is necessary in order to allow time for the zone 2 elements to operate (internal faults). Recommended TP setting = 30ms - minimum channel operating time Once the current reversal guard timer has operated, the healthy line relay's permissive trip logic and signal send logic are inhibited at substation D. The reset of the guard timer is initiated by either the loss of the permissive trip signal or by the operation of the zone 2 elements. The time delay TD for the reset of the current reversal guard timer prevents over tripping if the zone 2 element at end D operates before the permissive trip signal from the relay at end C has reset.
4.6.1.1 Permissive overreach scheme POR1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

t2(D) Fault Fault B A L1 B
t2(C) A L1
Strong source
L2
Weak source
L2
Note how after circuit breaker B on line L1 opens the direction of current flow in line L2 is reversed.
Figure 23.
Current reversal in double circuit lines

A Fault A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration Aided trip
& CRX Z2 & TP TD & Current reversal system configuration
CTX
Z1B
CB operating time
R e l a y L o c a t i o n
D CTX C Z2C
TP
Z2D
TD Reset CTX Reset
Z2C Reset
Time Fault Inception Current Reversal Relay D Disabled Relay D Enabled
Figure 24.
Permissive overreach transfer trip POR1 current reversal scheme logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Fault B A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration CRX Z2 Z4 Z2 & & 0 TD & Current reversal system configuration CTX Aided trip
Z1B
CB operating time
Z4D
Z4D Reset CTX CTX Reset
TD Reset
Z2C
Z2C Reset
Time Fault Inception Relay D Disabled Current Reversal Relay D Enabled
Figure 25. Permissive overreach transfer trip POR2 current reversal scheme logic - reverse looking zone 4
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Recommended TD setting = maximum channel reset time + 35ms The current reversal sequence diagram in Figure 24 shows how the relays protecting the healthy line are prevented from over tripping due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers on the faulted line. The relays at both C and D substations are enabled once again when the faulted line is isolated and the current reversal guard timer setting TD has expired. 4.6.1.2 Permissive overreach schemes, POR2 and POR2 WI trip Figure 25 shows the simplified scheme logic for POR2 current reversal guard. The current reversal guard of the POR1 scheme requires a discriminitive arming delay TP. When high-speed protection and high-speed breakers are used on the parallel line, a current reversal can take place within the recommended TP setting such that the current reversal guard is not effective. In these applications a faster means of detecting a reverse fault is required and the POR2 scheme should be used. The current reversal guard incorporated in the POR2 scheme logic is initiated when the reverse-looking zone 4 elements operate on a healthy line. Once the reverse-looking zone 4 elements have operated, the relay's permissive trip logic and signal send logic are inhibited at substation D. The reset of the current reversal guard timer is initiated when the reverse-looking zone 4 resets. A time delay TD is required in case the zone 2 elements at end D operate before the permissive trip signal from the relay at end C has reset. Otherwise this would cause the relay at D to over trip. Recommended TD setting = maximum channel reset time + 35ms The current reversal sequence diagram in Figure 25 shows how the relays protecting the healthy line are prevented from over tripping following sequential clearing of the circuit breakers on the faulted line. The relays at D and C substations are enabled once again when the faulted line is isolated and the current reversal guard timer setting TD has expired. 4.6.1.3 Blocking 1 scheme Figure 26 shows the simplified scheme logic for the blocking 1 scheme current reversal guard. The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when a blocking signal is received by a healthy line to inhibit the channel-aided trip. When the current reverses and the remote zone 4 elements reset the blocking signal is stopped. Local relay blocking is maintained for a time delay TD after the received blocking signal ceases. This prevents local relay over tripping if the blocking signal is lost before the zone 2 elements reset. Recommended TD setting = 20ms - minimum channel reset time The current reversal sequence diagram in Figure 26 shows how the relays protecting the healthy line are prevented from over tripping due to the sequential clearing by the circuit breakers on the faulted line. After the faulty line is isolated the reverse-looking zone 4 elements reset and the scheme channel-aided trip is restored when the timer setting TD has expired.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Fault B A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration CRX Z2 CRX 0 TD Z4 Z2 Current reversal logic & CTX TP 0 & Aided trip
B R e l a y L o c a t i o n
Z1B
CB operating time
Z4D CTX
Z4D Reset
CTX Reset TD Reset
Z2C
TP
Z2C Reset
Time Fault Inception Relay C Disabled Current Reversal Relay C Enabled
Current reversal sequence diagram
Figure 26.
Blocking 1 scheme current reversal logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.6.1.4 Blocking 2 scheme Figure 27 shows the simplified scheme logic for the blocking 2 scheme current reversal guard. The current reversal guard incorporated in the scheme logic is initiated when a blocking signal is received to inhibit the channel-aided trip. When the current reverses and the reverse-looking zone 4 elements reset the blocking signal is maintained by the timer TD. Recommended TD setting = maximum channel operating time + 14ms Note: If a simplex channel is used then: maximum channel operating time - minimum channel reset time (in ms) + 14ms TD setting =
The current reversal sequence diagram shows, how the relays protecting the healthy line are prevented from over tripping due to the sequential clearing by the circuit breakers on the faulted line and, the instance in the cycle at which this takes place. After the faulty line is isolated the reverse-looking zone 4 elements at substation C and the foward-looking elements at substation D reset. 4.6.2 DEF schemes current reversal logic
4.6.2.1 DEF scheme POR Figure 28 shows the simplified scheme logic for the DEF POR scheme current reversal guards. The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF permissive overreach scheme logic is similar to the distance scheme POR2 with reverse-looking zone 4 elements, except that the operation of the scheme is controlled by the reverselooking DEF element rather than the reverse-looking zone 4 elements. It uses a separate current reversal guard timer TDG and may either share a common channel or use an independent channel. Recommended TDG setting = 30ms + maximum channel reset time 4.6.2.2 Directional earth fault blocking 1 scheme Figure 29 shows the simplified scheme logic for the DEF blocking 1 scheme current reversal guard. The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF blocking scheme logic is similar to the distance blocking scheme, except that the operation of the scheme is controlled by the reverse-looking directional earth fault element instead of the distance reverse-looking zone 4 elements. Timer TDG maintains the channel-aided trip inhibition until the local forward-looking directional element has reset. Recommended TDG setting = 30ms + maximum channel reset time 4.6.2.3 Directional earth fault blocking 2 scheme Figure 30 shows the simplified scheme logic for the DEF blocking 2 scheme current reversal guard. The current reversal guard incorporated in this DEF blocking 2 scheme logic is
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Fault
Fault
Current reversal system configuration
COS CRX Z2 TP 0 & & 0 TD Current reversal logic Stop CTX Start CTX & Aided Trip
Z4
Z1B
CB operating time
Z4D CTX
Z4D Reset
TD Reset
CTX Reset
Z2C
TP
Z2C Reset
Time Fault Inception Relay C Disabled Current Reversal Relay C Enabled
Figure 27.
Blocking 2 scheme current reversal logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

A Fault B A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration CRX DEF F DEF R DEF F & 0 TDG & Current reversal logic Z1B CB operating time CTX & Aided Trip
B R e l a y L o c a t i o n
DEF RD CTX
DEF RD Reset CTX Reset
TD Reset
DEF FC
DEF FC Reset
Time Fault Inception Relay D Disabled Current Reversal Current reversal sequence diagram Relay D EnableD
Figure 28.
DEF Permissive overreach scheme POR current reversal scheme logic
similar to the distance blocking scheme, except that the operation of the scheme is controlled by the reverse-looking directional element (DEF_R) instead of the distance zone 4 elements. Timer TDG maintains the blocking signal to allow time for the foward-looking directional element (DEF_F) at the opposite end to reset. Recommended TDG setting = 30ms + maximum channel reset time
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Fault B A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration COS DEF F CRX DEF F DEF F Current reversal logic B R e l a y L o c a t i o n Z1B CB operating time & 0 TDG CTX TPG 0 & Aided trip
DEF RD CTX
DEF RD Reset CTX Reset TPG DEF FC Reset TDG Reset
DEF FC
Time Fault Inception Current Relay C Reversal Disabled Current reversal sequence diagram Relay C Enable D
Figure 29.
DEF blocking 1 scheme current reversal logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

A Fault B A Fault B
Current reversal system configuration COS CRX DEF F TPG 0 & DEF R & 0 TDG Current reversal logic B R e l a y L o c a t i o n Z1B CB operating time Stop CTX Start CTX & Aided Trip
DEF RD
DEF RD Reset DEF FD
TDG TPG CTX
CTX Reset
DEF FC
TPG
DEF RC DEF FC Reset
Time Fault Inception Relay C Disabled Current Reversal Relay D Relay D Disabled Enabled
Figure 30.
DEF blocking 2 scheme current reversal logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.
BLOCK AUTO-RECLOSE (BAR)

The relay blocks an external auto-reclose relay following a three pole trip under the following conditions: Zone 3 time delayed trip Zone 4 time delayed trip Channel out of service DEF time delayed trip Circuit breaker failure Switch-on-to-fault The following trip functions may be set to either block or enable auto-reclose: Zone 1X time delayed trip Depending on the application of zone 1X (if used) it may be desirable to allow or block auto-reclose. Zone 2 time delayed trip For certain applications the time delay of the zone 2 elements may be sufficiently small to allow delayed auto-reclose to take place. Any instantaneous trip resulting from a 2/3 phase or 3 phase fault Auto-reclose block on these faults may be considered for critical transmission lines when reclose onto a multi-phase fault may pose a threat to system stability. DEF channel-aided trip and/or DEF instantaneous trip Depending on the application, auto-reclose block on DEF trips may be considered if high resistance ground faults are likely to be permanent or when there might be concern about detecting a permanent high resistance fault after reclose. Note that on the single pole tripping version of the relay any condition that requires a BAR output will result in a three pole trip.
6.
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION (VTS)

In the event of any failure of voltage signals (due to a fault on the secondary and operation of the fuses or miniature CBs) the relay no longer correctly measures impedance. This will not result in a trip of the relay at the instant of fuse failure due to the fact that tripping is supervised by the superimposed current phase selector (current remains the same for a VT failure condition). However, any subsequent disturbance may cause unwanted or incorrect operation of the relay. It is important that a VT failure condition is detected so that the relay can be blocked and/or an alarm raised. Failure of a VT signal is detected by the presence of neutral voltage with no neutral current. The feature may be selected to block all voltage dependent tripping functions of the relay and issue an indication and alarm, or to issue the indication and alarm only. Blocking, if selected, will occur as soon as the fuse failure is detected, but the alarm and indication is issued after a 5s time delay at which point the block is sealed in. Resetting of the block, indication and alarm, following restoration of the VT signals, can be manual or automatic on the detection of the three healthy voltages.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
7.
POWER SWING BLOCKING (PSB)

Power swings are oscillations in power flow which can follow a power system disturbance. They can be caused by sudden removal of faults, loss of synchronism across a power system, or changes in direction of power flow as a result of switching. Such disturbances can cause generators on the system to accelerate or decelerate to adapt to new power flow conditions, which in turn leads to a power swing. The result of a power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the case of a stable power swing it is important that the relay does not trip. The relay should also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled system break-up during such an event. The power swing blocking element of the LFZR uses the superimposed signals from the phase selector. A power swing produces continuous superimposed signals as a result of the change in current and voltage signals between power frequency cycles. Operation of the PSB element is menu selectable to block the operation of any or all of the distance zones (including channel-aided trip logic) or to provide indication of swing only. However, the high-speed reverse-looking zone 4 elements are not inhibited. If a blocking scheme is selected as the channelaided scheme then a blocking signal should be sent to the remote end in order to prevent over-tripping due to a power swing. The relay will not operate for any fault occuring during a power swing. An optional 2s time delay is also included in the PSB logic to remove any blocking signals which exceed this time.
8.
SWITCH-ON-TO-FAULT (SOTF)
Following manual circuit breaker closure, the relay operates in switch-on-to-fault mode. Three pole tripping (and auto-reclose blocking) occurs for any fault detected by operation of elements from either zone 1 or zones 1 and 2. It is also possible to select tripping by zone 3 elements and/or by the detection of overcurrent and undervoltage on the same phase. These additional two options ensure operation for close-up three phase faults which may not be detected by the directional zone 1 or zone 2 elements in the absence of a pre-energization voltage memory signal (line VTs). This feature is enalbed 110s after 3 phase deenergization and remains enabled for 20 cycles after the breaker is closed (20 cycles is the time taken to establish the voltage memory). During the SOTF period the distance elements are polarized by healthy phase voltage and channel-aided schemes are disabled. When a blocking scheme is selected, operation of a zone 4 element is still able to issue a blocking signal during the SOTF period. This ensures that the relay at the remote line end is blocked if the breaker closes the line onto a fault behind the relay.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
9.
TRIP ON RECLOSE (TOR)

Following a single or three phase auto-reclosure it is possible to select tripping via the scheme which is selected for normal operation or to disable the scheme and select from the same options as for SOTF. Tripping may be selected as either single or three pole when the main scheme permits or three pole only. Under these conditions no BAR signal is issued, leaving any lock-out decision to the reclose relay. Trip on reclose mode is initiated during the breaker dead time (200ms after breaker opening) and remains in force for 20 cycles following reclosure. The use of a TOR scheme is usually advantageous for most distance schemes since a perisistent fault at the remote end of the line can be cleared instantaneously after reclosure of the breaker, rather than after the zone 2 time delay.
10.
HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENT

The relay incorporates adjustable phase overcurrent elements which may be used to provide instantaneous high-set tripping or stub bus protection.
10.1
Instantaneous overcurrent element The instantaneous overcurrent feature of the relay is designed to provide highspeed (less than 0.5 cycles) fault clearance for close-up faults. Setting of these elements is the same as for the instantaneous DEF element (detailed in Section 3.1) ie. settings should be chosen such that tripping will only occur for faults on the protected line (based on maximum generation plant conditions). The instantaneous overcurrent elements can perform single pole tripping for single phase-to-ground faults if required. In such cases, the chosen setting should inhibit healthy phase operation on multiple grounded systems.
10.2
Stub bus protection When the protected line is switched from a breaker and a half arrangement it is possible to use the instantaneous overcurrent elements to provide stub bus protection. When this feature is selected the line isolator is connected to an input on the relay such that when the isolator is open stub bus protection is enabled. Operation of the current level detector detailed above during this period results in instantaneous three pole tripping.
11.
CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

The circuit breaker failure logic of the relay operates if a trip signal persists for longer than a pre-set time delay (settable from 100ms - 500ms) and line current is still present (determined by a fixed setting current level detector). A breaker failure condition results in the issue of a local alarm and operation of a user selectable output contact for back tripping and remote alarm purposes. The timer should be set to allow for relay operating time, breaker operating time and a safety margin. Typical breaker fail times are in the region of 150ms.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
A contact corresponding to the breaker failure tripping function can be utilized to block auto-reclose.
12.
TEED FEEDER PROTECTION

The application of distance relays to three terminal lines is fairly common. However, several problems arise when applying distance protection to three terminal lines.
12.1
Apparent impedance seen by relay Figure 31 shows a typical three terminal line arrangement. For a fault at the busbars of terminal B the impedance seen by a relay at terminal A is equal to: Z a = Z at + Z bt + Z bt c Ia Relay A underreaches for faults beyond the tee point with infeed from terminal C. When terminal C is a relatively strong source, the underreaching effect can be substantial. For a zone 2 element set to 120% of the protected line this effect may result in non-operation of the element for internal faults. This not only effects time delayed zone 2 tripping but also channel-aided schemes. When infeed is present it is necessary for the zone 2 elements at all line terminals to overreach both remote terminals with allowance for the effect of tee point infeed. Zone 1 elements must be set to underreach the true impedance to the nearest terminal without infeed. Both these requirements can be met through use of the alternative setting groups of the LFZR.
12.2
Permissive schemes
12.2.1 Permissive overreach schemes To ensure operation for internal faults in a POR scheme, the relays at the three terminals should be able to see a fault at any point within the protected feeder. This may demand very large zone 2 reach settings to deal with the apparent impedances seen by the relays. A POR scheme requires the use of two channels. A permissive trip can only be issued upon operation of zone 2 and receipt of a signal from both remote line ends. The requirement for an 'AND' function of received signals must be established by contact logic external to the relay. Although a POR scheme can be applied to a three terminal line, the above signalling requirements make its use unattractive. 12.2.2 Permissive underreach schemes For a PUR scheme the channel is only keyed for internal faults. Permissive tripping is allowed for operation of zone 2 plus receipt of a signal from either remote line end. This makes the channel requirements for a PUR scheme less demanding than for a POR scheme. A common power line carrier (PLC) channel or a triangulated signalling arrangement can be used. This makes the use of a PUR scheme for a teed feeder a more attractive alternative to use of a POR scheme.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Ia
Zat
Ib
Zbt
Ic
Zct
Va = Ia Zat + Ib Zbt
C Impedance seen by relay A = Va Ia Za = Zat + Zbt + Ic Zbt
Ib
= Ia + Ic
Va = Ia Zat + Ia Zbt + Ic Zbt
Ia
Figure 31.
Teed feeder application - apparent impedance seen by distance relay
The channel is keyed from operation of zone 1 tripping elements. If at least one zone 1 element can see an internal fault then channel-aided tripping will occur at the other terminals if the overreacheing zone 2 setting requirement has been met. There are however two cases when this is not possible. Figure 32 (i) shows the case where a short tee is connected close to another terminal. In this case, zone 1 elements set to 80% of the shortest relative feeder length do not overlap. This leaves a section not covered by any zone 1 element. Any fault in this section would result in zone 2 time delayed tripping. Figure 32(ii) shows an example where terminal 'C' has no infeed. Faults close to this terminal will not operate the relay at 'C' and hence the fault is cleared by the zone 2 time delayed elements of the relays at 'A' and 'B'. Figure 32(iii) illustrates a further difficulty for a PUR scheme. In this example current is outfed from terminal 'C' for an internal fault. The relay at 'C' will therefore see the fault as reverse and not operate until the breaker at 'B' has opened; ie. sequential tripping occurs. 12.3 Blocking schemes Blocking schemes are particularly suited for the protection of teed feeders since high-speed operation can be achieved when there is no current infeed from one or more terminals. The scheme also has the advantage that only a common simplex channel or triangulated simplex channel is required. The major disadvantage of blocking schemes is highlighted in Figure 32(iii) where fault current is outfed from a terminal for an internal fault condition. Relay 'C' sees a reverse fault condition. This results in a blocking signal being sent to the two remote line ends, preventing tripping until the normal zone 2 time delay has expired.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
13.
ALTERNATIVE SETTING GROUPS

The LFZR can store up to eight independent groups of settings. The active group is selected either locally via the menu or remotely via the serial communications. The LFZR112 has 5 opto-isolator inputs dedicated to changing between setting groups.
(i)
Z1A
Z1C = area where no zone 1 overlap exists
C (ii) A B
Z1A
Z1B
Fault C No infeed (iii) A
Fault seen by A & B in zone 2
Relay at C sees reverse fault until B opens
Figure 32.
Teed feeder applications
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The ability to quickly reconfigure the relay to a new setting group may be desirable if changes to the system configuration demand new protection settings. Typical examples where this feature can be used include: Single bus installations with a transfer bus. Double bus installations with or without a separate transfer bus, where the transfer circuit breaker or bus coupler might be used to replace the duties of any feeder circuit breaker when both the feeder circuit breaker and the current transformers are bypassed. In the case of a double bus installation it is usual for bus 1 to be referred to as the main bus and bus 2 as the reserve bus, and for any bypass circuit isolator to be connected to bus 2 as shown in Figure 33. This arrangement avoids the need for a current transformer polarity reversing switch that would be required if both buses were to be used for bypass purposes. The stand-by relay, associated with the transfer circuit breaker or the bus coupler, can be programmed with the individual settings required for each of the outgoing feeders. For bypass operation the appropriate setting group can be selected as required. This facility is extremely useful in the case of unattended substations where all of the switching can be controlled remotely. A further use for this feature is the ability to provide alternative setting for tapped feeders (Section 12.1) or double circuitlines with mutual coupling (see Section 2.6). Similar alternative settings could be required to cover different operating criteria in the event of the channel or auto-reclose equipment failing, or alternative system configuration; ie. lines being switched in or out.
Main bus (1) Reserve bus (2
21 LFZR112 21 21
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Figure 33.
Typical double bus installation with bypass facilities
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
14.
FAULT LOCATOR
Each version of the LFZR includes a single-ended fault locator. The integral fault location uses a new, single-ended algorithm developed at Bath University. The algorithm is designed to minimise errors in fault location caused by fault resistance and remote infeed. The accuracy of the fault locator algorithm is typically 2% for fault currents above 2In.
15.
RELAY SENSITIVITY
The current sensitivity of the relay is dependent upon its distance setting and is independently adjustable for each zone. The basic sensitivity is 0.05In for distance settings greater than 5 (1 for a 5A relay) and decreases proportionally for settings less than 5; ie. for a setting of 1 the current sensitivity is 0.25In. It is possible to alter the sensitivity of the relay in the range 0.05In to 10In if necessary. The maximum sensitivity is not better than that dictated by the basic setting; ie. if a 1 setting is chosen then the maximum relay sensitivity is 0.25In even if a setting less than this is selected. When a customized sensitivity is used it is possible to set the sensitivity of each zone separately. Care must be taken, however, when a blocking scheme is used to ensure that the reverse zone 4 blocking element is more sensitive than the forward zone 2 element by a factor of at least 20%.
16.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

If class X current transformers are used, the following knee-point voltage formula should be used: Vk = IF 1 + X R where ( RB + R CT + R L )
IF =
X/R RB RCT RL
the maximum secondary fault current at the relay zone 1 reach point = = = = the primary system ratio the relay burden The CT secondary winding resistance The resistance of the cable connecting the relay to the CTs, (lead and return for ground faults, lead only for phase faults)
The calculation should be done for phase faults and ground faults and the
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
highest resultant knee-point used. Where IEC class 5P protection CTs are used, the CT specification should be checked as follows for suitability:
(VA x ALF) + (R x ALF x I ) > I 1 + X F CT n R ( RB + R CT + R L )
In
where VA ALF = = CT burden accuracy limit factor
17.
WORKED EXAMPLE
Tiger Bay 80km 100km Green Blue River 60km Rocky bay
21 System Data
21
Green Valley - Blue River transmission line System voltage 230kv System grounding solid CT ratio 1200/5 VT ratio 230000/115 Line length 100km Line impedance Z1 = 0.089 + J0.476 OHM/km Z0 = 0.426 + J1.576 OHM/km Faults levels Green Valley substation busbars maximum 5000MVA, minimum 2000MVA Blue River substation busbars maximum 3000MVA, minimum 1000MVA
Figure 34.
Example system
17.1
Objective Protect the 100km parallel line between Green Valley and Blue River substations using model LFZR111 in the permissive overreach mode as per scheme POR1 and to set the relay at Green Valley substation, shown in Figure 34.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 1 Chapter 2 Page 50 of 60 100km
17.2
System data Line length:
Line impedance: Z 1 = 0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 79.4 /km Z 0 = 0.426 + j1.576 = 1.632 74.8 /km Z0 = 3.372 -4.6 Z1 CT ratio: VT ratio: 17.3 1,200/5 230,000/115
Relay settings It is assumed that zone 1X is not used and that only a three zone scheme is required. Settings on the relay can be performed in primary or secondary quantities and impedances can be expressed as either polar or rectangular quantities (menu selectable). For the purposes of this example secondary quantities are used.
17.4
Zone 1 reach settings Required zone 1 reach is to be 80% of the line impeance between Green Valley and Blue River substations. Ratio of secondary to primary impedance = 1,200/5 = 0.12 230,000/115 Required zone 1 reach = 0.8 x 100 x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12 = 4.64 79.4 secondary
The sensitivity of the relay is dependent upon the setting. The minimum sensitivity for a 5A relay is equal to 0.05In and can be achieved with a setting greater than 1. It is possible to customize the sensitivity of the relay to a value above this if required. Relay characteristic angle ph settings 45 to 85 in 1 steps, therefore, select ph = 80
Therefore actual zone 1 reach = 4.64 80 secondary
17.5
Zone 2 reach settings Required zone 2 impedance = (Green Valley-Blue River) line impedance + 50% (Blue River-Rocky Bay) line impedance
= (100 + 30) x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12 = 7.56 79.4 secondary Actual zone 2 reach setting = 7.56 80 secondary
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
17.6
Zone 3 reach settings Required zone 3 forward reach = (Green Valley -Blue River + Blue River-Rocky Bay) x 1.2 = (100 + 60) x 1.2 x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12 = 11.15 79.4 secondary 80 secondary Actual zone 3 forward reach setting = 11.15
Required zone 3 reverse reach impedance = typically 10% zone 1 reach = 0.1 x 4.64 79.4 secondary = 0.464 79.4 secondary Actual zone 3 reverse reach setting = 0.464 80 secondary
17.7
Ground fault neutral compensation settings The neutral compensation factor can be applied independently to each individual zone if required. This feature is useful when line impedance characteristics change between sections or when hybrid circuits are used. When separate settings are required for each zone, the neutral compensation is set as a multiple of the zone positive-sequence impedance setting. In this example, the line impedance characteristics do not change and as such a common KZN factor can be applied to each zone. When a common setting is chosen, this is set in magnitude as the KN ratio with an angle equal to the ground loop impedance angle.
Z L0 - Z L1 3Z L1
Neutral compensation factor KN =
Z L0 - Z L1 = (0.426 +j1.576) - (0.089 + j0.476) = 0.337 + j1.1 = 1.15 KN = 72.9
1.15 72.9 = 0.79 - 6.5 3 x 0.484 79.4
KZN settings 0.25 to 4 in steps of 2% or less, n = 85 - 45 in 1 steps, Therefore, select KZN = 0.79, and n = 80 - 6.5 = 74. 17.8 Power swing blocking Power swing blocking is a function of continuous operation of the phase selector and as such does not require a setting. Options available with power swing blocking are detailed in Section 7.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
17.9
Load blinders For applications where there are likely to be problems of load encroachment on the relay characteristics, it may be necessary to set the load blinders. The blinders should be set to allow a safety margin of at least 10% with the load. An impedance diagram showing the relay characteristic for each zone is given in Figure 35.
Z3 Z2 Z1
Green Valley X
Blue River
14 12 10 8 6 Z2 4 2 Z1 Z3
10
12
Phase and ground faults
Figure 35.
230kV power system worked example using model LFZR111 in the POR1 mode relay settings
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
17.10
Permissive overreach schemes for POR2, POR2 WI trip When the weak infeed logic is required, the permissive overreach scheme POR2 or POR2 WI Trip with reverse-looking zone 4 elements needs to be selected and the relay settings for zone 1, zone 2, zone 3 and the neutral compensation are the same as for POR1 scheme, but an additional setting for zone 4 is required.
17.11
Reverse-looking zone 4 setting (if required) Required reverse-looking zone 4 setting = 1.2 x zone 2 relay setting at opposite end (cover errors due to relay's accuracy; ie. CT and VT errors). = (Blue River-Green Valley) line impedance + 50% (Green Valley-Tiger Bay) line impedance x 1.2 = [(100 + 40) x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12] x 1.2 = 9.76 79.4 secondary Reverse-looking zone 4 reach = 9.76 80 secondary
17.12
Current reversal guard The current reversal guard logic available with the permissive overreach schemes needs to be used when the setting of the zone 2 elements is greater than 1.5 times the impedance of the protected line. In this chosen example, the setting of the zone 2 elements is only 1.3 times the protected line impedance. Therefore, current reversal guard logic does not need to be used and the recommended settings for the current reversal guard timer are: TP = 98ms TD = 0
17.13
Instantaneous overcurrent protection To provide extra high-speed fault clearance (less than 1/2 cycle) it is possible to use the high-set overcurrent element of the relay. It must be ensured that the element will only respond to faults on the protected line. The worst case scenario for this is when only one of the parallel lines is in service. Two cases must be considered. The first case is a fault at Blue River substation with the relay seeing fault current contribution via Green Valley. The second case is a fault at Green Valley with the relay seeing fault current contribution via Blue River.
Case 1: 230 2 = 10.58 5000 Line impedance = 48.4 1 Fault current seen by relay = 23000 x 3 10.58 + 48.4 Source impedance = = 2251A
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Case 2: 230 2 = 17.63 3000 Line impedance = 48.4 1 Fault current seen by relay = 23000 x 3 17.63 + 48.4 Source impedance = = 2011A
The overcurrent setting must be in excess of 2251A. To provide an adequate safety margin a setting of 130% of the minimum requirement should be chosen; ie. 1.3 x 2251 = 2961A. 17.14 Loss-of-load accelerated trip (LOL) In the event of failure of the signalling equipment, a POR scheme will revert to the BASIC scheme operation. This can result in possible zone 2 time delayed tripping. The loss-of-load feature can be set to reduce fault clearance times when the BASIC scheme is in operation. Line charging current = 0.6A/km = 60A primary (from 1200/5 CTs this equals 5% In) For the loss-of-load feature to function the current in the remaining phase(s) when the remote circuit breaker is open for an internal fault must be less than the LOL level detector. In this example, it would be appropriate to set the lossof-load level detectors at 10%In. It must also be the case that load current prior to the fault would have to be above the setting of the LOL detectors for the scheme to function; ie. for this application, load current must have been in excess of 120A primary. Note that the loss-of-load scheme will only function when three pole tripping has been selected.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
17.15
Check on comparison voltage at zone 1 reach The worst condition is with the parallel line out of service and it is assumed that the values of maximum and minimum fault levels at Green Valley and Blue River substations are for single infeed conditions.
Maximum source positive-sequence impedance =
2302 2,000
= 26.45 80 = 4.59 +j26.05 Protected line positive-sequence impedance up to zone 1 reach = 0.8 x 100 x 0.484 79.4 = 38.72 79.4 = 7.12 + j38.06 Overall source to zone 1 reach positive-sequence impedance = (4.59 + j26.05) + (7.12 + j38.06) = 11.71 + j64.11 = 65.17 79.6 Relay voltage for a phase fault at the zone 1 reach = 115 x 38.72 = 68.32V 65.17
Ground fault at zone 1 reach. Maximum source zero-sequence impedance is assumed to be equal to the positive-sequence impedance. Maximum source ground loop impedance = 4.59 + j26.05.
Maximum source ground loop impedance = 4.59 + j26.05 Protected line zero-sequence impedance up to zone 1 reach = 0.8 x 100 x 1.632 74.8 = 130.56 74.8 = 34.23 + j125.99 Protected line ground loop impedance up to zone 1 reach = 2 x (7.12 + j38.08) + (34.23 + j125.99) = 16.15 + j67.38 3 = 69.29 76.5 Overall source to zone 1 reach ground loop impedance = (4.59 + j26.05) + (16.15 + j67.38) = 20.74 + j93.43 = 95.70 77.48 Relay voltage for a ground fault at the zone 1 reach = 66.47 x 69.29 = 48.12V 95.70
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
For a 5% reach accuracy with the zone 1 multiplier set to unity, LFZR requires at least 1V. Both phase and ground fault voltage requirements are met in this application. 17.16 Current transformer requirements Class X current transformers are required to meet the following specification:
Phase fault condition K IF
Where IF ZR R CT RL = maximum secondary fault current for a three phase fault at the zone 1 reach = relay burden for a phase fault = 0.5 = 0.02 25 = current transformer secondary winding resistance, assumed to be 0.5 = resistance of one pilot cable lead between the current transformers and the relay, assumed to be 0.25
1+
X R
(Z R + R CT + R L ) volts
Neglecting the small infeed from the parallel line: Minimum source positive-sequence impedance = 2302 5,000
= 10.58 80 Overall source to zone 1 reach positive-sequence impedance =
(1.837 + j10.419) + (7.12 + j38.06) = 8.957 + j48.479 = 49.29 79.5
Where IF X R = =
230 x 10 5 x 3 x 49.29 1,200 48.479 = 5.4 8.957
= 11.238A
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for a three phase fault at the zone 1 reach point VK 11.238 (1 + 5.41)(0.02 + 0.5 + 0.25) 80.69V
Ground fault condition K I FE 1 + RE where I FE = maximum secondary fault current for a ground fault at the zone 1 reach point
XE
(Z RE + R CT + 2R L )
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Assuming that the zero and positive-sequence source impedances are equal Minimum source ground loop impedance = 1.837 + j10.419
Overall source to zone 1 reach ground loop impedance = (1.837 + j10.419) + (16.15 + j67.38) = 17.987 + j77.799 = 79.85 77 W
3
I FE
XE RE Z RE
= =
230 x 10 5 x 3 x 79.85 1,200 77.799 = 4.32 17.987
= 6.937A
= Relay burden for a ground fault = 0.02W
Current transformer knee-point voltage requirement for a ground fault at the zone 1 reach point V K 6.937(1 + 4.32)(0.02 + 0.5 + 0.5) 37.64V It is also required that at the current transformer knee-point voltage, which from the above calculations should not be less than 80.69V, the exciting current should be less than 0.5A.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 1 Chapter 3 Technical Description
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Contents 1 1 2 2 3 5 5 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 21 23 24 25 26 27 27
1. 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 3. 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9 3.1.10 3.1.11 3.1.12 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2
INTRODUCTION PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION MHO elements Directional offset mho Memory polarized mho Offset mho Quadrilateral elements Directional quadrilateral Offset quadrilateral Reactance line Load blinder Directional lines Phase selection Theory of operation Detection of power swings Directional earth fault element Level detectors Fixed phase current LDLSA, LDLSB, LDLSC Fixed phase voltage LDOVA, LDOVB, LDOVC Variable phase current LDOCA, LDOCB, LDOCC, LDLOLA, LDOLB, LDLOLC Variable neutral current LDHES1N, LDEHS2N, LDEHS3N Fixed neutral voltage LDVOVTS Variable neutral voltage LDVN Biased neutral current LDBn SCHEME LOGIC FUNCTIONS Basic scheme Zone 1 Time delayed tripping zones 1X, 2, 3 and 4 Directional earth fault protection (DEF) Trip latching logic Indication logic Pole dead detection Trip on close Instantaneous overcurrent and stub bus Loss of load feature Power swing blocking Voltage transformer supervision Block auto-reclose Distance aided schemes Zone 1 extension Signal receive logic (including unblocking logic) Unblocking logic Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) Permissive overreach scheme 1 (POR1) Permissive overreach scheme 2 (POR2) with optional weak infeed Blocking 1 scheme Blocking 2 scheme Independent channel DEF schemes Independent channel signal receive logic DEF permissive overreach scheme
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Contents 29 29 30 32 32 33 34 34 34 35 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 47 47 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 52 63 63
3.3.3 3.3.4 3.4 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.4 5. 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.6 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.5 6.6
DEF blocking 1 scheme DEF blocking 2 scheme Output contact allocation FAULT LOCATOR Acquisition of data Placement of pre-fault and faulted windows Fault duration System frequency Extraction of phasor quantities Fault location algorithm Basic single phase method Phase selection Fault type identification Fault locator settings Fault locator output SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Protection processor board Normal operation Hardware description Initialisation Self-checking Operating systems Host processor board Normal operation Hardware description Initialisation Self-checking Operating systems Protection input and output Analogue input module Output relays and optically isolated inputs User interface Local interface Remote interface System infrastructure Power supply unit Internal communications bus Mechanical layout TECHNICAL DATA Input ratings Maximum overload ratings Burdens Distance elements Setting ranges Accuracy of distance elements Current sensitivity Timers Operate and reset times Tripping logic Block auto-reclose
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Contents 63 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 69 69 69 70 70 70 70 72 72 73 74
6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.12.1 6.12.2 6.12.3 6.12.4 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24
Aided schemes Switch on to fault and trip on close Voltage transformer supervision Power swing blocking Current transformer requirements Directional earth fault protection DEF element DEF instantaneous DEF definite time backup DEF IDMT Loss of load Instantaneous overcurrent Fault location Instrumentation Disturbance recorder Calendar clock Output contacts Dimensions Serial communications Environmental withstand High voltage withstand Electrical environment
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Contents 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 11 13 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 40 41 43 48 49 53 53 54 54 55 55
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27
Self polarized mho Memory polarized mho Quadrilateral Offset quadrilateral Reactance line Load blinder Directional lines DEF characteristic Biased neutral current Breaker open position Placement of pre-fault and fault windows Derivation of cosine and sine terms Superimposed model Angle of fault impedance against assumed fault position Two phase to ground fault networks Correlation of fault location for correct network Interactions between protection processor board and host processor board Protection processor board information flow Host processor board information flow Block diagram of relay Mechanical layout Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N with blinders and quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph with blinders and quadrilaterals (60Hz) Self polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Self polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Contents 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 67 68 71 71
Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44A Figure 44B
Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N with blinders and quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph with blinders and quadrilaterals (60Hz) Self polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Self polarized zone1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (60Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N with blinders and quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph with blinders and quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N without blinders or quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph without blinders or quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N with blinders and quadrilaterals (50Hz) Memory polarized zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph with blinders and quadrilaterals (50Hz) IEC characteristics (TMS = 1) American characteristics (TMS = 1) Relay dimensions (panel mounting) Relay dimensions (rack mounting)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5934C Volume 1 Contents ISSUE A 1 1 2 ISSUE A 1 ISSUE A 1 ISSUE A 1 ISSUE A 1 2 2 2 4
APPENDIX A 1. 2. 3. APPENDIX B 1. APPENDIX C 1. APPENDIX D 1. APPENDIX E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Frequency tracking Simple algorithm Accurate algorithm Filtering Phase comparison Magnitude algorithm SCHEME LOGIC GLOSSARY Menu settings Protection inputs Opto inputs Relay outputs Logic symbols
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 1 of 76
SECTION 1.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the protection functions of the LFZR series relays, including the distance characteristics, protection schemes and other related functions. The main part of the chapter provides descriptions of the distance characteristics and other measurements, and of the protection schemes available. The relays employ entirely numerical techniques in the generation of the distance and directional characteristics and the operation of current and voltage level detectors. The current and voltage inputs are sampled at 72 samples per cycle, automatically synchronised to the power system frequency. Detailed explanations of the algorithms used, and of signal sampling and conditioning are included as appendices. The protection elements that are created by the relay are passed through scheme logic to complete the protection function of the relay. The operation of this scheme logic, incorporating stand-alone and channel aided scheme logic, is included within Section 3 of this chapter. The chapter also includes an overview of the relay hardware and software system. This details the information flow between the processors within the relay and the self testing performed by the relay. Section 6 of the chapter contains the detailed technical specification for the relay both for the protection features and enviromental considerations. Details of the recording facilities of the relay (fault, event and disturbance records) are covered within the user interface section Volume 2, Chapter 2. A summary description of the fault locator alogorithm is however included within this chapter.
SECTION 2.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Five independent zones of distance protection are provided for both phasephase and phase-ground faults (see Chapter 1). Operation of these elements is controlled by the phase selector (see Section 2.3). A second Zone 4 output (Z4HS), not controlled by the phase selector, is provided as a reverse fault detector for the channel aided schemes (Blocking and Weak Infeed). The zone elements consist of mho characteristics, which may be memory polarised or self polarised with an offset, supervised by memory polarised directional elements. Load blinders are available to prevent load encroachment. Additional quadrilateral characteristics, subject to the same directional control, are available for phase-ground faults. The directional lines supervising the ground fault elements may optionally use zero sequence or negative sequence quantities in place of the normal memory polarising. The ground fault distance elements require compensation for the return impedance, this residual compensation modifies the replica impedance for each zone. The reach setting Z for ground fault mho and quadrilateral elements is determined as follows: Z = ZP + Ires/IP * Zres Where ZP is the phase reach setting
IP is the current in the faulted phase Ires is the residual current (= Ia + Ib + Ic)
Zres is the residual reach setting (= (Z0-Z1)/3)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Each of the distance zones incorporates a current threshold. The impedance element is prevented from operating if the current is below this threshold. The threshold is normally set automatically by the relay to prevent incorrect operation of the impedance elements with very low values of current and voltage. It is also possible to set this threshold independently for each zone, for phase-ground and phase-phase elements. This setting can be used to deliberately restrict the sensitivity of a particular zone. Current and voltage level detectors (see Section 2.4) are provided for detecting open circuit breaker poles, providing various backup and other protection options, and detecting failure of the circuit breaker or of a VT fuse. An IDMT characteristic, offering eight optional curves, is also provided for earth fault back-up protection. Forward and reverse DEF elements, using either zero sequence or negative sequence signals, are provided for use in protection schemes and to provide directional control of earth fault back-up. 2.1 MHO elements The operation of all the mho elements is essentially the same, the characteristic being generated by a phase comparison between an operating signal, derived from the fault voltage and current and the zone setting, and a polarising signal. A detailed description of the phase comparator algorithm used by the relay is covered in Appendix C. A decision to operate is produced when the angle between these two signals is greater than 90. Each element makes 12 such decisions in each power frequency cycle. A counter, limited at 12 and zero, is incremented for each operate decision and decremented for each restrain decision. The element operates when this counter reaches 9 and resets when it falls to 3. The counter is incremented or decremented by one for each decision except for the following conditions: The counter is incremented by 3 when the angle between the signals is greater than 135, the fault current is greater than twice the sensitivity setting, the fault impedance is less than 80% of the setting, and less than 2 power frequency cycles have elapsed since the start of phase selector operation. The counter is decremented by 3 when the fault current is less than half the sensitivity setting. This count strategy is included to ensure that the element is stable for faults close to its boundary. The counter is forced to decrement, regardless of the above conditions, if the directional line (see Section 2.2.4) indicates a fault in the opposite direction to the zone, or the optional load blinder (see Section 2.2.5) indicates that the fault resistance is greater than the blinder setting. 2.1.1 Directional offset MHO This characteristic is used for Zones 1, 1X (optionally reversed), 2 and 4 and Z4HS (both reversed), when the Cable option is selected as the Line Type. Self polarising is used for cable applications since it avoids the problems of reach inaccuracy experienced by memory polarised characteristics when set to the low characteristic angles required for ground faults on cable systems. The 16% offset is included to ensure fast operation for close-up faults, directional stability being ensured by the memory polarised directional line (Section 2.2.5).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Z V -Z
I
V
I
V + Z'
I
Z'
Figure 1.
Self polarized mho
The characteristic is generated by a phase comparison between V/I-Z and the polarising signal V/I+Z: Where V is the fault voltage is the fault current is the zone reach setting (including residual compensation for ground fault elements) is a fixed offset setting of 16% of the forward reach
I
Z Z
Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90, which is for faults inside the circle. To produce the reversed zones (Zone 4 and, optionally, Zone 1X), the impedances Z and Z are automatically set to negative values. 2.1.2 Memory polarized MHO This characteristic is used for Zones 1, 1X (optionally reversed), 2, 4 and Z4HS (both reversed), when the Overhead Line option is selected as the Line Type. The characteristic is generated by a phase comparison between V/I-Z and the polarising signal Vpol where : V Vpol is the fault voltage is the prefault voltage is the fault current is the zone reach setting (including residual compensation for ground fault elements)
I
Z
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 4 of 76 is the source impedance (included in Figure 2 to show the position of the Vpol phasor)
Zs
The polarising signal Vpol is a memory of the prefault voltage, which is retained for 20 cycles after a fault. This signal is a representation of the volts at the source, which is made up of the fault voltage and the volt drop in the source impedance. Vpol = IZs + V or Vpol/I = Zs + V/I Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90, which is for faults inside the circle.
V-Z
Vpol Zs
Figure 2.
Memory polarized mho
Figure 2 shows that, as Zs becomes larger with respect to the setting Z (as the SIR increases), the resistive reach of the characteristic increases. The memory polarised characteristic provides fast clearance of close-up faults of all types, and offers good coverage of resistive faults, particularly at high SIRs. LFZR avoids the problems of phase selection normally associated with full memory polarisation by controlling the operation of the mho elements with a superimposed current phase selector (see Section 2.3). If no memory is available, either because the fault persists for more than 20 cycles, or if the fault occurs in the first 20 cycles following closure of the circuit breaker, a cross polarising signal is derived from the unfaulted phase(s). Ground fault elements use the sum of the two unfaulted phase voltages, with the direction reversed. Phase fault elements use the unfaulted phase voltage, phase shifted by -90. To produce the reversed zones (Zone 4 and, optionally, Zone 1X), the impedance Z is automatically set to a negative value.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.1.3
Offset MHO This characteristic is used for Zone 3. The operation of Zone 3 is similar to that of the self polarised mho (Figure 1), except that the offset impedance Z is a user setting. When a forward offset is selected, Z is automatically given a negative value.
2.2
Quadrilateral elements The optional quadrilateral elements available for ground faults are made from combinations of reactance lines, directional lines and load blinders. The directional lines and load blinders are also used to ensure directional stability and prevent load encroachment of the ground fault mho elements. Similar directional lines and load blinders, using phase-phase quantities, are used to control the phase fault mho elements. The quadrilateral characteristics are made by combining three, or in the case of the Zone 3 offset quadrilateral, four, phase comparisons. A counter, similar to that used for the mho element, is incremented when all the relevant phase comparisons indicate operation (Sections 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.2.5). The increment is always 1 but a fast decrement (3) is used when the faulted phase current is less than half the minimum operating current setting. Since these elements are used in conjunction with mho elements, an area of fast operation for faults near the characteristic angle is always available.
2.2.1
Directional quadrilateral This characteristic is used for Zones 1, 1X (optionally reversed), 2 and 4 and Z4HS (both reversed).
Reactance
Blinder
Directional
Figure 3.
Quadrilateral
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
It is formed from a reactance line (Section 2.2.3), a blinder (Section 2.2.4) and a directional line (Section 2.2.5). The reactance line is arranged to operate for faults below the line, the blinder for faults to the left of the line and the directional line for faults to the right. The counter increments when all these conditions are satisfied. 2.2.2 Offset quadrilateral This characteristic is used for Zone 3.
Reactance
Blinder
Blinder
Reactance
Figure 4 It is formed from two reactance line (Section 2.2.3) and two blinders (Section 2.2.4). The upper reactance line is arranged to operate for faults below it and the lower for fault above it. The right hand blinder is arranged to operate for faults to its left and the left hand blinder for faults to its right. The counter increments when all these conditions are satisfied. The lower reactance line may be set to an impedance in the first or, as shown, the third, quadrant, but the resistive reach of the left hand blinder must be set to a value to the left of the origin .
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.2.3
Reactance line
V -Z
Iref I
Figure 5 A reactance line is formed by the phase comparison between an operating signal V/I - Z, which is the same as that used for the equivalent mho element, and a polarising signal Iref/I Where V is the fault voltage is the fault current is the zone reach setting, including residual compensation
I
Z
Iref is the negative sequence current, with a -3 phase shift

Operation occurs when the operating signal lags the polarising signal. The -3 phase shift is introduced to reduce the possibility of overreach caused by any small differences between the negative sequence source impedances. When one circuit breaker pole is open, during a single pole reclose sequence, the polarising signal is replaced by the fault current with a -7 phase shift, allowing the protection of the remaining phases, even though the negative sequence current is not available. The additional phase shift is provided to reduce the possibility of overreach caused by the use of faulted phase current as the reference. Negative sequence current is used for Iref since it provides a better estimate of the current in the fault than either the faulted phase current or zero sequence current. This is because resistive earthing can cause large differences in the zero sequence impedance angles of the sources at opposite ends of a line, while the negative sequence source impedance angles are likely to be similar. The superimposed current phase selector (Section 2.3) ensures that the quadrilaterals do not operate for multi-phase faults, when the negative sequence current would cause incorrect measurement.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.2.4
Load blinder
V -R
Figure 6 A load blinder is formed by the phase comparison between an operating signal V/I - R and a polarising signal Z Where V is the fault voltage
I is the fault current

R is the resistive reach of the blinder (for ground fault elements, this is the resistance of the fault loop, while for phase fault elements it is the fault resistance in each phase) Z is the zone reach setting, including neutral compensation Operation occurs when the operating signal leads the polarising signal. 2.2.5 Directional lines
V Z
Directional
Figure 7
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
A directional line is produced by the phase comparison between an operate signal V/I and a polarising signal Z Where V is the memory or cross polarising voltage used by the mho elements (Section 2.1.2). This voltage is used whether the Line Type is selected as Overhead Line or Cable, when Standard Directional Polarising is selected. is the fault current determines the angle of the directional line (fixed at 45 for normal distance directional lines).
I
Z
Operation in the forward direction occurs when the magnitude of the angle between signals is less than 90 and in the reverse direction when it exceeds 90. Selecting Alternate Directional Polarising causes a different directional line to be used for ground fault elements. The phase fault directional lines are not affected. The alternative polarising is based on that selected for the DEF element and can be either a cross polarised zero sequence or a negative sequence element. Cross polarised zero sequence where: V is the sum of the two unfaulted phase voltages, as determined by the Phase Selector (Section 2.3). If no single phase fault is detected by the phase selector, the residual voltage (Va + Vb + Vc) is used. is the residual current (Ia + Ib + Ic) determines the angle of the directional line (adjustable between 10 and 80). is the negative sequence voltage is the negative sequence current determines the angle of the directional line (adjustable between 10 and 80).
I
Z
or a similar negative sequence directional line where: V
I
Z
The choice between these two directional lines is set by the DEF Element settings (Section 2.4). 2.3 Phase selection Operation of the distance elements, except Z4HS, is controlled by the Superimposed Current Phase Selector. Only elements associated with the fault type selected by the phase selector are allowed to operate during a period of two cycles following the phase selection. If no such element operates, all mho elements are enabled for the following 5 cycles, before the phase selector returns to its quiescent state. Note that during the 5 cycle period, the quadrilateral characteristics are not permitted to operate, since their operation is unreliable when more than one phase is faulted. Operation of an enabled distance element, during the two cycle or 5 cycle period, causes the phase selector state to be maintained until the element resets. The one exception to this is when the phase selector decision changes while an element is operated. In this case, the selected elements are reset and
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
the two cycle period re-starts with the new selection. Note that any existing trip decision is not reset under this condition. After the first cycle following a selection, the phase selector is only permitted to change to a selection involving additional phases. On double phase to ground faults, only the appropriate phase-phase elements are enabled. The indication of the involvement of ground is by operation of the biased neutral current level detector (Section 2.5.7). 2.3.1 Theory of operation Selection of the faulted phase(s) is performed by comparing the magnitudes (using magnitude algorithm Appendix D) of the three phase-to-phase superimposed currents. A single phase-to-ground fault produces the same superimposed current on two of these signals and zero on the third. A phase-tophase or double phase-to-ground fault produces one signal which is larger than the other two. A three phase fault produces three superimposed currents which are the same size. A superimposed current is deemed to be large enough to be included in the selection if it is greater than 80% of the largest superimposed current. When the largest superimposed current is smaller than that measured on the previous sample, the largest superimposed current, for selection purposes, is assumed to be 98% of the largest superimposed current magnitude for the previous sample. Selection in this case is based on any superimposed current which exceeds 80% of this value. This controlled decay of the superimposed threshold ensures that the phase selector resets correctly on fault clearance. Phase selection can only be made when any superimposed current exceeds 5%
In.
Under normal power system conditions, the superimposed currents are made by subtracting the phase-phase current sample taken 144 samples (2 cycles) earlier from the present sample. The magnitudes are calculated from three successive instances of superimposed current (Appendix A). When a fault is detected, by one or more superimposed current magnitudes exceeding the minimum threshold (5% In) and causing a selection to be made, the previous sample used in the superimposed current calculation is taken from a re-cycled buffer of previous samples. This ensures that, if the fault develops to include other phases, the original selection is not lost. The re-cycling of the prefault buffers is continued until the phase selector resets, either because the fault is cleared or when the 5 cycle period has expired and no element has operated. 2.3.2 Detection of power swings Power swings are detected by a similar method to the phase selection. The three phase-phase superimposed currents are measured in the same way, but in this case, the 'previous sample' used for the superimposed calculation is always the sample that was collected 144 samples before the present sample. This means that for a fault condition, the superimposed current will fall after 2 cycles, when the 'previous sample' becomes a sample of fault current, rather than pre-fault. A power swing is deemed to be in progress if a three phase selection, or a phase-phase selection when one breaker pole is open, produced in this way is retained for more than 2.5 cycles.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
In order to detect slow power swings, when the superimposed current remains below the minimum threshold (5% In), a power swing is also deemed to be in progress if a distance zone element operates when neither the 2 cycle nor the 5 cycle period of the main phase selector is in progress. When a power swing is in progress, the minimum threshold used by the main phase selector is increased to twice the previous maximum superimposed current sample, and re-cycling of the prefault samples is prevented. This prevents operation of the main phase selector as a result of the power swing. If a fault occurs during the power swing the block signal will not be removed although any unblocked phase to phase element will be able to operate. Power swing blocking indication is produced when a power swing is in progress and a distance element is operated, whether or not the element is selected for blocking (see Section 3.4). 2.4 Directional earth fault element The DEF produces forward and reverse outputs, using the signals described in Section 2.2.5 for the Alternate Directional Polarising.
V Z
Directional
Figure 8 The DEF characteristic is produced by phase comparison between an operate signal V/I and a polarising signal Z. The user may select either a zero sequence directional line where: V is the sum of the two unfaulted phase voltages, as determined by the Phase Selector (Section 2.3). If no single phase fault is detected by the phase selector, the residual voltage (Va + Vb + Vc) is used. is the residual current (Ia + Ib + Ic) determines the angle of the directional line (adjustable between 10 and 80). is the negative sequence voltage is the negative sequence current determines the angle of the directional line (adjustable between 10 and 80).
I
Z
or a similar negative sequence directional line where: V
I
Z
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The DEF decision is used to control the directionality of Instantaneous DEF, two stages of DEF time delayed backup, and IDMT (Section 3.2), and to produce the directional decisions for the DEF aided schemes (Sections 3.11 and 3.12). A count strategy, similar to that used by the Distance elements, is used to ensure the stability of the forward and reverse decisions. Separate counters are used for the forward and reverse elements. Measurements are made 36 times per cycle, the counters are incremented or decremented by 1 at each measurement. A forward decision causes the forward counter to be incremented and the reverse counter decremented. A reverse decision causes the reverse counter to be incremented and the forward counter decremented. No decision, caused by insufficient current or polarising voltage, decrements both counters. Operation of an element occurs at a count of 27 and reset at a count of 9. If a change from forward to reverse, or vice versa, would cause both elements to operate, internal logic forces both to reset, ensuring that forward and reverse decisions can not exist at the same time. The negative sequence DEF performs the phase comparison and count strategy three times, once for each phase. This is because the negative sequence current calculation uses a phase current as reference and it is necessary to ensure that there is sufficient reference current for the calculation for all fault types. The final decision requires a majority of any of the decisions made to produce a forward or reverse output. The forward and reverse elements, both zero sequence and negative sequence, are subject to independently set minimum zero sequence current thresholds in the range 0.05 to 1.2 In. The forward decision, for both negative sequence and zero sequence elements is subject to a voltage threshold of 1V (zero or negative sequence as appropriate). The corresponding reverse element threshold is 0.7V. The difference in the thresholds is required to ensure the stability of the channel aided DEF schemes. Note that the voltage threshold does not normally apply to the zero sequence DEF since the use of the sum of unfaulted phase voltages, controlled by the phase selector ensures a large voltage signal. 2.5 Level detectors Several current and voltage level detectors are provided, some with fixed setting and some with user settings. All the level detectors operate in a similar manner. The magnitude algorithm (Appendix A) is used to determine the magnitude of the required signal, which is then compared with the level detector setting. A count strategy is used to ensure stability close to the boundary while allowing fast operation for signals well away from the boundary. All the level detector measurements are made 12 times per cycle. A counter is incremented by 6 for inputs greater than twice setting and by 1 for inputs between setting and twice setting. The counter is decremented by 1 for inputs between setting and half setting and by 6 for inputs below half setting. Operation occurs at a count of 8 and reset at a count of 6, the counter being limited at 12 and zero.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.5.1
Fixed phase current LDLSA, LDLSB, LDLSC These measure A, B and C phase currents with a fixed threshold of 5% In and are used for pole dead detection.
2.5.2
Fixed phase voltage LDOVA, LDOVB, LDOVC These measure A, B and C phase voltages with a fixed threshold of 70% Vn and are used for pole dead detection.
2.5.3
Variable phase current LDOCA, LDOCB, LDOCC, LDLOLA, LDLOLB, LDLOLC Two sets of these measure A, B and C phase currents, with thresholds in the ranges 0.2 to 30In, used for stub bus or instantaneous overcurrent, and 0.05 to 1In, used in loss of load protection.
2.5.4
Variable neutral current LDHES1N, LDEHS2N, LDEHS3N Three of these, each measuring neutral current, filtered to minimise third harmonic (Appendix D), have independent thresholds in the range 0.2 to 30 In and are used, subject to optional DEF directional control (Section 2.4), to provide instantaneous and two stages of time delayed backup for earth faults.
2.5.5
Fixed neutral voltage LDV0VTS This measures neutral voltage (Va + Vb + Vc), filtered to minimise third harmonic, with a fixed threshold of 28V, and is used for VT supervision (see Section 3.3).
2.5.6
Variable neutral voltage LDVN This measures neutral voltage (Va + Vb + Vc), filtered to minimise third harmonic, with a threshold in the range 3V to 20V , and is used in the POR Weak Infeed DEF schemes (see Sections 3.11.4 and 3.12.1).
2.5.7
Biased neutral current LDBN This measures neutral current, filtered to minimise third harmonic, with a threshold of 10% of the largest phase-phase current or 5% In, whichever is the greater (Figure 9).
Threshold 1.0In
0.05In
0.5In
Maximum Phase-Phase Current
10.0In
Figure 9 It is used to provide the neutral indication for double phase to ground faults (Section 2.3), to control the operation of ground fault distance elements in the absence of phase selector control, and for VT supervision.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
SCHEME LOGIC FUNCTIONS
This section describes the scheme logic functions of the LFZR100 series of relays and provides a detailed functional description of the main features of the relay. The use of these features is covered by the Application Notes (Chapter 2). The principles of operation for the individual protection elements are described in Section 2. The scheme logic is split into three sections Basic scheme (always present) Main channel aided. These are distance aided schemes with optional DEF, using a common signalling channel. Independent channel DEF schemes. These use a separate signalling channel and may be selected independently of the choice of the main channel aided scheme. This feature is not available on LFZR113 models. 3.1 Basic scheme The Basic scheme provides the features which operate independently of other relays, and of information from the remote line end. It includes instantaneous and backup protection and control and monitoring functions. The following features are included: Instantaneous Zone 1 tripping Time-delayed tripping by Zones 1X, 2, 3 and 4 Directional Earth Fault protection (DEF) instantaneous element (forward-looking or non-directional) two definite time-delayed elements (directional or non-directional) Time-overcurrent DEF element, Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) directional or non-directional Trip Latching, including three pole only (all models) and single and three pole tripping (LFZR 111 models only), Direct Transfer Trip and Circuit Breaker Fail. Indication logic, to provide indication of the faulted phase(s). Pole dead detection Switch-on-to-Fault (SOTF) and Trip on Reclose (TOR) Instantaneous Overcurrent protection and Stub Bus Loss-of-Load feature (LoL) Power Swing Blocking (PSB) Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) Block Auto-Reclose (BAR) The interconnection of the functions of the Basic Scheme is shown in Diagram LFZR100101000. 3.1.1 Zone 1 (Diagram LFZR100101008) An instantaneous Zone 1 trip is issued when any of the Zone 1 distance
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
elements operates. It is possible to select using the menu whether the phase and/or ground fault elements are used to produce a trip. Signals are created to permit single pole tripping, if selected. Zone 1 trips may also be initiated by the Zone 1X elements when the Zone 1 extension scheme is in operation (Section 3.2.1). 3.1.2 Time delayed tripping zones 1X, 2, 3 and 4 (Diagrams LFZR100101009, LFZR100101010, LFZR100101011, LFZR100101012) Time delayed trips are issued for Zones 1X, 2, 3 and 4 when any element of the zone is operated for the duration of the zone delay. Such trips are always three pole, but may be enabled or disabled independently for phase-phase and phase-ground faults. 3.1.3 Directional earth fault protection (DEF) (Diagram LFZR100101013) Instantaneous DEF trips are issued when the level detector LDEHS1N operates. It is possible to select this to operate for forward faults only, in which case the trip is issued only when the forward DEF element DEFFWD is also operated. Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off timers (20ms each) are included to prevent transient operation under current reversal conditions. Single pole trips may be issued (LFZR 111 models only) under the control of the phase selector signals PHD_A, PHD_B and PHD_C. Time delayed back-up trips TrDEFBU1 and TrDEFBU2 are issued when the appropriate level detector LDEHS2N or LDEHS3N is operated for the duration of the delay timer TBU1 or TBU2. These trips may be selected to be non directional, or restricted to forward or reverse faults only, controlled by DEFFWD and DEFREV. All DEF time delayed back-up trips are three phase. The user may select one of eight IDMT curves (Section 2.5) to provide inverse time delayed back-up. This selection is subject to the same directional control options as the definite time back-up protections and provides three phase tripping only. The element starts only when the current exceeds the base setting and the directional condition is satisfied. The IDMT delay is determined from the level of current flowing as a multiple of the setting (Is). The curve equation is used to calculate an increment based on this multiple. This increment is added to a counter, and, when this counter reaches a predefined limit, the IDMT element will trip. In this way the element correctly reacts to changes in the fault current allowing grading with other overcurrent relays. If either the directional element resets or the current drops below setting, for a period exceeding the reset time setting, the counter is reset to zero and the start removed. The time setting multiplier for the IDMT modifies the counter threshold. The operating time is then based on the time multiplier setting multiplied by the curve delay for the current level applied. 3.1.4 Trip latching logic (Diagram LFZR100101015) This logic controls the issuing of all trips, both single phase and three phase, whether initiated by Basic Scheme functions or the selected Aided Scheme. A timer is included to ensure that the trip output is maintained for 60ms after
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
the current, as detected by level detectors LDLSA, LDLSB and LDLSC, has fallen below setting on all phases for which a trip was issued. It is possible to delay all trips, using the timer TTRIP (Menu: Inst Trip Delay), if required for particular circuit breaker applications. Single pole tripping is available on LFZR111 models for instantaneous tripping of single phase-ground faults, issued by the Zone 1 distance, instantaneous DEF, instantaneous overcurrent, or the selected aided scheme. All other LFZR111 trips, and all trips for LFZR112 and LFZR113 models are three phase. An opto input is provided on LFZR111 models to convert single pole trips to three pole (FORCE_3POLE). This function may be required in certain autoreclose applications. In addition to this, any trip issued during a single pole dead condition will automatically be converted to three pole. An opto input (DIRECT INTERTRIP), available on all models, causes a 3 pole trip to be issued when energised. This function may be required for schemes requiring direct transfer trip. The trip logic also incorporate the optional circuit breaker fail logic. When enabled if any trip remains active for more than the time set on TCBF (Menu: CB Fail Timer), the circuit breaker is assumed to have failed, and AlarmCBF is issued. 3.1.5 Indication logic (Diagram LFZR100101017) This logic controls the operation of the phase indication outputs FltAPh, FltBPh, FltCPh and FltN, which identify the faulted phase(s). These signals provide the front panel indication of the faulted phase(s) and may be mapped to output contacts for remote indication. The phase selection is derived using the distance and overcurrent elements which have started or tripped. If a trip has not occurred then the phase selection is taken from all the elements that have started. The biased neutral current level detector is used to provide a neutral indication for two phase to ground faults since these are detected by the phase to phase distance elements (Diagram LFZR100101004, Phase Selector Decode). If the relay trips then only the elements which have performed a trip are used to derive the phase indication, the started elements are ignored. As before the biased neutral level detector is used for neutral indication for two phase to ground faults. The weak infeed and trip on close scheme logic produce indication signals on tripping which are added to the phase indication outputs. To allow directional earth fault tripping to produce phase indication a snapshot of the phase selector output is taken when the trip occurs (Diagram LFZR100101004, Phase Selector Decode). This is used to provide phase indication. If the DEF performs a start and no other element operates the phase indication will indicate neutral only. 3.1.6 Pole dead detection (Diagram LFZR100101007) The pole dead detection logic provides individual indication of the status of the circuit breaker poles (LFZR111 models), and indication of any pole dead or all poles dead (all models). It uses inputs from the circuit breaker auxiliary switch contact(s) or, if these are not available, phase overcurrent and undervoltage level detectors. A pole is detected as dead if either the auxiliary switch input is
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
active or neither the current (>5%In) nor voltage level detector (>70%Vn) on that phase is operated. A 22ms timer is included for each phase to prevent spurious pole dead indications when one level detector is operating and the other resetting simultaneously. The pole dead indications are used in Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose logic (Section 3.1.7) and in POR2 schemes involving weak infeed logic (Section 4.). They are also used to control the polarising of the quadrilateral top line (Section 2.2). 3.1.7 Trip on close (Diagram LFZR100101006) This logic controls the operation of the relay immediately following closure of the circuit breaker. It includes Trip on Reclose logic, which covers automatic reclosure, and is initiated when any pole has been dead for more than 200ms. When all poles have been dead for 110s, Switch on to Fault logic, which covers manual closure of the circuit breaker, replaces the Trip on Reclose logic. Both Switch on to Fault logic and Trip on Reclose logic, when enabled, remain active for 512ms after all poles are detected as live. During the Trip on Reclose period, the user may elect to trip via one of the following options: Zone 1 + Level Detectors Zone 1 + Zone 2 + Level Detectors Zone 1 + Zone 2 + Zone 3 Zone 1 + Zone 2 + Zone 3+ Level Detectors Scheme Logic The Level Detectors are the phase current and voltage level detectors used for the detection of poles dead (Section 3.1.6). Tripping occurs when the current level detector is operated and the voltage level detector on the same phase is not operated. A 20ms timer is included to prevent spurious operation due to line charging current when the breaker is closed. The distance elements use cross polarising instead of the normal memory polarising for the mho elements and directional lines during the Trip on Reclose period (see Section 2.1.2). The Scheme Logic option allows the relay to operate in its normal mode, including single pole tripping (if enabled on LFZR111 models). All trips can be forced to three pole using the Trip on Reclose menu option. For all the other options three pole tripping only is provided. All trips during this period are indicated as TOR, regardless of the option selected. During the Switch on to Fault period, the options for tripping are the same as those for Trip on Reclose, except that the Scheme Logic option is not available. The selection of the options for the two cases is independent. As for Trip on Reclose, the distance elements use cross polarising instead of the normal memory polarising for the mho elements and directional lines. All trips during this period are three pole and are indicated as SOTF, regardless of the option selected. Block Auto Reclose (BAR) (Section 3.1.12) is issued for all SOTF trips.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
When SOTF becomes active, the Frequency Tracking (Appendix A) reverts to the nominal frequency (50 or 60Hz.) since no signal is available to determine the system frequency. Tracking resumes as soon as healthy voltage is restored. 3.1.8 Instantaneous overcurrent and stub bus (Diagram LFZR100101005) Instantaneous overcurrent, when enabled, provides independent trips for each phase (which may be used for single pole tripping on LFZR111 models), when the phase current level detectors LDOCA, LDOCB and LDOCC operate. Alternatively, the same level detectors may be selected to provide stub bus protection. A stub bus trip (three pole only) is issued if any phase current level detector operates while the STUB_OPTO, which indicates that the line isolator is open, is energised,. 3.1.9 Loss of load feature (Diagram LFZR100101014) This feature is available on all models when 3 pole tripping only is selected and no Aided Scheme is selected. It provides accelerated tripping for faults in Zone 2, when the removal of load from the unfaulted phases indicates that the remote breaker has tripped. The feature is disabled when a trip occurs for any other reason. Load current is detected by the phase current level detectors LOLA, LOLB and LOLC. For tripping to occur, a Zone 2 element must be operated and the level detectors corresponding to the unfaulted phase or phases must be reset. Tripping is possible only during a 40ms period following the reset of the first level detector and the condition must remain for at least 18ms for a trip to be issued. 3.1.10 Power swing blocking (Diagram LFZR100101002) Power swings are detected using superimposed current measurements as described in Section 2.3.2. Dependent on the menu settings the logic generates blocking signals for each selected zone when a power swing is detected. These signals are used by the Inhibit Logic (LFZR10010001) to ignore the operation of the zone elements. A power swing block alarm (AlarmPSB) is issued while the power swing locus is inside any zone. The PSB timeout option allows a zone to operate if it remains blocked for more than 2s. 3.1.11 Voltage transformer supervision (Diagram LFZR100101003) Failure of a VT fuse is detected by the presence of zero sequence voltage (>15%V0), as detected by the level detector LDV0VTS, without zero sequence current, as detected by the biased neutral current level detector LDLSBN (see Section 2.5.7). If the VTS is set to block tripping (VTS_B_TRIP), a signal (VTS_BLK) is sent
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
immediately to the inhibit logic (LFZR100101001) to prevent the issuing of any trip requiring a voltage dependent function. Non-directional overcurrent trips are not prevented. If this situation exists for more than 5s, an alarm is issued and the blocking signal is latched until balanced three phase volts are restored, or a manual reset (VTS_RST) is issued and the VTS condition is removed (by all poles dead). The weak infeed logic included within the permissive overreach scheme is not blocked until the latched trip occurs. The reason for this is that a weak infeed condition could appear to be a voltage transformer failure and would otherwise be inhibited by the instantaneous block. VTS_BLK is prevented if any pole is dead and for 240ms after the last pole has closed. It is also prevented if any distance or DEF element is operated before the VTS condition is established. Operation of the MCB input causes VTS_BLK and AlarmVTS to be issued without delay. 3.1.12 Block auto-reclose (Diagram LFZR100101016) Block Auto-Reclose (BAR) is always issued for three pole trips under the following conditions: Time delayed Zone 3, Zone 4 or DEF SOTF Channel out of Service (Aided Schemes) The user may also select BAR for three pole trips under the following conditions: Time delayed Zone 1X or Zone 2 DEF instantaneous or aided trips Instantaneous trips (Zone 1 or Aided) for 2 and 3 phase faults Instantaneous trips (Zone 1 or Aided) for 3 phase faults BAR is retained for 20ms after the trip causing it has reset. 3.2 Distance aided schemes The relay basic scheme can only produce instantaneous trips for faults within the Zone 1 reach (normally set to 80 to 85% of the line). The channel aided schemes allow the relay to issue an instantaneous trip for all faults within the protected section of line. The following schemes are available on all models of the relay: Zone 1 Extension (does not require channel) Permissive Underreach (PUR) Permissive Underreach Unblocking (PUR Unblock) Permissive Overreach 1 (POR1) Permissive Overreach 1 Unblocking (POR1 Unblock) Permissive Overreach 2 (POR2) Permissive Overreach 2 Unblocking (POR2 Unblock) Permissive Overreach 2 Weak Infeed (POR2 WI) Permissive Overreach 2 Weak Infeed Unblocking (POR2 WI Unblock)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Blocking 1 Blocking 2 A Directional Earth Fault (DEF) option sharing the same channel as the distance is selectable for the Permissive Overreach and Blocking schemes. If this option is used then the DEF will automatically use the same scheme as the distance. Using the phase selector flags it is possible for a DEF aided trip to be single pole for single phase to ground faults. This is the case for both the combined channel or independent channel DEF schemes. The following sections define each of the main relay schemes in detail, it should be noted that some of the schemes listed above are implemented as settings within a main scheme option. Examples of this are the weak infeed trip options for the permissive overreach 2 scheme and the unblocking logic options for all of the permissive schemes. The signal receive logic used by all of the aided schemes is defined within a separate section. 3.2.1 Zone 1 extension Refer to diagrams LFZR100110001 and LFZR100101008. This scheme is used in conjunction with high-speed auto-reclosure when no signalling channel is available. When this scheme is selected the logic enables the Zone 1X elements to perform an instantaneous trip using the Zone 1 basic scheme tripping logic. This effectively extends the reach of Zone 1 to that for Zone 1X. This zone should be set to overreach the protected line section, typically 120% of the protected line. This allows all faults within the protected line section, and those immediately beyond the protected section, to be cleared instantaneously. The auto-recloser will then attempt an auto-reclose. Since most faults are transient in nature the fault should have been cleared by the first trip. Following reclosure an output from the auto-reclose relay is used to energise the Z1X_RESET opto. This prevents the Zone 1X elements from performing an instantaneous trip and returns instantaneous tripping to zone 1 (typically set to 80% of the protected line). If the fault is permanent and is beyond the reach of the zone 1 element a basic scheme time delayed trip will eventually be issued. The Zone 1 extension scheme logic produces two outputs which control the Zone 1 basic scheme logic. These inputs Z1X_GF and Z1X_PF extend the reach of the ground and phase reach of Zone 1 to that of Zone 1X. The aided scheme tripping setting controls the signals AID_GF_EN and AID_PF_EN to determine whether the reach extension is applied to ground faults, phase faults, or both. 3.2.2 Signal receive logic (including unblocking logic) Refer to diagram LFZR100111002. The communication receive logic is an integral part of all the channel-aided schemes. It incorporates the unblocking logic which can be selected for the permissive schemes. It translates the signals from the opto inputs into those required by the scheme that is currently operating. The operation of this logic is controlled by two settings. The first of these is Independent DEF Scheme Enable (IC_DEF_EN). The second is the Unblocking Scheme Enable (DIST_UB_EN).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
If the independent channel scheme is not enabled both sets of Signal Receive and Channel Out of Service signals are ORed together to produce a redundant channel scheme. If the independent channel scheme is enabled then the second set of Signal Receive and Channel Out of Service inputs are not used by the main scheme. If the unblocking scheme is disabled then the Signal Receive and Channel Out of Service are passed straight through to the aided scheme. The signal CRX1A is used by the distance logic and CRX1B by the DEF logic within the main aided scheme. Unless the unblocking logic has been selected these two signals are identical. 3.2.2.1 Unblocking logic The unblocking logic is designed to be used with power line carrier equipment which transmits a constant guard (or block) signal. To issue a channel send the frequency of the signal is shifted causing the remote end to lose the guard and also to detect the permissive (unblocking) signal. The combination of the Loss of Guard Signal and Signal Receive allows the permissive scheme to trip. It is possible during a solid fault for the unblocking signal to be lost, in this case only loss of guard will be detected. The unblocking logic can be used with any of the permissive schemes. These schemes use a Loss of Guard Signal (LGS) opto input which replaces the channel out of service input. During an internal fault both the loss of guard and the signal receive are normally received. This allows the channel-aided scheme to trip via either the distance or DEF by asserting both CRX1A and CRX1B. If the unblock carrier signal is lost due to a solid internal fault only the loss of guard signal will be received. This initiates a 150ms window during which the distance elements are allowed to perform a channel-aided trip (only CRX1A is asserted). There is a settable time delay (Tdw) before the loss of guard allows tripping of the distance scheme under this situation. This timer prevents the relay tripping due to a transient loss of guard signal. The DEF aided scheme logic is not allowed to perform an Aided trip during this period. Once the 150ms window has elapsed the aided scheme is disabled and the Carrier Out of Service alarm (AlarmCOS1) is asserted. The LGS signal must reset for a period of 200ms before the scheme is re-enabled. 3.2.3 Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) Please refer to diagram LFZR100111001. This channel aided scheme is not suitable for a shared channel DEF scheme and can be used with either a simplex or duplex communication channel. It is possible to select whether ground and/or phase fault distance elements are used by the scheme using the aided scheme tripping option in the menu. This setting controls both the Zone 2 tripping elements and the Zone 1 signal send elements. The operation of any Zone 1 element causes the Signal Send contact to operate. The operation of a Zone 2 element together with the Signal Receive will produce an Aided trip. The Signal Receive incorporates a 100ms delay on drop-off, which allows both relays to trip sequentially for a fault on a single end fed parallel circuit. Aided scheme tripping is blocked if the Basic scheme has tripped for the fault. The scheme is also inhibited from both sending and tripping during switch onto
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
fault and optionally following an auto-reclose. The signal AlarmCOS1 indicates that the channel is out of service. This does not have an effect upon the operation of the aided scheme. It is used by the trip latching logic to convert all tripping to three pole and is also used to block auto-reclose. 3.2.4 Permissive overreach scheme 1 (POR1) Refer to diagram LFZR100112001. There are two versions of the permissive overreach scheme. The two schemes differ in the current reversal guard logic employed and the weak infeed option within the POR2 scheme. The POR1 scheme requires a duplex channel to be used and allows the operation of a shared channel DEF scheme. The same DEF scheme is used for both of the Permissive overreach schemes. It is possible to select whether ground and/or phase fault distance elements are used by the scheme using the aided scheme tripping option in the menu. This setting controls both the Zone 2 elements used for sending and tripping. Signal Send is issued under the following circumstances Operation of any Zone 2 element; provided BASIC_EN is high and the distance current reversal guard has not operated. Operation of the DEF_FWD element; provided BASIC_EN is high and the DEF current reversal guard has not operated. Following the operation of an instantaneous trip by the Basic scheme, Signal Send is maintained for 100ms after the trip has reset. If all three poles of the circuit breaker have been open for more than 250ms; a 100ms echo of signal send occurs following receipt of signal. This allows the remote end to perform a channel-aided trip. The 250ms delay prevents spurious operation of the circuit breaker open echo upon fault clearance. The scheme incorporates two current reversal guards which stabilise the scheme during clearance of external faults. One of these operates upon the distance scheme logic and the other upon the optional DEF. The distance current reversal guard is primed if Signal Receive is maintained for a period time greater than TP without the local Zone 2 element operating. TP is set to prevent the current reversal guard being invoked for internal faults due to slow operation of Zone 2. Once set the current reversal guard prevents the Zone 2 elements from transmitting signal or tripping locally for a time TD following operation of Zone 2. The DEF current reversal guard is primed by the operation of the reverse-looking DEF_REV element. Once operated it prevents the DEF_FWD element from transmitting channel or tripping for a period of time, TDG. It is important that the current pickup setting for this reverse looking element is lower than the setting for the remote end forward element. This ensures that all external faults that are detected by the remote end are also detected locally. The recommendations for setting of the distance and DEF current reversal guard timers can be found in the Application section of this Service Manual (Chapter 2). In order for the distance scheme to trip, a Zone 2 element must have operated together with a Signal Receive. The distance current reversal guard inhibits distance aided tripping. Once operated the trip is latched in and is
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
maintained until the Zone 2 element resets. A DEF Aided trip requires operation of the forward looking directional earth fault element (DEF_FWD) together with Signal Receive. It is inhibited by the DEF current reversal guard. The DEF Aided trip can be single pole if the phase selector indicates that the fault is single phase-ground. For all other types of fault the DEF issues a three pole trip. The DEF trip is latched until the DEF_FWD element resets. If Channel Out of Service (AlarmCOS1) is received the scheme will continue to operate, within the trip logic all trips are converted to three pole and autoreclose is blocked. 3.2.5 Permissive overreach scheme 2 (POR2) with optional weak infeed Refer to diagram LFZR100113001. The permissive overreach 2 scheme is similar to the permissive overreach 1 scheme described above. The main difference between the schemes is the distance current reversal guard and the inclusion of weak infeed echo and tripping. The POR1 scheme requires a duplex channel to be used and allows the operation of a shared channel DEF scheme. The same DEF scheme is used for both of the permissive overreach schemes. It is possible to select whether ground and/or phase fault distance elements are used by the scheme using the aided scheme tripping option in the menu. This setting controls the Zone 2 elements used for both sending and tripping. Signal Send is issued under the following circumstances: Operation of any Zone 2 element; provided BASIC_EN is high and the distance current reversal guard has not operated. Operation of the DEF_FWD element; provided BASIC_EN is high and the DEF current reversal guard has not operated. Following the operation of an instantaneous trip by the Basic scheme, Signal Send is maintained for 100ms after the trip has reset. If all three poles of the circuit breaker have been open for more than 250ms a 100ms echo of signal send occurs following receipt of signal. This allows the remote end to perform an aided trip. The 250ms delay prevents spurious operation of the circuit breaker open echo upon fault clearance. The POR2 scheme also incorporates a weak infeed echo feature. This issues a 100ms pulse of Signal Send 10ms after Signal Receive, providing no comparators have operated. The weak infeed echo allows the remote end to trip even if there is little or no infeed at the local end. The weak infeed echo is inhibited under the following circumstances Operation of the reverse looking Zone 4HS and DEF reverse elements. These reverse elements must be set with lower current thresholds than the remote sending elements (Zone 2 and DEF forward). This ensures that all external faults detected by the remote end are also detected by the local reverse looking elements. If any poles of the local circuit breaker are open, indicated by the circuit breaker auxiliary opto inputs being energised. Receipt of the latched blocking signal (VTS_WI) from the voltage transformer supervision logic.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Receipt of the signal AR_INPROG; this is an opto-isolator input from the autoreclose equipment indicating that an auto-reclose is in progress. Operation of the DEF current reversal guard. The distance current reversal guard is primed if the reverse-looking Zone 4HS operates. This then inhibits the distance logic from transmitting the permissive signal or from tripping for a settable time delay TD after the reset of the reverse element. The DEF current reversal guard is primed by the operation of the reverse-looking DEF_REV element. Once operated it prevents the DEF_FWD element from transmitting channel or tripping for a period of time, TDG. As explained within the weak infeed echo logic it is important that the reverse elements are set more sensitive than the remote sending elements. The recommendations for setting of the distance and DEF current reversal guard timers can be found in the Application section of this Service Manual (Chapter 2). In order for the distance scheme to trip a Zone 2 element must have operated together with a Signal Receive. The distance current reversal guard inhibits distance channel-aided tripping. Once operated the trip is latched in and is maintained until the Zone 2 element resets. A DEF channel-aided trip requires operation of the forward looking directional earth fault element (DEF_FWD) element together with receipt of signal. It is inhibited by the DEF current reversal guard. The DEF channel aided trip can be single pole if the phase selector indicates that the fault is single phase-toground. For other types of fault the DEF issues a three pole trip. The DEF trip is latched until the DEF_FWD element resets. The weak infeed echo is present in all versions of the POR2 scheme, if the POR2 WI (or POR2 WI Unblock) scheme is selected the relay is also able to trip at the weak end. To produce a weak infeed trip all of the conditions described above for the WI echo must be satisfied except for the DEF current reversal guard. This is not required as there is a 60ms delay on execution of the weak infeed trip once all the conditions are met. The weak infeed trip is also controlled by operation of the phase overvoltage level detectors. The reset of the overvoltage level detector (set at 70% of Vn) on a particular phase allows that phase to be tripped. This allows the relay to perform a single pole weak infeed trip if appropriate. A faulted phase indication is also derived from the status of these level detectors at the time that the trip occurs. If three pole tripping is enabled it is also possible for a weak infeed trip to be initiated by operation of the settable neutral current level detector LDVN. Since this level detector can only produce a three pole trip it is disabled if the relay is set for single and three pole tripping. 3.2.6 Blocking 1 scheme Refer to diagram LFZR100113001. The relay provides two blocking schemes. The main difference between the two is the current reversal guard logic employed. The blocking schemes can be used with either a simplex or duplex channel and support an optional combined channel DEF scheme. It is possible to select whether ground and phase fault distance elements are
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
used by the scheme using the aided scheme tripping option in the menu. This setting controls both the Zone 2 tripping elements and the Zone 4HS sending elements. Signal Send is asserted by the operation of a reverse-looking element. It is not conditional on the status of the BASIC_EN flag. This ensures that if the relay closes onto a reverse fault, a signal will be sent to stabilise the relay at the remote end of the line. Signal Send is performed under the following conditions: Operation of the reverse looking Zone 4HS element with no operation of the forward-looking Zone 2 Operation of the reverse looking DEF_REV element with no operation of either DEF_FWD or Zone 2 The scheme includes a self blocking feature whereby the signal send also causes a local signal receive. This allows the scheme to be used with a duplex carrier channel without the scheme timer recommendations being altered. Both the distance and DEF logic within the scheme require a current reversal guard. These are implemented as a delay on reset of signal receive. The dropoff timer TD is used to inhibit the distance element from tripping. The DEF element is inhibited from tripping by the timer TDG. A distance aided trip is issued following operation of the Zone 2 element without receipt of a blocking signal. There is a delay on tripping, TP, which is set large enough to allow a blocking signal to be received in the case of an external fault. A DEF aided trip is achieved by the operation of DEF_FWD element without receipt of a blocking signal. The settable timer TPG delays the trip to allow the blocking signal to be sent from the remote end for an external fault. As for the other schemes, DEF is capable of performing single pole tripping by use of the phase selector. The distance and the DEF aided tripping is inhibited if the BASIC_EN flag is low or if the Basic scheme has performed a trip. The Blocking scheme is disabled if the Channel out of Service alarm (AlarmCOS1) is set, within the basic scheme three pole tripping is forced and the block autoreclose signal is issued. The reverse looking Zone 4HS and DEF reverse elements are used to prevent the remote relay from tripping due to an external fault. These reverse elements must be set with lower current thresholds than the remote sending elements (Zone 2 and DEF forward). This ensures that all faults detected by the remote end are also detected by the local reverse looking elements. 3.2.7 Blocking 2 Scheme Refer to diagram LFZR100114001. The Blocking 2 scheme is provided as an alternative to the Blocking 1 scheme. It can be used with either simplex or duplex channels and includes an optional combined channel DEF scheme. It is possible to select whether ground and phase fault distance elements are used by the scheme using the Aided Scheme Tripping option in the menu. This setting controls both the Zone 2 tripping elements and the Zone 4HS sending elements. Signal Send is asserted by the operation of a reverse-looking element. It is not conditional on the status of the BASIC_EN flag. This ensures that if the relay closes onto a reverse fault, a signal will be sent to stabilise the relay at the
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
remote end of the line. Signal Send is performed under the following conditions: Operation of the reverse looking Zone 4 HS element with no operation of the forward looking Zone 2 element. The distance current reversal guard is implemented as a delay on reset TD for the Signal Send produced by this element. Operation of the reverse looking DEF element with no operation of the DEF forward element. The DEF current reversal guard is implemented as a delay on drop off TDG for the Signal Send produced by this element. For internal faults Signal Send is removed by Signal Stop. This is produced under the following circumstances Operation of the forward-looking Zone 2, provided that the distance current reversal guard has reset. Operation of the forward DEF element, provided that the distance and DEF current reversal guard timers have both reset. Instantaneous tripping by the Basic scheme; eg., Zone 1, Instantaneous overcurrent, DEF Instantaneous. There is a 100ms drop-off on signal stop produced by this path. This ensures remote end clearance of the fault following the local instantaneous trip. The Signal Stop is also available for contact allocation if required by the carrier equipment, this signal is only produced by the Blocking 2 scheme. The Signal Receive is subject to a 2ms pick-up/5ms drop-off timer, this is to prevent false operation for a short interruption of the blocking signal. Following this timer the local signal receive is ORed with the local signal send before being used by the scheme. This self-block allows the scheme to be used with duplex in addition to simplex channels. A distance Aided trip occurs at time TP after the pick-up of the Zone 2 element, provided that the following conditions are met There is no Signal Receive The channel is in service A Basic scheme trip has not occurred The BASIC_EN signal is high A DEF Aided trip is produced at time TPG after the pick up of the forward DEF element. The conditions for the DEF Aided trip are the same as those listed above for the distance. The Blocking scheme is disabled if the Channel out of Service opto is energised, an alarm is issued and within the basic scheme three pole tripping is forced and the block auto-reclose signal is issued. The reverse looking Zone 4HS and DEF reverse elements are used to prevent the remote relay from tripping due to an external fault. These reverse elements must be set with lower current thresholds than the remote sending elements (Zone 2 and DEF forward). This ensures that all faults detected by the remote end are also detected by the local reverse looking elements. 3.3 Independent channel DEF schemes The Single Pole Tripping (LFZR111) and Opto Selectable Setting Group (LFZR112) versions of the relay allow an independent channel DEF scheme to be selected instead of the combined channel. If this is selected then the DEF logic
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
within the main scheme is disabled. Any of the independent channel schemes can be selected to operate within any of the main channel scheme. The following independent DEF schemes are available: Permissive Overreach (POR) Permissive Overreach Unblock (POR Unblocking) Permissive Overreach Weak Infeed (POR WI) Permissive Overreach Weak Infeed Unblock (POR WI Unblocking) Blocking 1 Blocking 2 When the independent channel scheme is enabled the signal receive logic for the main scheme ignores the second set of scheme opto inputs. The Signal Receive 2 and Channel out of Service 2 are used by the independent channel scheme instead. The opto inputs for the independent channel scheme are passed through a separate signal receive logic to the main scheme. This logic includes the unblocking scheme logic and is described within a separate section. 3.3.1 Independent channel signal receive logic Refer to diagram LFZR100120002. The signal receive logic is included as an integral part of all the independent channel DEF schemes. It passes the Signal Receive and Channel out of Service opto inputs to the independent DEF scheme. The permissive scheme options include an optional Unblock logic, the logic for which is included within the signal receive logic. If the unblocking logic is not enabled then the communication receive logic passes the Signal Receive and Channel Out of Service signals directly through to the scheme. The unblocking logic is designed to be used with power line carrier equipment which transmits a constant guard (or block) signal. To issue a channel send the frequency of the signal is shifted causing the remote end to lose the guard and also to detect the permissive (unblocking) signal. The combination of the Loss of Guard Signal and Signal Receive allows the permissive scheme to trip. It is possible during a solid fault for the unblocking signal to be lost. In this case only loss of guard will be detected. The Independent channel DEF scheme is not permitted to trip in this situation. If an unblocking scheme is selected then the Channel Out of Service optoisolator input is interpreted by the logic as a Loss of Guard signal (LGS). For an internal fault condition the logic should receive both Signal Receive and Loss of Guard. This allows the scheme to trip by passing Signal Receive through to the selected channel-aided scheme. If only Loss of Guard is received then the DEF scheme is not permitted to trip. If this condition exists for a period of 150ms then the logic will issue Channel-Out of Service. The Channel Out of Service disables the scheme by preventing Signal Receive from being issued by the communication receive logic. LGS must reset for a period of 200ms before the Channel Out of Service signal and the scheme disable are removed. The Channel Out of Service alarm created by the independent DEF scheme has no effect upon the basic scheme or the main distance aided scheme. 3.3.2 DEF permissive overreach scheme Refer to diagram LFZR100120001.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The DEF Permissive Overreach scheme is similar to the POR2 main scheme providing weak infeed echo logic and optional weak infeed tripping. It requires a duplex communication channel to be used Signal Send is issued under the following circumstances Operation of the DEF_FWD element, provided that BASIC_EN flag is high and the current reversal guard is not active. Following Basic scheme instantaneous trip and for 100ms following the reset of this trip. If all three poles of the circuit breaker have been open for more than 250ms, a 100ms echo of Signal Send occurs following Signal Receive. This allows the remote end to perform a channel-aided trip. The 250ms delay prevents spurious operation of the circuit breaker open echo upon fault clearance. The DEF Permissive overreach scheme also incorporates a weak infeed echo feature, this echoes a 100ms pulse of signal send following signal receipt, providing no comparators have operated. Following the conditions for the weak infeed echo being satisfied, there is a 10ms delay before the echo occurs. The weak infeed echo allows the remote end to trip even if there is little or no infeed at the local end. The weak infeed echo is inhibited under the following circumstances The reverse looking DEF_REV element is used to prevent the relay from echoing signal for an external fault. This elements must be set with lower current thresholds than the remote DEF_FWD sending elements. This ensures that all faults detected by the remote end are also detected by the local reverse looking elements. If any poles of the local circuit breaker are open, indicated by the circuit breaker auxiliary opto inputs being energised. Receipt of the latched blocking signal (VTS_WI) from the voltage transformer supervision logic. Receipt of the signal AR_INPROG; this is an opto-isolator input from the autoreclose equipment indicating that an auto-reclose is in progress. Operation of the DEF current reversal guard. The current reversal guard is set if the reverse DEF element operates with no operation of the DEF forward element. The guard consists of a delay on dropoff, TDG and is used to inhibit sending and tripping of the scheme. A DEF Aided trip is issued for operation of the forward DEF element and Signal Receive. This is provided that BASIC_EN flag is high, the current reversal guard is not active, and the Basic scheme has not already tripped for the fault. The DEF Aided trip via the independent scheme can be single pole for single phase-ground faults. This is achieved by using the phase selector outputs to control the trip signal. If the POR weak infeed option is selected the scheme also allows the relay at the weak end of the line to perform a trip. To produce a weak infeed trip all of the conditions described above for the WI echo must be satisfied except for the DEF current reversal guard. This is not required as there is a 60ms delay on execution of the weak infeed trip once all the conditions are met. The weak infeed trip is also controlled by operation of the phase overvoltage level detectors. The reset of the overvoltage level detector (set at 70% of Vn) on
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
a particular phase allows that phase to be tripped. This allows the relay to perform a single pole weak infeed trip if appropriate. A faulted phase indication is also derived from the status of these level detectors at the time that the trip occurs. If three pole tripping is enabled it is also possible for a weak infeed trip to be initiated by operation of the settable neutral current level detector LDVN. Since this level detector can only produce a three pole trip it is disabled if the relay is set for single and three pole tripping. 3.3.3 DEF blocking 1 scheme Refer to diagram LFZR100121001. There are two independent channel DEF blocking schemes available. These are similar to the two options available for the main scheme and difference in the current reversal guard logic. Both of the schemes include logic such that they can be used with simplex or duplex communication channels without the timer recommendations being effected. The Blocking 1 scheme operates by sending a signal to block the remote end from tripping. Signal Send is issued on operation of the reverse DEF element with no operation of the forward element. This prevents the remote relay from tripping for a fault outside the protected line section. The blocking signal is sent if the BASIC_EN signal is low. This is to ensure that the blocking signal is sent during a switch onto fault condition as the remote end may have been energised prior to the local end. The aided scheme logic will trip following the operation of the forward DEF element, provided the blocking signal has not been received. To ensure that the scheme does not operate for an external fault there is a settable time delay T PG before the trip is issued. The local signal send is incorporated into the local signal receive, to ensure consistent operation when the relay is used with a duplex channel. To stabilise the relay during a current reversal there is a settable delay on reset of the Signal Receive TDG. This ensures that the relay that detected the fault as forward before the reversal remains blocked until all elements have stabilised. The DEF channel-aided trip is gated with the phase selector to allow single pole tripping if appropriate. 3.3.4 DEF blocking 2 scheme Refer to diagram LFZR100122001. There are two independent channel DEF blocking schemes available. These are similar to the two options available for the main scheme. The main difference between the two blocking scheme is with regard to the current reversal guard logic. Both of the schemes include logic such that they can be used with simplex or duplex communication channels without the timer recommendations being effected. The independent channel Blocking 2 scheme is similar to the DEF logic within the main aided Blocking 2 scheme. The Blocking 2 scheme operates by sending a signal to block the remote end from tripping. Signal Send is issued on operation of the reverse DEF element with no operation of the forward element. This prevents the remote relay from tripping for a fault outside the protected line section. The blocking signal will be sent if the BASIC_EN signal is low. This ensures stability if the two ends of the scheme are energised sequentially.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
There is a settable delay on drop-off for the Signal Send TDG. This maintains the blocking signal following a current reversal to ensure that the remote end remains blocked until all elements have stabilised. The Signal Send is removed by Signal Stop which is issued under the following circumstances: Operation of the forward DEF element, provided the current reversal guard has elapsed. 100ms pulse issued following a basic scheme trip The Signal Stop can be independently mapped to a contact (SigStop2) if required by the communication equipment. The aided scheme logic will trip following the operation of the forward DEF element, provided the blocking signal has not been received. To ensure that the scheme does not operate for an external fault there is a settable time delay T PG before the trip is issued. The local signal send is incorporated into the local signal receive. This self block ensures consistent operation when the relay is used with a duplex channel. Unlike the Blocking 1 scheme the current reversal guard does not act as a delay on reset of the Signal Receive. To prevent a transient loss of the Signal Receive allowing a blocked relay to trip. A short delay is incorporated. Once Signal Receive has been energised for greater than 2ms it must reset for 5ms before the block is removed. The aided scheme trip is prevented from operating if the basic scheme has already tripped for the fault. 3.4 Output contact allocation The outputs of the scheme logic can be allocated to any output contact (with the exception of contact 29-31, which is always reserved for the Relay Inoperative Alarm). The same scheme logic output can be assigned to more than one output contact, although each contact can only have one signal assigned to it. Contact allocation is performed in software, and is controlled from the Contacts section of the Setting Group menu. Within this section the assignation for all available contacts for the particular relay type are indicated. Any contact (except for 29-31 as stated above) may be selected and programmed by the user to perform any function from the following list. OUTPUT ProtUnavailable Printer Fail TrAPh TrBPh TrCPh Tr3Ph TrAided TrAny TrDistDelay AlarmCBF DESCRIPTION Protection Unavailable Printer Fail Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Trip 3 Phase Channel-aided Trip Any Trip Trip Time-Delayed Distance Circuit Breaker Failure Alarm
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 31 of 76 Transfer Trip Trip Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent Trip Stub Bus Trip SOTF Trip on Reclose Trip Loss-of-Load Trip Zone 1 Trip Zone 1X Start Zone 1X Trip Zone 2 Start Zone 2 Trip Zone 3 Start Zone 3 Trip Zone 4 Start Zone 4 Trip DEF Instantaneous Trip DEF BackUp 1 Start DEF Backup 1 Trip DEF BackUp 2 Start DEF BackUp 2 Trip DEF IDMT Start DEF IDMT Trip Time-Delayed DEF Trip Channel-aided Distance Trip Channel-aided with Weak Infeed Trip Channel-aided Distance with Weak Infeed Trip Channel-aided DEF Trip Channel-aided DEF with Weak Infeed Fault involves Phase A Fault involves Phase B Fault involves Phase C Fault involves Neutral Any Start VTS Alarm PSB Alarm BAR SIGNAL SEND 1
TrTransfer TrInstOC TrStubBus TrSOTF TrTOR TrLOL TrZone1 TrZone1X StZone1X TrZone2 StZone2 TrZone3 StZone3 TrZone4 StZone4 TrDEFInst TrDEFBU1 StDEFBU1 TrDEFBU2 StDEFBU2 TrDEFIDMT StDEFIDMT TrDEFDelay TrDistAid TrWIAid TrWIDistAid TrDEFAid TrWIDEFAid FltAPh FltBPh FltCPh FltN AnyStart AlarmVTS AlarmPSB BAR SigSend1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 32 of 76 SIGNAL STOP 2 SIGNAL SEND 2 SIGNAL STOP 2 Zone 1 Phase A element Zone 1 Phase B element Zone 1 Phase C element Zone 1 Phases A-to-B element Zone 1 Phases B-to-C elements Zone 1 Phases C-to-A element Zone 2 Phase A element Zone 2 Phase B element Zone 2 Phase C element Zone 2 Phases A-to-B element Zone 2 Phases B-to-C elements Zone 2 Phases C-to-A element Zone 1 Zone 1X Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Time-Delayed Zone 4 Reverse element for aided schemes DEF Forward-looking element DEF Reverse-looking element
SigStop1 SigSend2 SigStop2 Z1_AN Z1_BN Z1_CN Z1_AB Z1_BC Z1_CA Z2_AN Z2_BN Z2_CN Z2_AB Z2_BC Z2_CA Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z4HS DEF_FWD DEF_REV
Table 1 Output Signals available for Contact Mapping
SECTION 4.
FAULT LOCATOR
All LFZR relays incorporate an integral single ended fault locator. The fault location algorithm was developed at Bath University and is designed to minimise errors in the fault location calculation. The distance to fault measurement is included within the fault record and can be displayed as a percentage of line, km, miles or reactive ohms. The fault locator function also provides other information that is included within the fault record: prefault and faulted voltages and currents, system frequency and fault duration. The fault location code runs within the relay host processor and as such is independent of the protection functions of the relay. It does however make use of some of the signals generated by the relay protective elements. 4.1 Acquisition of data The data that is required for the fault location to be calculated is captured by the main host software. The calibrated samples are taken from the protection
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
processor board and held within a buffer. When a fault occurs, and the relay protection elements either start or trip, the buffer continues to acquire 10 more cycles of data. The buffer contents, which include 10 cycles of data before the fault trigger point (first element operation) and 10 cycles of data after this, are passed to the fault location algorithm. This data also includes the status of the phase selector and the sample rate for each sample and the protection faulted phase flagging. The fault locator is then able to start the off-line fault analysis using this data. The host processor is now caple of capturing more data for any further faults. If these occur before the fault locator algorithm has completed for the first fault the data will be queued for analysis. 4.1.1 Placement of pre-fault and faulted windows The fault locator makes use of superimposed signals and as such requires a measurement of the pre-fault and faulted voltages and currents to be able to perform the distance to fault calculation. These are extracted using a Fourier Transform. The placement of the Fourier windows is critical to ensure correct calculation of superimposed signals and hence an accurate fault location calculation. The first stage in the positioning of the Fourier windows is the determination of the first breaker open position. For a single phase to ground fault only the faulted phase is examined for breaker open position. For a multi-phase fault all three phases are examined. The breaker open position is found by searching from the fault trigger point to the end of the record for the current level to fall below a minimum threshold for a set period of time as shown in Figure 10.
Current (A) Breaker Open Position
Zero current threshold
Zero current period
Time
Figure 10.
Breaker open position
If the first breaker open position is found within the 10 cycles of faulted data, the faulted Fourier window is placed such that the end of the window is half a cycle prior to the breaker open position. The aim is to place the faulted window as late as possible within the faulted data. At this point the fault transients should have decayed. For a developing fault, by measuring as late as possible within the fault data, the final fault condition can be measured. If the breaker open position cannot be found within the 10 cycles of post fault data, as would be the case for a time delayed trip or for a start condition, another method must be used. In this case the faulted window is positioned such that the start of the window is the fault trigger point. Once the faulted window has been placed, the status of the phase selector during the window is examined. The phase selection should remain constant during the window indicating a stable fault condition, which is suitable for
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
analysis. If there is a change in the status, the data is considered to be invalid and the fault location abandoned. All the outputs of the fault locator will be set to zero in this case. To place the pre-fault window it is necessary to determine the fault inception point. This is found by searching from the start of the record to find the first superimposed phase selector operation for the fault. The pre-fault window is then placed such that it is a whole number of cycles before the faulted window and the end of the window is before the fault inception point. The placement of the pre-fault and faulted Fourier windows is summarised below in Figure 11.
Fault position indicated by first bit change in phase selector status Fault trigger point First breaker open position
Voltage and current samples
Prefault window of 1 & 1/6 cycles of samples
Minimum prefault window margin
Faulted window margin Faulted window of 1 & 1/6 cycles of samples
Whole number of cycles of samples time
Figure 11 4.1.2
Placement of Pre-fault and Fault Windows
Fault duration A search is made for both the first breaker open position and the last breaker open position. If found the fault duration is included within the fault record, this is the time difference between the fault inception point and the last breaker open position. If the fault duration cannot be determined it will be displayed as -1s within the fault record.
4.1.3
System frequency The system frequency is determined from the average sample rate which is passed to the fault location algorithm. This is based on the assumption that the sample rate is synchronised to the power system frequency by the frequency tracking algorithm (see Appendix A).
4.1.4
Extraction of phasor quantities Once the prefault and fault windows have been optimally positioned within the 20 cycles of data, the prefault and fault phasors are extracted using a method based on the 1 cycle discrete Fourier Transform method. This produces the real (cosine) and imaginary (sine) term of the fundamental power system frequency with respect to a fixed reference. The real (cosine) component is obtained using a standard 1 cycle Fourier
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
transform by multiplying a set of 36 samples by a cosine wave of Fourier coefficients and summing the results. The sine term can be calculated in the same way by multiplying each sample over the same range by a sine coefficient. However an alternative method is used in which the sine term is derived from two cosine terms. This method of obtaining the imaginary component provides maximum rejection of any DC exponential component. The sine term is calculated using two cosine terms derived from windows 60 apart, one 30 before the real term window and the second 30 after this window as illustrated in Figure 12. Using standard double angle formulae the sine term can be derived from the two cosine terms
i) Samples 42 samples (1 & 1/6 cycles) x(1) x(4) x(36) x(39) x(42) ii) Samples used to derive the cosine term 36 samples (1cycle) x(n)
x(7)
iii) Samples used to derive the Sine term 36 samples (1cycle)

x(n - 3)
36 samples (1cycle)
x(n + 3)
Where n = 4 & x(1) = first sample of prefault or postfault window of samples
time
Figure 12. 4.2
Derivation of cosine and sine terms
Fault location algorithm The position of the fault along the line is determined by assuming a fault position and calculating the fault impedance at the assumed fault point. This technique is applied at fault positions along the line. At the correct fault point the impedance calculated should be purely resistive.
4.2.1
Basic single phase method The method employs a superimposed model with a generator at the fault point as illustrated in Figure 13. Prefault and fault voltages and currents are found for the local terminal as described above. These signals are used to derive the superimposed voltage and current (DV and DI) which are then used by the superimposed model. The use of superimposed quantities prevents the fault location being affected by load. The transmission line impedance (ZL) and the pre-fault voltage at the fault point (Vpre) are known. The impedance of the remote source (ZSR) is assumed. This leaves the unknowns as the fault position (n) and the fault impedance (Zf). The
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
correct fault position is found by moving an assumed position along the line until the fault impedance becomes purely real; ie. resistive.
Remote Local I V ZL ZSR
Zf Vpre n'
Figure 13
Superimposed model
The angle of the fault impedance is calculated for assumed fault positions along the line, a typical graph of this is shown in Figure 14.
Zf
n'
Figure 14.
Angle of fault impedance against assumed fault position
The technique described above is for a single phase line model. This method can equally be applied to a three phase system. To analyse the three phase system a distributed 2 port matrix method is used. This model includes the capacitive susceptance of the transmission line. Applying the algorithm to a three phase model adds a further unknown parameter - that of the specific fault type. The next two sections describe how the fault type is determined; the first section describes how the faulted phases are found, the second describes how the precise nature of the fault impedance network is found. 4.2.2 Phase selection The first stage of the analysis to determine the correct fault type is to determine the phases that are faulted. The fault locator incorporates its own phase selection techniques and does not utilise the protection phase selector.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 37 of 76 Using the single phase analysis defined above, the fault admittance (the inverse of the fault impedance) is calculated for each phase for several assumed fault positions along the line. The average fault admittance value is then calculated for each phase. The largest average fault admittance value of the three phases is taken as a reference and the other two phases expressed as a proportion of this value. Taking the largest average fault admittance as faulted any other phases for which the calculated average fault admittance is greater than a set proportion of the largest is deemed to be faulted, other phases are unfaulted.
The faulted phases are determined using the following method: 1.
2.
3.
The above phase selection technique is based on the principle that any faulted phase should have a finite fault admittance. For unfaulted phases the fault admittance should be zero. This technique allows the faulted phases to be determined. For multi-phase faults it is also necessary to determine the precise nature of the fault point network connections. 4.2.3 Fault type identification In the case of a multi-phase fault even if the faulted phases have been determined there may be several possible fault impedance networks. An example of this is the two phase to ground fault where two possible fault connections are shown in Figure 15.
b Zbc c Zcg Zbg Zcg
Option 1
Figure 15
Option 2
Two phase to ground fault networks
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
For multi-phase faults there is more than one fault network that can be used to determine the fault location. The fault locator takes each possible fault impedance network in turn and calculates the distance to fault based on each admittance quantity within that fault network. The correct fault impedance network is deemed to be the one where the fault location found for each branch of the network correlates. This effect is shown graphically below in Figure 16.
b Zbc c Zcg
c Zbg Zcg
Zbc
Zbg
Zcg
Zcg
Figure 16.
Correlation of fault location for correct network
The correct fault impedance network is that where the two fault locations correlate. The final fault location is the average of these two values. 4.3 Fault locator settings The fault locator requires several settings to perform the distance to fault calculation: Length of Line (in selected units either miles or km) Line Impedance - positive sequence impedance of the protected line section (ohms). Line Residual - ground fault return impedance for the protected line section. This is set using the same method as the distance elements calculated from the positive and zero sequence line parameters:
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Line Residual = (ohms) Where: Z0 is the line zero sequence impedance Z1 is the line positive sequence impedance Susceptance B1 - Line Positive Sequence capacitive susceptance (mhos) Susceptance B0 - Line Zero Sequence capacitive susceptance (mhos) The two capacitive susceptance settings should be set to the correct values if these are known. If the correct values are not known it is preferable to set these settings low rather than high. 4.4 Fault locator output The fault locator will only produce a distance to fault output if the determined fault location is within a specific range. An output is produced if the distance to fault is up to 112.5% of reach setting in front of the relay or 12.5% of the line behind the relay. If the fault location is outside this range the distance to fault will be indicated as external in the following way: Reverse Fault Foward Fault -1000 (whichever unit is selected,) 1000 (whichever unit is selected)
The other measured data contained within the fault record will contain valid values in this case. Although the fault locator will produce an output for faults 12.5% outside the protected line section, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed as the infeeds at the buses may affect the validity of the model. If the breaker open position cannot be found within the 10 cycles of faulted data then a value of -1s will be indicated for the fault duration within the fault record. The other fault locator data within the record will be valid unless indicated by another error output. If an error is detected when the fault locator is attempting to place the pre-fault and faulted Fourier windows all fault locator data within the fault record will be set to zero. In addition to the fault location and duration, the fault record indicates the system frequency, the pre-fault and faulted rms voltages and currents, and the relaying point. All the displayed phasor values are with respect to the pre-fault positive sequence voltage.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 5.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The LFZR100 Series relays perform a variety of tasks: Distance protection using user-selected scheme logic. Fault location. Disturbance recording. Interaction with the user, either locally by means of the front panel or remotely by means of the Courier serial interface language. Time tagging. Self-checking. This section describes the hardware and software items which perform these tasks together. Protection functions are all performed on the Protection Processor Board; other functions (including fault location and disturbance recording) are carried out on the Host Processor Board. Figure 17 shows the interactions between the boards, and their relationship to other parts of the system.
Protection and scheme decisions Protection processor board Commissioning commands Settings Acknowledgments to commands and settings Host processor board
Opto inputs Analogue inputs
Relay outputs
K-Bus IEC 60870
IRIG-B time Key pad
Parallel print LCD LED
Figure 17. Interactions between Protection Processor Board and Host Processor Board The hardware interconnection used to implement the above system is shown in Figure 20.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.1
Protection processor board The flow of information on the Protection Processor Board is shown in Figure 18.
Analogue inputs
Digital signal processor
Protection decisions Settings Scheme logic processor
Protection and scheme decisions Commissioning commands Settings Opto inputs Relay outputs
Protection decisions
Scheme decisions
Scheme logic Settings co-processor
Figure 18. 5.1.1
Protection processor board information flow.
Normal operation Raw sample data from the Analogue Input Module is collected at 72 samples per cycle (synchronised to the system frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz) by the Digital Signal Processor (DSP), and adjusted according to constants stored in the Analogue Input Module. The sample rate of the Analogue Input Module is then set according to a frequency tracking algorithm run on the sampled data, so that small changes in frequency can be tracked by the relay. The filtered data is then used in the distance protection algorithms, using either mho or quadrilateral characteristics to produce decisions about the zone involved. In addition, the DSP calculates DEF decisions and voltage and current level detectors. The phases involved are determined by a superimposed current phase selection algorithm. The protection decisions are finally passed to the Scheme Logic Processor. The Scheme Logic Processor (SLP) collects the state of the optically isolated inputs and passes these, along with the protection decisions, to the Scheme Logic Co-Processor (SLCP), which then evaluates the scheme logic according to these inputs and the state of the scheme timers to produce the scheme outputs. The scheme outputs are mapped to the contacts by the SLCP, and then routed via the SLP to the output contacts. The SLP also routes scheme outputs to the Host Processor for event logging and the disturbance recorder. Some outputs are fed back to the DSP for use by the protection algorithms. The role of the SLP is to manage the initialisation of the Protection Processor Board, to conduct ongoing status checks on the code and data stored therein, to route data as previously described, and to manage the operation of the protection during commissioning tests.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
In order to maintain the highest possible performance of the protection processor board, the Digital Signal Processor loop is only interrupted by the Analogue Input Module, the Scheme Logic Co-Processor runs uninterrupted except for notification of new protection data by the SLP, and protection functions have the highest priority on the Scheme Logic Processor. 5.1.2 Hardware description The Digital Signal Processor is a high speed floating-point device, capable of 25 million instructions per second. Its program code and data are stored in high speed RAM, to allow the device to run at full speed. The Scheme Logic Co-Processor is a high-speed fixed point digital signal processor, capable of 32 million instructions per second. Program code and data are stored in the RAM built into the device. The Scheme Logic Processor is a 32-bit microcontroller, running at 25MHz. Its program code is stored in Flash EPROM devices, along with the program code for both digital signal processors, which is downloaded to them on initialisation, as described in the next section. Data is stored in high-speed RAM. The SLP and DSP communicate by means of a dual-port RAM device, allowing both devices to use the memory simultaneously. The Internal Communications Bus is connected to the SLP side of the dual-port RAM, so that the Host Processor can also access this data. Access to the device is managed by a sequence of interrupt requests. 5.1.3 Initialisation During initialisation, the SLP checks its own code and then downloads code into the program memory for the DSP before starting it. The DSP then runs a set of tests on itself and the Analogue Input Module, reporting the status of any failures to the SLP. When these tests are successfully completed, the SLP downloads code to the SLCP, and the protection is then ready, at which point the Host Processor is informed, and the Protection Available LED on the Front Panel is lit. Initialisation is handled by a special program which also permits the transfer of replacement code to the board. 5.1.4 Self-checking The DSP continually checksums its code as a part of its loop. In addition, data passed between the SLP and the DSP is checksummed on both sides, providing data integrity checking. The SLP checksums its code and checks the data passed to it by the Host Processor. It also performs a continuous check on the settings stored on the Protection Processor Board. The SLCP maintains a heartbeat, which it continually updates as long as it is running correctly. The SLP checks the state of this heartbeat on a regular basis, and ceases protection if it is not present. 5.1.5 Operating systems The DSP and SLCP do not use operating systems; they run in interrupt-driven loops. The Scheme Logic Processor runs under the control of the Enea Data OSE operating system, which schedules the various tasks performed by the processor. This simplifies the communications with the Host Processor, which also runs under the control of OSE.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.2
Host processor board The flow of information on the Host Processor Board is shown in Figure 19.
Protection and scheme decisions
Commissioning commands Settings Acknowledgements to commands and settings
Host processor
Parallel print LCD/LED Key pad Relay outputs
Courier communications Serial communications processor K-Bus Courier IEC 60870
Figure 19. 5.2.1
Host processor board information flow.
Normal operation Interactions with the user of the relay are conducted either by means of the front panel LCD and keypad, or by the Courier communications ports (either IEC 60870 serial communications or K-bus). The user may view relay information, alter or view protection and other settings, request printing of settings, fault records, or event records and (via Courier only) upload disturbance records. Disturbance record data is collected under the control of the Protection Processor Board, which informs the Host Processor when data is ready to be collected. The Host Processor software collects this information and filters it to avoid aliasing effects, adds the scheme logic outputs to it, and stores the resulting data in a queue. When a fault is detected, the queue is frozen, and another queue contains the post-fault data. When the record is complete, it is stored in RAM, ready to be uploaded from the relay. The queues are reset, and data collection continues. The data is also used to provide metering information, visible via the front panel LCD or via Courier communications links. In addition, when a fault occurs, the Host Processor logs changes of contacts, and maintains the state of the Alarm and Trip LEDs. It also controls the Protection Available LED according to an output from the Protection Processor Board. The fault locator is run, and a fault record is stored in non-volatile memory, containing all information relating to the fault. If the default display is showing on the front panel LCD, it is replaced with a report on the fault, which displays the information stored in the most recent fault record. The user may also view any fault record or event record on the front panel LCD by selecting it from the menu system. The Host processor can log events for the following reasons: state changes of the opto inputs, output contacts, protection elements, changes of setting group,
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
change of time source (between the built-in real time clock and the external IRIG-B time input) and for self test errors. All events, faults, and disturbances are time tagged to an accuracy of 1ms by the Host Processor. Time is maintained by a real time clock with battery backup or by means of an external IRIG-B connection, if the sub-station provides this facility. Courier communications are managed at a low level by the Serial Communications Module (SCM). This microcontroller controls the media used by Courier communications: the K-bus port and the serial communications ports. The Host Processor never interferes with protection functions unless directly commanded to do so by the operator, and event recording, fault recording and disturbance recording take precedence over user interaction. 5.2.2 Hardware description The Host Processor is the same type of 32-bit microcontroller as the SLP, capable of 25 million instructions per second. Flash EPROM devices are used to store program code, the event log, and settings; a large amount of RAM provides storage for disturbance records as well as a workspace for the processor. A time reference is provided by a battery-backed up real time clock. The IRIGB port is a BNC connector that carries serial IRIG-B format data from an external clock for automatic setting and synchronization of the relays calendar clock. The port is isolated to 2.5kV. The Serial Communications Module contains a 16-bit microcontroller which manages a dual serial communications controller. The code for this processor is run from RAM, and is downloaded by the Host Processor during initialisation. Non-Courier serial communications are handled by a separate communications controller, which is driven directly by the Host Processor. 5.2.3 Initialisation When the Host Processor starts, it must first initialise the large banks of RAM which it uses. It then performs self-checks before starting the operating system. During the operating system boot process, the SCM code is loaded into the SCM processor. The Host Processor software is then ready, subject to the correct initialisation of the Protection Processor Board. Initialisation is handled by a special program which also permits the transfer of replacement code to the board. 5.2.4 Self-checking The Host simply performs a self-check during initialisation. If the processor loses control, a built-in watchdog causes it to reset. Communications with the Protection Processor Board are checksummed, and the state of the Protection Processor Board is continually monitored by means of a heartbeat mechanism, similar to that used to check the status of the SLCP on the Protection Processor Board. Setting groups are checksummed when they are stored in non-volatile memory. 5.2.5 Operating systems The Host Processor runs under the control of the Enea Data OSE operating system, which schedules the various tasks performed by the processor. The SCM processor runs in an interrupt-driven loop. No operating system is
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
used. 5.3 5.3.1 Protection input and output Analogue input module The analogue input module performs the task of analogue signal data acquisition and converts these signals into digital form for analysis by the DSP on the Protection Processor board. The analogue input module consists of the measurement VTs and CTs plus the analogue board holding the Analogue-to-Digital converter (ADC). The inputs to the module are the three phase voltages, the three phase currents and the neutral current. A spare voltage and a spare current channel are also available. The signals from the input transformers are filtered and fed into two differential multiplexers, the first of which is for the voltage signals, and also takes in a scaling check voltage for the ADC. The second multiplexer is for the current signals. The multiplexer outputs are fed to instrumentation amplifiers which are connected to the left and right channels of a stereo 16 bit ADC. Control logic allows the analogue input module to operate automatically with minimum intervention from the DSP on the protection processor board. Calibration information is stored in an EEPROM in the Analogue Input Module. This data is write-protected after calibration, so that it cannot be overwritten. In addition to calibration data, the EEPROM also identifies the nominal input current of the Analogue Input Module (1A or 5A). The scaling check voltage (part of the self-checking mechanism) is used to check that data is being acquired correctly and that the accuracy of the acquisition is acceptable. 5.3.2 Output relays and optically isolated inputs The output relay boards have eight output relays each; the types of contact available vary according to which of four different types of board are fitted: Part 001: Part 002: Part 003: Part 004: Eight normally open output contacts (standard version). As Part 001, but contact RL1 is replaced by a normally closed contact for the Relay Inoperative Alarm (RIA). As Part 001, but contact RL7 is replaced by a normally closed contact. As Part 002, but contacts RL6 and RL7 are replaced by normally closed contacts.
The optical isolator boards provide isolation between the external digital inputs and the internal circuitry of the relay. Each board provides seven separate optically isolated inputs. There are two versions of the board to be used on different auxiliary voltages: 50V (part 001) and 110V (part 002); the 110V version can also be used in conjunction with an external resistor box on a 220V system. All the opto-isolator circuits will operate when 80% of the minimum rated voltage is applied. Individual optical isolator boards and relay boards are given a unique address which is set up using a jumper arrangement. Note that replacement input and output boards must have the same part number as the board being replaced, and the jumper setting of the replacement board must be identical to that of the replaced board.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.4 5.4.1
User interface Local interface A keypad and LCD provide the local user interface. The keypad has a cruciform arrangement for moving the cursor around the screen. There are also four keys under the LCD: their functions are displayed at the bottom of the LCD and vary according to the current menu page. The LCD is a super-twist type, which is readable from most viewing angles. Display contrast is improved by the built-in backlight, which lights whenever a key is pressed, and then stays on for a set time. Basic status information is provided by five LEDs to the right of the LCD: TRIP ALARM PROTECTION AVAILABLE RELAY HEALTHY POWER Two communication ports are provided on the front panel; a serial port and a parallel port. The serial port is a standard 25-way D connector for RS232 communications. The serial port can be configured as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or as Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE) through the menu. The parallel port is a Centronics printer port. Scheme logic test points can also be accessed through this port if the printer is not connected.
5.4.2
Remote interface The remote interface is provided by means of the Courier communications media - either an IEC 60870 serial communications link or the K-Bus network. The K-Bus port is a three terminal connection to a K-Bus network. The two signal terminals are isolated to 2.5kV; the third terminal has no connection to the relay and is provided for maintaining continuity of the cable screen. The RS232 interface allows permanent connection for communication with a remote PC. The port is a 25 way female D connector wired as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and isolated to 1.25kV.
5.5 5.5.1
System infrastructure Power supply unit The power supply takes the auxiliary DC input and provides power for the digital circuits, the auxiliary relay boards, and the analogue input circuit. An efficient switched mode power supply is employed which provides isolation between the inputs and secondary outputs. The power supply is a development of the proven Optimho 100 power supply but provides a greater power output. The power rails provided are as follows: Four +5V supplies for the digital circuits. One +12V supply for the output relay boards. One +12V and -12V supply for the analogue input module. These rails are separated in order to minimise inter-circuit noise. Failure of any of the +5V supplies causes the POWER LED on the front panel to go out.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
There are three versions of the power supply, catering for the common ranges of auxiliary voltages: 37.5 - 60V DC, 87.5 - 137.5V DC, and 175 - 275V DC. 5.5.2 Internal communications bus The boards within the relay communicate with each other via a customdesigned bus, which gives equal priority to both processor boards within the relay and appears as an extension of the processors own bus. It is split into two physical parts due to the differing nature of the signals between the processor boards and the input/output boards. The processor boards are connected via an 8 layer backplane, which implements a 16-bit data bus. The input/output boards use a ribbon cable running along the front of the relay which provides an 8-bit data bus. The two halves of the communication system are joined by a buffer board, which ensures that the input/output boards and ribbon cable do not affect the high-speed communication between the processor boards. Communications between the processor boards are checked in software (see the description of self-checking for each processor board). Communications with the input/output boards and the front panel are checked by a hardware error detection scheme. 5.6 Mechanical layout See Figure 21. The case materials are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium/zinc. This provides for good earthing at all joints giving low impedance paths to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The case layout is such that input/output areas are separated from the quiet area Processing Section. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise, ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips to ground module metalwork. Standard Midos terminal blocks are used for connections to the opto inputs, relay outputs and analogue input, 25 way female D type and Beau connectors for communicatiion ports, BNC connection for the IRIG-B input and a Beau connector for the power supply input. The front panel constitutes a membrane keypad with tactile metal dome keys mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
'K' Bus
IRIGB Serial port B
Communication module
Back plane
Host processor Serial comms processor Digital signal processor
Protection processor
Buffer board Host processor board Protection processor board
Power supply
Analogue board
16 bit ADC 72 samples/cycle
Volage & current transformers Output contacts 240 x 64 pixel LCD Va Vb Vc Ia Ib Ic In Im/Ipol Vcs
Optically isolated inputs
ENT
Front panel
Indicator LEDs
Serial port A
Parallel printer
Figure 20.
Block diagram of relay
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Address jumpers are fitted to JM1 as shown

1 1 1 1 1 1
Processing section
Host Processor
Spare Processor Slot

Optically isolated inputs 1 Optically isolated inputs 2
Protection Processor
Output Contacts 4 Output Contacts 3 Output Contacts 2 Output Contacts 1
Buffer Board
Input/Output
Analogue Input Module
Power supply
Figure 21.
Mechanical Layout
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 6.
6.1
TECHNICAL DATA
Input ratings AC Voltage Vn : AC Current In : Frequency fn: Operative Freq. Range: Range For Accuracy: DC Supply Vx1: Relay power supply (separate relay versions) Vx 48/54V 110/125V 220/250V DC Supply Vx2: Opto Input Supply (separate relay versions) Vx 48/54V 110/125V Operative Range 37.5/60V 87.5/137.5V Maximum Withstand 64.8V 150V Operative Range 37.5/60V 87.5/137.5V 175/275V Maximum Withstand 64.8V 150V 300V 100V to 120V rms phase-phase 1A or 5A rms per phase (separate relay versions) 50Hz or 60Hz (relay setting) 41 to 55Hz or 51 to 65Hz 47 to 51Hz or 56.4 to 61.2Hz
An external component box is required, in conjunction with the 100/125V version, for 200/250V operation. Protective Fuse Rating: 6A maximum, Red Spot or equivalent for VTs and auxiliary supplies
6.2
Maximum overload ratings AC Voltage: 180V rms continuous withstand 300V rms withstand for 10s AC Current: 2.4A continuous withstand (In = 1A) 12A continuous withstand (In = 5A) 100A withstand for 1s (In = 1A) 400A withstand for 1s (In = 5A)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 51 of 76 0.04VA per phase at 1A (In = 1A) 0.2VA per phase at 5A (In = 5A)
6.3
Burdens AC Current circuits:
AC Voltage circuits: DC Supply Vx1:
0.01VA per phase at 63.5V 30W under healthy live line conditions (all models and all supply ratings over full voltage range.) 52W maximum (LFZR111 with all output contacts operated) 41W maximum (LFZR112 and LFZR113 with all output contacts operated)
DC Supply Vx2
10mA per opto input (maximum for all ratings over full voltage range)
6.4 6.4.1
Distance elements Setting ranges Range of positive sequence settings in secondary values. These settings are applicable to Zone 1, Zone 1X (optionally forward or reverse), Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4. The Zone 3 offset can be set over the same range, this offset can be in either the forward or the reverse direction. Phase-phase reach Phase-ground reach Quadrilateral resistance blinders Load blinders (foward and reverse) 0.025 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.005 to 50 (In = 5A) 0.025 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.005 to 50 (In = 5A) 0.1 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.02 to 50 (In = 5A) 0.1 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.02 to 50 (In = 5A) Characteristic Angle Setting (This can be set globally or independently for each zone) Memory polarised mho Directional offset mho Residual Compensation (This can be set globally or independently for each zone) Global Setting Independent Residual Reach Setting 0 to 4 (multiplier on ground reach) 0.0 to 1000 (In = 1A) 0.0 to 200 (In = 5A) 45 to 85 step 0.1 20 to 85 step 0.1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Residual Angle Setting (This may be set globally or independently for each zone) Memory polarised mho Directional offset mho Distance zone time delays: Instantaneous trip delay Zone 1X timer Zone 2 timer Zone 3 timer Zone 4 timer 6.4.2 0 to 1s 0 to 10s 0 to 10s 0 to 10s 0 to 10s 45 to 85 step 0.1 -45 to 85 step 0.1
Accuracy of Distance Elements (Up to SIR 30) Mho On angle reach : Load Blinder Resistance: Quad Resistance: Quad reactance line: 5% of setting. 5% of setting. 10% of setting. 3 2, Under single pole dead conditions 7 2. Mho Characteristic angle: 2
6.4.3
Current sensitivity Zone Sensitivities: 7% of setting
6.4.4
Timers Instantaneous trip delay: Zones 1X, 2, 3, 4: DEF INST: DEF Backup1: DEF Backup2: Delay timers: 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater 1% of setting or 3ms whichever is the greater
6.4.5
Operate and reset times Operate times: Mho characteristic: Quad characteristic Reset times: Typical relay operate times for Zone 1 are shown in Figures 22 to 41 < 1 cycle up to 80% reach. (Up to SIR 30) < 1 cycle up to 80% reach (Up to SIR 30) < 29ms up to 80% reach (Up to SIR 30)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Operating Time [ms]
30 25
Me
20 15 10 5 0
Maximum
Minimum
Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 =1
70
75
an
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 22.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
30 Operating Time [ms] 25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 =1
Maximum
Minimum
70
75
Me
an
80 85 90 Reach [%]
Figure 23. (60Hz).
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Maximum
Mean
Minimum
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 24.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
Operating Time [ms]
30 25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 =1
Ma
xim
um
Mean
Minimum
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 25.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Operating Time [ms]
im ax
um
Mean
Minimum
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 26. Self Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
Operating Time [ms]

um xim Ma
Mean
Minimum
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 27.
Self Polarised Zone 1 at SIR1 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
40
Operating Time [ms]
30 25 20 15
Me
an
Minimum
10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 70 = 60
75
Ma
80 85 90 Reach [%]
35
Figure 28. (60Hz).
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
Operating Time [ms]
30 25 20 15 10 5 0
Minimum
Maximum
Me
an
Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 70
= 60
75
xim
um
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 29. (60Hz). Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
70 Operating Time [ms] 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 Source impedance Relay setting 20 40 50 60 = 60 70 75 80 85 90
Max
imu
n Mea um Minim
Reach [%]
Figure 30.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-N with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
Operating Time [ms]
35 30 25 20 15 10 5
0
Me
an
Maximum
Minimu
Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 = 60 70 75 80 85 90
Reach [%]
Figure 31. (60Hz).
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph with Blinders and Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
45 40
Operating Time [ms]
25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 70 = 60
Ma
Mean
30
Minimum
75
xim um
80 85 90 Reach [%]
Maximum
Me an
35
Figure 32.
Self Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 60 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
Operating Time [ms]
30 25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 70 = 60
Minimum
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 33. Self Polarised Zone 1 at SIR60 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (60Hz).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
30 Operating Time [ms]

an
25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 =1
Maximum
Minimum
70
75
Me
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 34.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 1 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals (50Hz)
Maximum
Minimum
Me
an
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 35. (50Hz)
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 1 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
30
Me an
Operating Time [ms]
25 20 15 10 5 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 =1

Maximum
Minimu
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 36.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 1 Ph-N with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (50Hz)

Maximum
Me
an
Minimum
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 37.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 1 Ph-Ph with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (50Hz)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
60 Operating Time [ms] 50 40 30 20 10 0 Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60 = 60

um axim M n Mea
im Min um
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 38. (50Hz)
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 60 Ph-N without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
Operating Time [ms]
35 30 25 20 15 10 5
0
Maxim
Minimum
Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60
um
Me
an
= 60
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 39. (50Hz)
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 60 Ph-Ph without Blinders or Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
40 Operating Time [ms] 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 20
um Maxim
Minimum
Source impedance Relay setting 40 50 60 = 60
Mean
70
75
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 40.
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 60 Ph-N with Blinders and Quadrilaterals (50Hz)
30 Operating Time [ms]
20 15 10 5 0
Maximum Minimum
Source impedance Relay setting 0 20 40 50 60
= 60
70
75
Me
an
25
80
85
90
Reach [%]
Figure 41. (50Hz)
Memory Polarised Zone 1 at SIR 60 Ph-Ph with Blinders and Quadrilaterals
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 63 of 76 60ms 100ms to 500ms
6.5
Tripping Logic Trip reset delay Breaker fail delay
6.6
Block auto-reclose The relay will always issue an auto-reclose block under the following conditions: Zone 3 time delayed trip Zone 4 time delayed trip Channel out of service DEF delayed trip Switch onto fault A block can be optionally issued for the following conditions: Zone 1X time delayed trip Zone 2 time delayed trip Instantaneous 2 or 3 phase fault Instantaneous 3 phase fault DEF Aided trip DEF Instantaneous trip
6.7
Aided schemes The distance aided schemes are supported by all versions of the relay. Where applicable a shared channel DEF scheme is also available. The LFZR111 and LFZR112 allow an independent channel DEF scheme to be selected. Distance Scheme Options Zone 1 Extension Permissive Underreach Permissive Overreach 1 Permissive Overreach 2 Permissive Overreach 2 (Weak Infeed trip) Blocking 1 Blocking 2 Note: All permissive schemes allow the unblocking logic options to be selected. DEF Scheme Options Shared Channel Permissive Overreach Permissive Overreach (Weak Infeed trip) Blocking 1 Blocking 2 Note: Unblocking logic can be selected for the permissive schemes.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 64 of 76 Delay on Pickup (TP) Delay on Reset (TD) Unblocking logic timer (TDW) Weak infeed voltage level detector (3V0) 0 to 100ms step 1ms 0 to 100ms step 1ms 0 to 100ms step 1ms 3V to 20V step 1V
Aided scheme timers:
6.8
Switch on to fault and trip on close Switch onto Fault (SOTF) is enabled after all poles have been dead for 110s (1%). SOTF remains active for 512ms (1%) after all poles become live. SOTF tripping elements: Zones 1 2 3 and Level Detectors Zones 1 2 3 Zones 1 2 and Level Detectors Zone 1 and Level Detectors The level detector operation is based on operation of a phase current level detector for 20ms without the operation of the corresponding voltage level detector. Voltage level detector Current level detector SOTF operating time:44.5V (70%Vn) 0.05 In < 20ms (Up to SIR 30) < 35ms for A-B-C faults when controlled by current and voltage level detectors.
Trip on reclose (TOR) is enabled after any pole has been dead for 200ms (1%). TOR remains active for 512ms (1%) after all poles become live. It is possible to select either the standard scheme logic or the TOR logic to be active during this time. If the TOR logic is selected the same options as for the SOTF feature are available. TOR operating time < 20ms (Up to SIR 30) < 35ms for A-B-C faults when controlled by current and voltage level detectors.
6.9
Voltage transformer supervision The VTS function can be set to block tripping or for indication only. Time to Alarm Voltage level detector (3V0) Current level detector (3I0) 5s 1% 28V (45%Vn) 0.05In or 10% largest phase to phase (see Section 2.5.7 for bias characteristic)
The operation of VTS does not affect the ability of the relay to trip for via Instantaneous Overcurrent, or non-directional earth fault protection. The VTS feature does not affect the performance or sensitivity of the relay under normal operating conditions.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.10
Power swing blocking Blocking can be selected for each zone independently. The time for which zones are blocked can be limited to 2s 1%.
6.11
Current transformer requirements For Class X current transformers: Vk IF * (1+X/R) * (RB+RCT+RL) where: Vk = CT knee point voltage
IF = maximum secondary fault current at the zone 1 reach point

X/R = the ratio of the primary system RB = the relay burden RCT = the CT secondary winding resistance RL = the resistance of the cable connecting the CTs to the relay (lead and return for ground faults, lead only for phase faults) 6.12 Directional earth fault protection
6.12.1 DEF element DEF has a forward and reverse measuring element Characteristic angle setting Polarising or Forward element: Current sensitivity (3I0) Voltage sensitivity (3V0) or (3V2) Reverse element: Current sensitivity (3I0) Voltage sensitivity (3V0) or (3V2) 0.05In to 1.2In 0.7V (fixed) 0.05In to 1.2In 1.0V (fixed) 10 to 80 step 1 Zero Sequence (Heathy phase) Negative sequence
If negative sequence polarising is selected then both the forward and reverse elements are also subject to a 0.05In threshold on I2. Directional line accuracy Sensitivity 6.12.2 DEF instantaneous Instantaneous element sensitivity Instantaneous directional Operating time 0.2In to 30In Foward/non-directional <1 Cycle 4 when Zero sequence polarised 8 when negative sequence polarised 7% for current, 15% for voltage
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.12.3 DEF definite time backup There are two independently settable definite time back up elements. Each of these has the same setting options: Back up element sensitivity Back up element directional Back up element timer 6.12.4 DEF IDMT It is possible to select one of the following eight curves: IEC: 0.2In to 30In Forward/reverse/non-directional 0 to 10s 1%
Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse
t = TMS t = TMS t = TMS
0.14 M0.02 - 1 13.5 M-1 80 M2 - 1 0.14 M-1
definite M>30 definite M>30 definite M>20
Long Time Inverse
t = TMS
definite M>20
US: 0.103 M0.02 - 1 59.5 M2 - 1 39.22 M2 - 1 56.4 M2 - 1
Moderately Inverse Inverse Very Inverse
t = TMS t = TMS t = TMS
0.228 + 1.8 + 0.982 +
Extremely Inverse
t = TMS
0.243 +
The factor M is the current multiple 3I0/Iset Base setting (Iset) Time multiplier setting (TMS) IDMT directional Operating time: Reset timer: 0.05In to 1.2In 0.025 to 1.0 Forward/reverse/non-directional 5% of expected (20ms minimum) 2 to 32Is all curves. 1% of setting.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 67 of 76 50mA 5mA
Minimum pickup current
For 1.05 to 1.2 Is operating times decrease with fault current for all curves. Definite time characteristics operating times remain the same or quicker with increase in fault current.
1000.0000
100.0000
Operating time (s)
10.0000 Curve 4
Curve 1
1.0000 Curve 2
Curve 3
0.1000 1.0000
10.0000 Current (Multiples of Is)
100.0000
Figure 42.
IEC characteristics (TMS=1)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
1000.0000
100.0000
Operating time (s)
10.0000
Curve 6 Curve 5 Curve 7
1.0000
Curve 8
0.1000 1.0000
100.0000
Figure 43. 6.13
American characteristics (TMS=1)
Loss of load LoL phase current level detectors 0.05In to 1In
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.14
Instantaneous overcurrent The high set phase current level detectors can be used to provide either instantaneous tripping or stub bus protection. Phase current level detectors Operating time 0.2In to 20In <0.7 cycle (for fault currents > twice setting)
6.15
Fault location Settings: Line Impedance Line Angle Line Residual Residual Angle 0.025 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.005 to 50 (In = 5A) 20 to 85 0.025 to 250 (In = 1A) 0.005 to 50 (In = 5A) -45 to 85 If the global settings have been used to set the line angle and residual compensation for ground faults then these global settings are also applied to the fault locator settings. Line susceptance B1 Line susceptance B0 Accuracy: 10nmho to 10mho (In = 1A) 50nmho to 10mho (In = 5A) 10nmho to 10mho (In = 1A) 50nmho to 10mho (In = 5A) Typically 2% of line length for fault currents greater than 2In.
6.16
Instrumentation Accuracy: Voltage and Current 1% of nominal value or 1% of measured value whichever is the greater 2% of nominal value or 2% measured value whichever is the greater 1 0.1Hz
Power and VAR
Phase angles Frequency
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.17
Disturbance recorder The number of records stored by the relay depends on the size of record selected and the size of memory (4Mb or 8Mb). Settings Prefault duration Post-fault duration Samples per cycle 100ms to 500ms step 100ms 100ms to 5s step 100ms 12 or 36
6.18
Calendar clock Accuracy (IRIG-B synchronised): Accuracy (not synchronised): 1ms 1s per day (approximately).
6.19
Output contacts LFZR111: LFZR112/3: Watchdog relays: Contact Ratings: 31 Single make (option 4 single break) 15 Single make (option 2 single break) 1 Single break Make 30A and carry for 0.2s Carry 5A continuous Break DC 50W resistive 25W inductive (L/R =0.04s) AC Durability Loaded Contact Unloaded Contact 10,000 operations minimum 100,000 operations minimum 1250 VA Subject to maxima of 5A and 300V
6.20
Dimensions Dimensions: (w x h x d) Weight: 411 x 177 x 338mm (see Figures 44a and 44b) 18kg (approximately)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

32.00 306.00 10.00
414.00 (with cover fitted)
177.00 (4U Nom) 10.00 Front view (cover removed)
157.00
Side view
Communications
29 57 85
T.B.
T.B.
T.B.
84
T.B.
112
T.B.
28
56
Input/ Output Backplane buffer
Processing AC input
Power supply
M4 earth connection Rear view Terminal block detail 1 13 1 2 28 way max Each way accepting
Front view (panel removed) 411.00 362.60 246.05 116.55
24.20
14 25 25 way 'D' connector detail 159.00 168.00 27
2M4 Ring terminals or 24,8 x 0,8 Snap-on terminals or 28 1 Ring+
8 holes 4.4
Panel cut-out detail
4.50
Figure 44a. Relay dimensions - (for panel mounting)

483.0 465.1 88.9 57.1 Front view (cover removed) Fixing Slot 10.6 Long x 7.0 Wide 15.5 10.00 Side view
32.00
306.00
10.00
13
177.00 (4U Nom) 101.6 37.7
157.00
14 25 25 way 'D' connector detail
Communications
29 57 85
Terminal block detail

1 2
T.B.
T.B.
T.B.
84
T.B.
112
T.B.
28
56
Processing AC input
Power supply
M4 earth connection Rear view U = 44.45 483 (19" )Rack detail for unit to comply with IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
27
28 28 way max Each way accepting 2M4 Ring terminals or 24,8 x 0,8 Snap-on terminals or 1 Ring+
Front view (panel removed)
U = 44.45
483 (19" )Rack detail to IEC 60297
Nom Height 4U
Equipment
Nom Height 4U
Equipment
Rack detail recommended fixing
Figure 44b.
Relay dimensions - (for rack mounting)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.21
Serial communications K-Bus Transmission mode Signal Levels Message format Data rate Connection Cable type Cable length Connector Isolation Serial (RS232) Signal Levels Message Format Data rate Connection Connector Cable type Isolation RS232 IEC 60870 -5 (FT1.2) Up to 19200 baud Single ended 25 way D-Type Serial (screened multi-core) 1kV rms for 1 minute (Rear connector only) Synchronous RS485 HDLC 64 kbit/s Multidrop (32 units) Screened Twisted Pair 1000M Screw terminals 2kV rms for 1 minute
6.22
Environmental withstand Atmospheric Temperature IEC 60255-6: 1988 IEC 60068-2-1: 1990 IEC 60068-2-2: 1974 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969 Enclosure protection IEC 60529: 1989 Environment IEC 61010-1:1990/A2:1995 Equipment designed for environment where only Pollution degree 2 non-conducting pollution occurs EN 61010-1:1993/A2:1995 Occasionally light condensation may be expected Pollution degree 2 IP50 (dust protected) 56 Days at 93% relative humidity and 40C Storage and transit -25C to +70C Operating -25C to +55C Cold Dry Heat
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Mechanical Vibration IEC 60255-21-1: 1988 Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2: 1988 Shock response Class 2 Shock withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3: 1993 6.23 High voltage withstand Insulation Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5: 1977 ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 2kV for 1 minute between all terminals and case earth. 2kV for 1 minute between terminals of independent circuits including contact circuits 1.5kV for 1 minute across open contacts of output relays Impulse voltage IEC 60255-5: 1977 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and all terminals to case earth. >100M This equipment requires a protection (safety) earth. Class 2 Response Class 2 Endurance Class 2
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5: 1977 Insulation class IEC 61010-1:1990/A2:1995 Class 1 EN 61010-1:1993/A2:1995 Class 1 Installation (overvoltage) category IEC 61010-1:1990/A2:1995 EN 61010-1:1993/A2:1995 Category III Distribution level, fixed installation Category III 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5j between all terminals and all terminals to case earth
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.24
Electrical environment DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11: 1979 AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11: 1979 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1: 1988 class III 2.5kV peak between independent circuits and case 1kV peak across terminals of the same circuit No additional tolerances are required for the operating time or the relay thresholds. Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 IEC 60801-2 Class 3 (8kV) discharge in air with cover in place. Class 3 (6kV) point contact discharge with cover removed. No additional tolerances are required for the operating time or the relay thresholds. Fast transient disturbance IEC 60255-22-4:1992 Class III IEC 60801-4:1988 Level 3 2kV, 5kHz applied directly to auxiliary inputs 2kV, 5kHz applied directly to all inputs No additional tolerances are required for the operating time or the relay thresholds. IEC 60255-22-4:1992Class IV IEC 60801-4:1988 Level 4 4kV, 2.5kHz applied directly to auxiliary inputs 4kV, 2.5kHz applied directly to all inputs No additional tolerances are required for the operating time or the relay thresholds. The relay shall withstand 12% AC ripple The relay shall withstand a 10ms interrupt without de-energising
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 1 Chapter 3 Page 75 of 76 Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route Generic Standards were used to establish conformity
EMC compliance 89/336/EEC
EN 50081-2:1994 EN 50082-2:1995 Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Level 4
4kV peak, 1.2/50s between all groups and case earth. 2kV peak, 1.2/50s between terminals of each group.
Product safety 73/23/EEC EN61010-1:1993/A2:1995 EN60950:1992/A3:1995 Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Appendix A Page 1 of 4
SECTION 1.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
The sampling of the input signals is synchronised to the power frequency to give 72 samples in each cycle. This is necessary since the relay measuring elements are based on the phase angle between samples rather than the time difference. Close control of the sample rate also improves the sensitivity of the superimposed current phase selector and the accuracy of the voltage memory used in the polarisation of the distance directional elements. The sample rate is controlled by setting a value (NSAMP) which determines the number of pulses of a 25MHz clock between successive samples of the same signal. The frequency track algorithms determine the value of NSAMP which must be used to provide 72 samples per cycle of the input frequency. Measurements are made using the phase-phase voltage inputs and the algorithms automatically select the most suitable voltage for tracking. While a fault is present, or when there is insufficient voltage to permit tracking, the sample rate is maintained at the last measured value. If tracking is suspended for long enough for the switch on to fault feature to be enabled (110s after all three poles are detected as dead) the tracking is set for the nominal frequency (50Hz or 60Hz). The algorithms track the system frequency over the ranges 41-55Hz when set to 50Hz and 51-65Hz when set to 60Hz. If a frequency outside these ranges is detected, protection is disabled and an alarm issued. The tracking system consists of two algorithms. The simple algorithm is used when there is a large difference between the present value of NSAMP and that required to give 72 samples per cycle. This condition is most likely to occur when tracking has been suspended. The accurate algorithm uses a process of successive approximation and is therefore best suited to fine adjustment of the sample rate. The combination of the two algorithms is used to produce fast response and accurate tracking.
SECTION 2.
SIMPLE ALGORITHM
When the number of samples measured between successive zero-crossing of the input signal (SAMP) differs from the required value of 36 by more than 2, such as may occur following breaker closure, the value of NSAMP required to correct the sample rate to 1 in a half cycle is given by
NSAMP = N
Samp 36
N is the existing value of the counter. This method is employed only when the error is large and restores the sample rate to 722 samples per cycle.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
ACCURATE ALGORITHM
The accurate algorithm can select the value of NSAMP to the nearest pulse of the 25MHz clock. It uses the fact that, under steady state conditions, the difference between samples of the input taken one cycle (72 sample periods) apart is zero. The algorithm measures the difference between samples taken 72 periods apart, over a half cycle period and calculates the change in the value of NSAMP required to reduce this difference to zero. Because the assumptions used in this calculation are strictly correct only when the change in NSAMP is zero, the process is iterative and is best suited to correcting small errors in the sample rate.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Appendix B Page 1 of 4
SECTION 1.
FILTERING
The current and voltage inputs are filtered, using finite impulse response (FIR) digital filters to reduce the effects of non-power frequency components in the input signals, such as offset in the currents and capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) transients in the voltages, and to minimise errors caused by higher frequency components on the phase comparison and magnitude algorithms. The neutral current and residual voltage (Va + Vb + Vc) signals used for level detectors (Sections 2.5.4 to 2.5.7) are filtered to minimise the effect of third harmonic. This filtering is necessary to prevent the operation of the neutral level detectors under balanced conditions when third harmonic is present in the phase currents or voltages. It is not applied to the other inputs because its longer impulse response would result in slower operating times for the elements. The two functions of the filter are satisfied by a band pass FIR (finite impulse response) digital filter which rejects dc and has its first null at six times the fundamental frequency. Since the filter must be executed for all input channels, on every application cycle, it is important that the execution time of the filter is as short as possible. It is also desirable to limit the impulse response (number of coefficients) of the filter to the minimum for which its frequency response is acceptable. The filter used for the majority of inputs uses 24 coefficients based on a full cycle sine wave, while the filter for the neutral level detectors uses 48 coefficients determined in the same way. The frequency responses of the filters are shown in Figure B1. The filter coefficients h(n) are computed as follows: h(n) = sin 2 N n+ 1 2
where N = number of coefficients and
0nN-1
The filter output y(n) is specified as a function of the input samples x(n):
y(n) = h(k) x (n - k)
k=0
N-1
The filter coefficients (or impulse response) defined above exhibit negative symmetry; ie.
h(n) = -h(N - n - 1)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Since N is even, the filter is characterised as (N even, negative symmetry) and as such has magnitude |H()| and phase () responses of
N/2 H() = b(n)sin n - 1 n=1 2
N b(n) = 2h N - n where n = 1, 2 ..., 2 2 - N-1 2 2
() =
The magnitude response of the filters is plotted against harmonic frequency (0 to 36) on Figure B1 below.
Filter Frequency Response

1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2
Main filter (24 coefficients) Third harmonic rejection (48 coefficients)
Gain
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Normalised Frequency
Figure B1 The values of the coefficients are selected to give unity gain at the fundamental frequency for both filters.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Appendix C Page 1 of 4
SECTION 1.
PHASE COMPARISON
The phase comparison algorithm used in LFZR operates at any point on wave, using a measuring window of 60. Phase comparison between signals is performed at defined intervals, 12 per cycle for the distance elements and 36 per cycle for the DEF. Each input is expressed as real and imaginary components with respect to a reference, usually the fault current. This process requires a set of six samples of the signal and the reference taken at 10 intervals (36 samples per cycle). A signal P can be expressed as real and imaginary components A and B with reference to another signal Q by the equation:
P = AQ + dQ dt
Expressing dQ/dt in terms of the difference between samples and considering two instances of the above equation, the real and imaginary components can be calculated using the following equations:
Real component A = (p5(q3 - q1) - p2(q6 - q4)) (q5(q3 - q1) - q2(q6 - q4))
Imaginary component B =
(p2q5 - p5q2 ) 2 sin 10 (q5(q3 - q1) - q2(q6 - q4))
Where pn and qn are successive samples of the signal and the reference, respectively. Composite signals such as V/I - Z are produced by the complex addition of the real and imaginary components of the quantities. Phase comparison consists of the complex division of the two signals: Figure C1 shows the polarity of the real and imaginary components of such a complex division of signal by reference. If signal leads reference, the imaginary component of the division is positive. Similarly if the angle between signal and reference is less than 90, the real component of the division is positive. These provide the basis for the lead/lag comparison used for the quadrilateral top line and blinders (Sections 2.2.3 and 2.2.4) and the 90 comparisons used for the mho and directional elements (Sections 2.1 and 2.2.5). This technique allows a phase comparison to be made even if neither signal has reached a zero crossing, allowing fast operation of the distance elements, unaffected by the point on wave of the fault.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
imaginary positive
signal
real negative
real positive reference
imaginary negative
Figure C1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Appendix D Page 1 of 4
SECTION 1.
MAGNITUDE ALGORITHM
The magnitude algorithm used in LFZR calculates the square of the peak amplitude of a sinusoidal quantity at any point on wave, using a measuring window of 30. The magnitudes of sinusoidal quantities are used in level detectors (Section 2.5) in the phase selector (Section 2.3) and in controlling the sensitivity of the various distance elements. The values are calculated from sets of three successive samples of each signal taken at 10 intervals (36 samples per cycle). For a sinusoidal signal Q where the instantaneous values qn are given by
qn = QSint
and the rate of change may be calculated from 2 samples by dq q -q = QCost = n+1 2 n-1 dt 4 Sin 10 The magnitude is given by Q2 = q2 + 2 (q3 - q1)2 4 Sin2 10
This allows the magnitude to be determined before the peak has been reached, allowing fast operation of the level detectors.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943A Volume 1 Chapter 3 Appendix E Page 1 of 4
SCHEME LOGIC GLOSSARY

This glossary describes the signal names used within the scheme logic diagrams and descriptions. It also defines the operation of the gates used within the scheme logic diagrams.
SECTION 1.
MENU SETTINGS
Main aided scheme distance ground elements enable Main aided scheme distance phase elements enable Block auto-reclose Zone 1X delayed trip Block auto-reclose Zone 2 delayed trip Block auto-reclose instantaneous mutli-phase faults Block auto-reclose Zone 3 delayed trip Block auto-reclose DEF Aided trip Block auto-reclose DEF Instantaneous trip DEF Definite time Back Up 1 enable DEF Back Up 1 direction forward DEF Back Up 1 direction reverse DEF Definite time Back Up 2 enable DEF Back Up 2 direction forward DEF Back Up 2 direction reverse Ignore forward DEF element DEF Instantaneous high set enable DEF Instantaneous high set directional control Ignore reverse DEF element Circuit Breaker Failure Enable Main aided scheme shared channel DEF enable Main aided scheme unblocking enable (permissive schemes only) Main aided scheme weak infeed enable (POR2 only) Independent channel DEF aided scheme enable Independent channel DEF weak infeed enable (POR only) Independent channel DEF unblocking enable (permissive scheme only) Instantaneous phase overcurrent tripping enable Loss of Load scheme enable PSB to block distance elements PSB to block Zone * Enable PSB Timeout Switch onto fault on Zone 1 Switch onto fault on Zone 2 Switch onto fault on Zone 3 Switch onto fault on overcurrent and undervoltage Enable Stub Bus protection 3 Pole tripping only Trip on Reclose on Zone 1 Trip on Reclose on Zone 2 Trip on Reclose on Zone 3 Trip on Reclose on overcurrent and undervoltage Trip on Reclose force three pole tripping Trip on Reclose using scheme logic Voltage transformer supervision to block tripping Enable Zone * ground faults for basic scheme tripping Enable Zone * phase faults for basic scheme tripping Ignore ground fault elements for Zone * Ignore phase fault elements for Zone *
AID_GF_EN AID_PF_EN BAR_Z1XT BAR_Z2T BAR_Z1AT23FLT BAR_Z1AT3FLT BAR_DEFAT BAR_Z1XT DEF_BU1_EN DEF_BU1_FWD DEF_BU1_REV DEF_BU2_EN DEF_BU2_FWD DEF_BU2_REV DEF_F_IGN DEF_HS_EN DEF_HS_DIR DEF_R_IGN DIST_CBF_EN DIST_DEF_AT DIST_UB_EN DIST_WI_EN ICDEF_LS_EN ICDEF_WI_EN ICDEF_UB_EN INST_OC_EN LOL_EN PSB_EN_ANY PSB_EN_Z* PSB_TIMEOUT SOTF_Z1 SOTF_Z2 SOTF_Z3 SOTF_OCUV STUB_BUS_EN TRIP_3P_EN TOR_Z1 TOR_Z2 TOR_Z3 TOR_OCUV TOR_3POLE TOR_SCHEME VTS_B_TRIP Z*GF_EN Z*PF_EN Z*_GF_IGN Z*_PF_IGN
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 2.
PROTECTION INPUTS
Zone * A phase ground element (repeated for B and C) Zone * AB phase to phase element (repeated BC and CA) Directional earth fault forward element Directional earth fault reverse element Phase selector output A phase to ground, repeated for other phase to ground, phase to phase, 2 phase to ground and three phase Phase selector 2 cycle in progress Phase selector 5 cycle in progress Super-imposed Power swing detector Low set phase current level detector, repeated for B and C High set phase current level detecor, repeated for B and C Loss of Load phase current level detector detector, repeated for B and C Biased neutral current level detector Extra High Set neutral current level detector 1 (DEF Inst) Extra High Set neutral current level detector 2 (DEF BU1) Extra High Set neutral current level detector 3 (DEF BU2) Phase overvoltage level detector, repeated for B and C Zero sequence voltage level detector, voltage transformer supervision Zero sequence voltaghe level detector, weak infeed
Z*AN Z*AB DEF_FW DEF_REV PHS_AN PHS_2CYCLE PHS_5CYCLE PSB_ACTIVE LDLSA LDOCA LOLA LDLSBN LDEHS1N LDEHS2N LDEHS3N LDOVA LDV0VTS LDVN
SECTION 3.
OPTO INPUTS
Auto-reclose in progress Circuit Breaker auxillary A Phase 52b (LFZR111 only) Circuit Breaker auxillary B Phase 52b (LFZR111 only) Circuit Breaker auxillary C Phase 52b (LFZR111 only) Circuit Breaker auxillary 52b (LFZR112 & LFZR113) Channel out of service / loss of guard channel1 Channel out of service / loss of guard channel2 (LFZR111 & LFZR112) Signal Receive channel 1 / Reset zone 1 extension Signal Receive channel 2 (LFZR111 & LFZR112) 3 Pole tripping only (LFZR111) Direct Transfer Trip Voltage transformer circuit breaker (block voltage dependent functions) Stub bus isolator input
AR_INPROG CBAUXA CBAUXB CBAUXC CBAUX COS1/LGS1 COS2/LGS2 CRX1/Z1X_RST CRX2 FORCE_3POLE INTERTRIP MCB STUB_OPTO
SECTION 4.
RELAY OUTPUTS
Protection Unavailable Printer Fail Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Trip 3 Phase Channel-aided Trip Any Trip Trip Time-Delayed Distance Circuit Breaker Failure Alarm Transfer Trip Trip Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent Trip Stub Bus Trip SOTF Trip on Reclose Trip Loss-of-Load Trip Zone 1 Trip Zone 1X Start Zone 1X
ProtUnavailable Printer Fail TrAPh TrBPh TrCPh Tr3Ph TrAided TrAny TrDistDelay AlarmCBF TrTransfer TrInstOC TrStubBus TrSOTF TrTOR TrLOL TrZone1 TrZone1X StZone1X
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Trip Zone 2 Start Zone 2 Trip Zone 3 Start Zone 3 Trip Zone 4 Start Zone 4 Trip DEF Instantaneous Trip DEF BackUp 1 Start DEF Backup 1 Trip DEF BackUp 2 Start DEF BackUp 2 Trip DEF IDMT Start DEF IDMT Trip Time-Delayed DEF Trip Channel-aided Distance Trip Channel-aided with Weak Infeed Trip Channel-aided Distance with Weak Infeed Trip Channel-aided DEF Trip Channel-aided DEF with Weak Infeed Fault involves Phase A Fault involves Phase B Fault involves Phase C Fault involves Neutral Any Start Voltage Transformer Supervision Alarm Power Swing Blocking Alarm BAR Signal Send 1 (Main channel) Signal Stop 1 (Main channel) Signal Send 2 (Independent channel) Signal Stop 2 (Independent channel) Zone 1 Phase A element Zone 1 Phase B element Zone 1 Phase C element Zone 1 Phase AB element Zone 1 Phase BC elements Zone 1 Phase CA element Zone 2 Phase A element Zone 2 Phase B element Zone 2 Phase C element Zone 2 Phase AB element Zone 2 Phase BC element Zone 2 Phase CA element Zone 1 Zone 1X Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Time-Delayed Zone 4 Blocking Element DEF Forward-looking element DEF Reverse-looking element
TrZone2 StZone2 TrZone3 StZone3 TrZone4 StZone4 TrDEFInst TrDEFBU1 StDEFBU1 TrDEFBU2 StDEFBU2 TrDEFIDMT StDEFIDMT TrDEFDelay TrDistAid TrWIAid TrWIDistAid TrDEFAid TrWIDEFAid FltAPh FltBPh FltCPh FltN AnyStart AlarmVTS AlarmPSB BAR SigSend1 SigStop1 SigSend2 SigStop2 Z1_AN Z1_BN Z1_CN Z1_AB Z1_BC Z1_CA Z2_AN Z2_BN Z2_CN Z2_AB Z2_BC Z2_CA Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z4HS DEF_FWD DEF_REV
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 5.
LOGIC SYMBOLS
Figure 1 contains the truth tables for the logical gates used within the scheme logic diagrams. Examples for each type of gate/latch are shown, variants based on these types are used within the diagrams.
AND gates
A B
&
Output
A B
&
Output
A B C
&
Output
Inputs A 0 0 1 1
Output B 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
Inputs A 0 0 1 1
Output B 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
Inputs A B 1 1
Output C 0 1 0
For all other input conditions
OR gates
A B
Output
A B
Output
A B C
Output
Inputs A 0 0 1 1
Output B 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Inputs A 0 0 1 1
Output B 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
Inputs A B 0 0
Output C 0 1 0
For all other input conditions
Exclusive OR
A B C
=1
Output
Majority logic
A B C D
>2
Output
Inputs A B C 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 for all other input conditions
Output 1 1 1 0
Inputs A B
Output C D 1
for any two inputs or more at logic level 1
Latches
S Q R Output
S Q R
Output
D CLK Q R
Output
Inputs S 0 0 1 1
R 0 1 0 1
Output Q X 0 1 0
Inputs S 0 0 1 1
R 1 0 1 0
Output Q X 0 1 0
Inputs D R * * * 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
CLK 0 1 * 0>1 0>1
Output Q X X 0 1 0
X = no change
X = no change
* = no effect X = no change
Timers
5ms
t 0
time delay on pick-up drop-off time = 0ms pick-up time = 5ms
20ms time delay on drop-off drop-off time = 20ms pick-up time = 0ms
Figure 1.
LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volume 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 APPENDIX B
INTRODUCTION USER INTERFACE INSTALLATION COMMISSIONING, TEST AND MAINTENANCE COURIER DATABASE SETTINGS
ISSUE C ISSUE D ISSUE B ISSUE D ISSUE B ISSUE D ISSUE B ISSUE D
APPENDIX A FRONT PANEL MENU APPENDIX C RELAY SETTING SHEETS APPENDIX D COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD APPENDIX E RETURN/REPAIR FORM LFZR 100 SERIES DIAGRAMS
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Chapter 1 Introduction
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 3.4.1.2 3.4.1.3 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.4.1 3.4.4.2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4. 5. 6 7 8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.3 8.4 9 Figure 1 Figure 2 Table 1 Table 2 INTRODUCTION RELAY VERSIONS LFZR111 model LFZR112 model LFZR113 model PROTECTION FEATURES Phase selector Distance protection Zones of protection Phase-to-phase distance characteristics Phase-to-ground distance characteristics Directional earth fault characteristics Level detectors Phase current level detectors Fixed setting High-set (loss-of-load) Extra high-set Phase voltage level detectors Neutral current level detectors Neutral voltage level detectors Fixed setting Variable setting Protection schemes Independent channel DEF Block auto-reclose logic (BAR) Power swing blocking (PSB) Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Circuit breaker failure protection RELAY SELF-MONITORING IN-SERVICE TESTING COMMUNICATIONS USER INTERFACE PERIPHERAL FEATURES Records Events records Fault records Disturbance records Calendar clock Fault location Metering LABELS FIGURES Phase fault characteristics Phase-to-ground distance characteristics TABLES Relay versions Standard features 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 6 7 2 4
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 1.
INTRODUCTION
This manual serves as a description and set of instructions for type LFZR100. It is intended for: the protection engineer who is responsible for selection of the distance relay application of the distance relay for the protection of the power system the test engineer who is responsible for installation of the distance relay testing and maintenance of the distance relay Applications manual Introduction General information and overview of features for all three models Applications How to apply and set the relay Technical description Detailed technical description of each feature Operation testing and maintenance manual Introduction General information and overview of features for all three models User interface, communications and records User interface and protocol Event, fault and disturbance records Installation Wiring and configuration Commissioning, test and maintenance Initial checkout and tests A B C D E Front panel menu tree Courier data base, relay settings description Relay settings sheets Test results sheets Repair/return form
The manual has the following format: Volume 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Volume 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 2.
RELAY VERSIONS
Common features All three relay models have the following protective features: up to 5 independent zones of protection mho characteristics for phase and ground faults additional quadrilateral characteristics for ground faults if required comprehensive directional earth fault protection voltage transformer supervision power swing blocking independent high-speed overcurrent/stub-bus protection circuit breaker failure protection comprehensive range of protection schemes 8 independent, user selectable, setting groups
In addition to the previously mentioned protective functions, all three relay models have the following features: networked substation communications via K-Bus modem communications using IEC 60870 protocol IRIG-B port for real time clock synchronisation fault recording with automatic downloading to a printer disturbance recording (oscillography) real time calendar clock with 1ms resolution fault location and metering sequence of events recording All three models of the relay have 4Mb of RAM available for storage of the recorded information. An additional 4Mb of RAM is available if needed to capture additional disturbance records. The LFZR range of distance protection relays has been designed specifically for use on transmission systems. The relays are available in three basic variants, the LFZR111, 112 and 113. Each of the three models has 30 impedance measuring elements, providing 5 independent zones of protection. All models are suitable for application to overhead lines or underground cables. LFZR111 Single or three pole tripping, having 31 user programmable output contacts and 14 opto-isolator inputs Three pole tripping only, with selection of the setting group using opto-isolator inputs having 15 user programmable output contacts and 14 opto-isolator inputs Three pole tripping only, having 15 user programmable output contacts and 7 opto-isolator inputs Relay versions
LFZR112
LFZR113
Table 1:
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.1
LFZR111 model The standard LFZR111 model has 14 opto-isolator inputs, 31 normally open user programmable output contacts and a single normally closed output contact to provide a relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR111 is available where 4 of the 31 user programmable output contacts are normally closed. The relay provides single and three pole tripping facilities and channel independent directional earth fault protection.
2.2
LFZR112 model The standard LFZR112 version of the relay is designed for use either in spare line relaying applications or where it is required to switch setting groups via external contacts. The relay has 14 opto-isolator inputs, 5 of which are dedicated to changing between the 8 alternate setting groups available in the relay, and 15 normally open, user programmable output contacts. As with the LFZR111, an additional normally closed output contact is provided for the relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR112 is available where 2 of the user programmable output contacts are normally closed. The relay provides 3 pole tripping only and channel independent directional earth fault protection.
2.3
LFZR113 model The standard LFZR113 version of the relay has 7 opto-isolator inputs and 15 normally open, user programmable output contacts. As with the LFZR111, an additional normally closed output contact is provided for the relay inoperative alarm. Another version of the LFZR113 is available where 2 of the user programmable output contacts are normally closed. Unlike the LFZR111 and 112, the LFZR113 relay does not have the option for channel independent directional earth fault protection. Application of the directional earth fault scheme is restricted to using the same pilot as the distance protection. The relay provides 3 pole tripping only. Standard features of the three models are summarised in Table 2.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Zone 1 forward directional instantaneous Zone 1X reversible directional time-delayed zone Zone 2 forward directional time-delayed zone Zone 3 offset time-delayed zone Zone 4 reverse time-delayed zone Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground protection Phase-to-ground protection user selectable quadrilateral element Instantaneous, forward or non-directional Two time-delayed elements either forward, reverse, or non-directional Inverse definite minimum time element, non-directional Basic Z1X PUR PUR unblock POR1 POR1 unblock POR2 POR2 WI POR2 unblock POR2 unblock WI Blocking 1 Blocking2 POR POR unblock POR WI POR WI unblock Blocking 1 Blocking 2 SOTF Trip on reclose Instantaneous phase overcurrent Loss of load Direct transfer trip Stub bus protection VTS Power swing blocking CB failure protection Storage of 8 setting groups Non-isolated parallel and serial port Isolated serial printer port Isolated RS232 port Isolated K-Bus serial port Isolated IRIG-B port Sequence of event recording fault records disturbance records fault location metering
Distance zones
DEF
Schemes
Independent DEF (LFZR111 and LFZR112 only)
Features
Communications
Non-protection features
Table 2:
Standard Features
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
3.1
PROTECTION FEATURES
Phase selector A superimposed current phase selector detects the faulted phase(s) and provides full phase selection for all fault types. The phase selector decisions are used to determine which distance elements can initiate a trip. This avoids the problems of overreach which can occur for ground fault quadrilateral characteristics in the presence of double phase-toground faults. The phase selector is capable of making changes in the selection when additional phases become involved in the fault.
3.2 3.2.1
Distance protection Zones of protection Five zones of distance protection are provided. Zone 1 is a forward directional instantaneous trip zone. Zone 1X is a reversible directional zone for use as zone 1 extension scheme extra time-delayed zone busbar or transformer back-up (reversed) A single control is used to reverse both phase fault and ground fault elements. Zone 2 is a forward directional zone for use as time delayed zone and/or permissive underreach scheme tripping element permissive overreach scheme tripping element blocking schemes Zone 3 is an offset zone used as a time-delayed zone for remote back-up and busbar/transformer protection Zone 4 is a reverse directional zone that has a high-speed output used for POR2 for weak infeed echo current reversal guard blocking element for blocking schemes Speed of operation is of more significance than accuracy for the blocking schemes. Zone 4 is also available for time-delayed busbar/transformer back-up using the more accurate algorithm of the other zone elements. Phase-to-phase protection and phase-to-ground protection each consist of three mho elements for each zone, and phase-to-ground protection also includes three user selectable quadrilateral elements for each zone. Every zone has separate positive-sequence reach settings for phase and ground faults.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Blinder (forward)
Zone 4
Figure 1: 3.2.2
Phase-to-phase distance characteristics
Phase-to-phase distance characteristics The distance characteristics used for phase-to-phase faults are shown in Figure 1. There are three sets of these connected across phases A-B, B-C and C-A. The characteristics are supervised by a directional line and are restricted by load blinders.
3.2.3
Phase-to-ground distance characteristics The distance characteristics used for phase-to-ground faults are shown in Figure 2. There are three sets of these connected across phase A-N, B-N, and C-N. The characteristics are supervised by a directional line and are restricted by load blinders in a similar manner to the phase-to-phase characteristics. The blinders, which are omitted from the figure for clarity, are used to restrict the resistive coverage of the mho elements. In common with the phase fault elements, the forward blinder is monitored by the forward directional decision and the reverse blinder by the reverse directional decision. The zones are similar to the phase-to-phase zones but the user may select a quadrilateral in addition to the mho element. A single selection enables the quadrilaterals for all zones. When quadrilateral characteristics are selected, the resistive reach line for each zone is used to limit the reach of the associated mho element.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
zone 1x reversed
zone 4
Figure 2: 3.3
Directional earth fault characteristics Two alternative DEF directional measurements are provided. Forward and reverse directional decisions are used in conjunction with neutral current level detectors for both instantaneous and time-delayed ground fault protection, and for pilot schemes. The directional measurements are disabled if any pole of the circuit breaker is open. The normal choice for the directional element is neutral (zero-sequence) quantities, but a negative-sequence based measurement is provided for use on parallel line applications where the busbars at one or both ends are not common.
3.4
Level detectors A number of current and voltage level detectors are provided.
3.4.1
Phase current level detectors
3.4.1.1 Fixed setting A fixed setting level detector is provided for each phase current for use in pole dead logic and switch on-to-fault (SOTF). 3.4.1.2 High-Set (Loss of load) A variable setting level detector is provided for each phase current for use in an optional loss of load feature.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.4.1.3 Extra high-set An extra variable setting level detector is provided for each phase current. This can be used as instantaneous overcurrent elements or for stub-bus protection. 3.4.2 Phase voltage level detectors A fixed setting level detector is provided for each phase voltage for use in pole dead logic and SOTF. 3.4.3 Neutral current level detectors Three high-set level detectors are provided. The first set provides instantaneous ground overcurrent protection while the others are used for definite timedelayed ground overcurrent protection. 3.4.4 Neutral voltage level detectors
3.4.4.1 Fixed setting A fixed setting neutral voltage level detector is provided as part of the VT supervision feature. 3.4.4.2 Variable setting A variable setting neutral voltage level detector is provided for use in DEF schemes with weak infeed. 3.5 Protection schemes The relay includes basic scheme logic for stand-alone operation (without signalling channel) and logic for optional schemes. The features of the basic scheme are available whether or not an additional scheme is selected. A list of the schemes follows: Non-pilot schemes Basic scheme Zone 1 extension scheme Pilot schemes Permissive underreach scheme (PUR) Permissive overreach schemes (POR1 and POR2) Blocking schemes (Blocking 1 and Blocking 2) 3.6 Independent channel DEF The DEF schemes are also available as independently selectable schemes, using a separate signalling channel. It is also possible to select any combination of DEF and distance schemes, eg. POR distance can be used with DEF blocking. 3.7 Block auto-reclose logic (BAR) The relay blocks an external auto-reclose relay following a three pole trip. The user is able to select blocking or enabling of an external auto-reclose relay. Both normally open and normally closed contacts are available for this feature, ie. by suitable selection of the relay version.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
On the single pole tripping version of the relay any condition requiring BAR will result in a three pole trip. 3.8 Power swing blocking (PSB) The presence of a power swing is detected using the continuous presence of superimposed currents. A power swing indication is produced if any zone element operates while a power swing is detected. The user may select to block the operation of any or all zones (including pilot trip) in the presence of a power swing, or may select indication of swing only. 3.9 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Failure of a VT fuse is detected by the neutral voltage level detector and the biased neutral current level detector. Logic is included to ensure that a VTS decision is not produced under inappropriate conditions, eg. while a single pole is open. The VTS feature may be selected to block all voltage dependant tripping functions of the relay and issue an indication and alarm, or to issue the indication and alarm only. 3.10 Circuit breaker failure protection Detection of breaker failure results in the issue of a local alarm. The user is able to choose to operate a contact for remote alarm or initiate a breaker fail trip. If such a trip is initiated, the user is also able to block auto-reclose if desired.
SECTION 4.
RELAY SELF-MONITORING
In addition to the VTS and circuit breaker failure features, the relay performs tests of its hardware and software and issues alarms and diagnostic information in the event of failure or potential failure. These tests are performed at power-up and/or continuously while the relay is in service.
SECTION 5.
IN-SERVICE TESTING
Menu options are provided to allow the user to display and monitor, via the parallel port: the status of all opto-isolator inputs the status of all output contacts the status of all relay elements (distance measurements, level detectors, etc.) These signals are available in groups of eight and their selection does not affect the normal operation of the relay.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 6.
COMMUNICATIONS
Two non-isolated communication ports, accessible only when the relay cover is removed, are provided on the front of the relay: a parallel port for connection to a local printer (centronics) for printing settings, fault records, or sequence of events records, and for test points. This port is also able to print event and/or fault records as they occur. a serial port for connection to a local PC. Three isolated communication ports, for permanent connection to external equipment, are provided on the rear of the relay: a serial port for connection to remote equipment via a modem an IRIG-B port for automatic setting and synchronisation of the relay's calendar clock a K-Bus serial port
SECTION 7.
USER INTERFACE
Facilities allow the relay to be set locally, using an integral display and keypad. It is also possible to download, and retrieve settings in file form using a local or remote PC. Additional software (LFZRCOM) is available to allow settings files to be prepared remotely (off-line). It is possible to retrieve event records, fault records, and disturbance records in file form via the serial ports or the K-Bus port.
SECTION 8.
8.1 8.1.1
PERIPHERAL FEATURES
Records Events records The relay records and makes available for local or remote display or print-out, time-tagged details of any chosen event. All relay starts (operation of any element which initiates a delayed trip timer) and trips will be recorded, and the user may elect to include events in any or all of the following categories: the opening or closing of any output contact the receipt of any signal to a relay opto-isolator input the issue of a scheme alarm (eg. PSB or VTS) the change of any setting or selection of a new setting group the issue of a relay self-test error (eg. digital signal processor (DSP) program memory error). The relay stores, in non-volatile memory, at least 48 events in chronological order, and it is possible to view any or all of the stored records. When the available record storage space is exhausted, the relay automatically deletes the oldest record to make room for the new one.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
8.1.2
Fault records When a fault occurs, causing a relay start or trip, additional information is stored in the event record. It is possible to view or print out on an external printer, on demand, any or all of these fault records, independently of the other event records. Each fault record includes time-tagged details of relay trips, faulted phase(s), trip type, operating time and fault location. The record also includes the system frequency, prefault and fault currents and voltages, and positive-, negative- and zero- sequence quantities, all expressed in magnitude and phase angle. The user has the option of displaying the fault record information as phase-toground or phase-to-phase quantities.
8.1.3
Disturbance records A separate system of recording time-tagged disturbance data is provided. Disturbance recording is initiated by one or more of the following options: any relay start or trip any scheme alarm (eg. VTS or PSB) external trigger by specific opto-isolator input The disturbance recordings have the following characteristics: nine analog channels 32 status channels, selected from any combination of relay contacts, optoisolator inputs and scheme logic inputs or outputs prefault time 100ms to 500ms in 100ms steps post fault time 100ms to 5s in 100ms steps number of samples per nominal cycle: 12 or 36 These records are stored in RAM and are therefore not available following a power failure or after the relay has been de-energised. Versions of the relay with the standard 4Mb of RAM are able to store two disturbance records of the maximum duration and the maximum sample rate. The optional additional 4Mb permits the storage of an additonal 4 records of this type. Reducing the duration of the records, and/or reducing the sample rate, permits the storage of more records. When the memory allocated for the storage of disturbance records is full, the oldest record is discarded to make way for the new one. Disturbance records are made available for local or remote display using Courier Access Software, Protection Access Software or LFZRCom.
8.2
Calendar clock The calendar clock used for event and disturbance record time-tagging has a resolution of 1ms. It can be set via the menu or remotely via the serial ports. Synchronisation is by IRIG-B. The accuracy of the real time clock when not synchronised is better than 12 parts per million which represents approximately 1s per day.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
8.3
Fault location The integral fault location uses a new single-ended algorithm developed at Bath University. The algorithm is designed to minimise errors in fault location caused by fault resistance and remote infeed.
8.4
Metering The relay is able to display locally, and make available for remote display, the values of frequency, phase currents and voltages, watts, VArs and positive-, negative- and zero-sequence currents and voltages. These quantities can be expressed as rms magnitude, and phase angle with respect to A phase volts and may be displayed as phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase quantities and as either primary or secondary values.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 9.0 LABELS
LFZR
111S500016D
ZF8468 002
800939D Serial No. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS EXTERNAL RESISTANCE BOX ARRANGEMENT/OUTLINE POS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ASSEMBLY GJ0346 001 GM0009 016 GJ0331 001 GJ0343 002 GJ0334 001 ZJ0268 002 ZJ0268 001 ZJ0267 001 ZJ0267 002 ZJ0267 002 ZJ0267 001 ZJ0269 001 ZJ0271 001 ------ZJ0270 001
:10LFZR111 06/2 :GJ0378/1
DESCRIPTION CASE FRONT BUS FRONT PANEL POWER SUPPLY INPUT MODULE OPTO INPUT PCB OPTO INPUT PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB OUTPUT RELAY PCB BACKPLANE BUFFER PCB HOST PROCESSOR SPARE SLOT PROTECTION PROCESSOR
8 9
1 2
3 4
5 6
10
!
REFER TO HANDBOOK BEFORE CHANGING MODULE
1999 ALSTOM T&D PROTECTION & CONTROL LTD Software contained within this equipment shall not be copied or otherwise reproduced
Terminals of each circuit must be connected together before flash testing between circuits or to earth
Use external resistor(s)
Translations of these labels appear in publication R4125.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Chapter 2 User Interface
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 3. 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 3.3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.3 3.5 4. 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.7.3. 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.8 5. 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.4 INTRODUCTION PHYSICAL INTERFACE Front panel User interface Communication ports Protection inputs and outputs Communication ports RELAY CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS Front panel parallel port SK1 Front panel serial port SK2 Pin allocation Signal details Connection details Rear serial port SK4 Pin allocation Signal details Connection details Direct connection PC with hardware handshaking enabled No handshaking between PC and relay K-Bus port TB5 Terminal allocation Signal details Connection details IRIG-B port SK3 FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE Default display Fault records Event record Alarm pages Main menu Sub menus Setting pages Setting groups Setting trap Setting editor Modem control strings Numeric editor Complex numbers Help pages REMOTE ACCESS USER INTERFACE Introduction Courier database General features of a Courier database LFZR100 series database Courier passwords Data cells 1 1 1 1 3 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 12 13 13 15 16 16 17 18 18 19 21 22 23 24 24 25 25 25 26 26
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Chapter 2 Contents 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 33 33 36 40 40 41 42 42 43 43 43 43
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.4 5.5.3 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.3.1 5.8.3.2 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 7. 8. 8.1 8.2 9. 10. 10.1 10.2
Editing settings Global settings Protection settings Selection of group for editing Editing the selected group Saving protection settings Active setting group Event extraction Disturbance record extraction Use of modems Selection of modem Connection to modem Modem control strings Modem control characters Function of modem control strings Dial-back Dialback settings Telephone numbers Dialback operation RECORDS Event records Fault records Disturbance records MEASUREMENTS PRINTING Manual print information Auto-printing IRIG-B CLOCK SYNC MULTIPLE SETTING GROUPS Setting interlock Opto selectable setting groups
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Chapter 2 Volume 2 Page 1 of 44
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
This section of the manual describes the use of the user interfaces supported by the LFZR100 series of relays. It covers the physical layout and connections to the relay and describes both front panel and remote user interfaces. Each model of the relay supports four languages - English - French - German - Spanish It is possible to communicate with the relay using either the relay front panel or remotely using the Courier language. The Courier interface is achieved using the front or rear serial ports in IEC 60870 format or through the K-Bus port. Note that only one of these is active at any moment in time.
SECTION 2. PHYSICAL INTERFACE

2.1 Front Panel Figure 1 shows the layout of the relay front panel. The front panel of the relay is normally covered while in service with a transparent cover. This allows the user to view the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and the Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators. However access to the front panel keys is restricted such that setting changes cannot be made with the cover present. 2.1.1 User Interface The front panel includes Five Key cruciform key pad, containing four arrow keys and a key. These keys are not accessible with the relay front cover on. Four Softkeys are located underneath the LCD. These keys are accessible with the relay front cover on. The legend on the key is ^ to point to the function defined by the LCD. Within the description of the relay menu structure these are referred to as softkeys A to D, softkey A being the leftmost key when viewed from the front of the relay. There are five LED indicators on the front panel defined in the table below: Label TRIP ALARM PROTECTION AVAILABLE RELAY HEALTHY POWER Colour RED AMBER GREEN GREEN GREEN
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Clear window with anti-glare and scratch resistant coating forming label pocket Clear window with anti-glare and scratch resistant coating Liquid crystal display Light emitting diode
LFZR111
No XX XXX XXX XXX X X X HZ
TRIP ALARM
Made in UK
PROTECTION AVAILABLE RELAY HEALTHY POWER
SK1
SK2
cruciform keypad soft keys
Figure 1.
Relay Front Panel
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The LEDs operate under the following conditions: TRIP This operates following the relay issuing a trip signal. It resets when the fault record is cleared from the front panel display. It is also cleared if the trip fault record is overwritten by a start fault record or an event. By setting Self Reset Flags to enabled this LED will reset following the line being restored to a healthy energised condition. ALARM This is issued when any new information has been written to the default display, even if the display is not visible. This may be a fault or event record or error information written to the alarm page. The LED flashes following the indication and will become steady when the data has been accepted. A more detailed description of the control and operation of this LED is covered within sections 4.1.1. to 4.1.3 of this chapter. PROTECTION AVAILABLE This is on at all times except if the relay has been disabled from the menu using the commission options a self-test has disabled the protection function the system frequency is outside the relays operational range During setting download - for a period of time required to apply the new settings A signal which echoes the function of this LED is available to map to an output contact. This does not operate for the case where the protection is unavailable due to the contacts being blocked by the commissioning options. RELAY HEALTHY This is on at all times unless a self-test indicates there is an error in the hardware or software of the relay. POWER This is on if the DC supply to the relay is present. The front panel also includes a backlit supertwist LCD display. This is capable of text at 40 columns by 8 rows. 2.1.2 Communication Ports Details of the communication port interfaces, connection diagrams and signal specifications can be found within section 3 of this chapter. SK1 25 Way, Female D-Type connector providing a parallel port, this is used either for connection to a parallel printer or to access scheme logic test signals. SK2 25 way, Female D-Type connector on the front of the relay for serial RS232
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
communication. This port supports the Courier language and should not be used for permanent connection. 2.2.1 Protection Inputs and Outputs The rear of the relay has four Midos terminal blocks (labelled TB1 to TB4), these are used for all protection I/O functions. The comprise: analogue AC inputs, opto-isolated status inputs and contacts for relay logic outputs. The connection diagrams for these inputs and outputs are contained within Chapter 3 (Installation) of this manual. An explanation of how these inputs are used and outputs are produced by the relay can be found in chapters 2 and 3 of volume 1 of the LFZR service manual. 2.2.2 Communication Ports Details of the communication port interfaces, connection diagrams and signal specifications can be found within section 3 of this chapter. The rear of the relay provides the following connectors TB6 2 Way Baeu connector for DC power supply voltage Terminal 1 is +DC, terminal 2 is -DC TB5 3 Way Baeu connector for connection to K-bus, this supports the Courier language and allows up to 32 relays to be connected together in a daisy chained link. SK3 50 W BNC connector for IRIG-B time synchronisation input. SK4 25 Way Female D-Type socket for serial RS232 connection, this supports the Courier language and is isolated to allow permanent connection to a modem. SK 5 25 Way Female D-Type socket for serial RS232 connection, this has no function on the current version of the relay.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SK3
TB3
TB4
TB5
SCN 1
SK3
2
SK4
SK5
TB1
12
TB6
11
Figure 2. Rear Connections to relay
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3. RELAY CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Front Panel Parallel Port SK1 The connections for this parallel port are defined below (the signals are defined as inputs or outputs with respect to the relay).
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22-25 FUNCTION STROBE Data Bit 0 Data Bit 1 Data Bit 2 Data Bit 3 Data Bit 4 Data Bit 5 Data Bit 6 Data Bit 7 Not Connected BUSY Not Connected SENSE Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected GROUND NOTES Printer strobe, active LOW (output) Data Line D0, Monitor Data Line D0 Data Line D1, Monitor Data Line D1 Data Line D2, Monitor Data Line D2 Data Line D3, Monitor Data Line D3 Data Line D4, Monitor Data Line D4 Data Line D5, Monitor Data Line D5 Data Line D6, Monitor Data Line D6 Data Line D7, Monitor Data Line D7 Not Connected Printer BUSY (input) Not Connected Detect Printer Connection (input) Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected Not Connected 0V
(output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output)
This port can be directly connected to a parallel printer using a standard 25 way D-type to Centronix link. The test signals are +5V nominal (TTL level) with respect to the OV pins. 3.2 3.2.1 Front Panel Serial Port SK2 Pin Allocation This port can be configured either as a DTE or DCE type connection, it does not support the hardware handshaking lines required for modem connection and is not isolated. The port is configurable as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) as a menu option, the pin configuration is shown below:
Terminal 2 3 7 DTE Transmitted Data (TxD) Received Data (RxD) Signal Ground (SG) DCE Received Data (RxD) Transmitted Data (TxD) Signal Ground (SG)
3.2.2.
Signal Details The table below is a summary of the signal details for the IEC 60870 link, a more detailed description can be found in the ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd document R6510C - IEC 60870 Communication Standard.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Chapter 2 Volume 2 Page 7 of 44 600 to 19,200 bits per second RS232 Single Ended IEC 60870 - 5(FT1.2), 10 bit version without parity is selectable. 8 data bits, 1 even parity (optional), 1 start and 1 stop bit. Half duplex asynchronous start with synchronous frames. 16 bit summation Courier Screened multi-core 15m or 2500pF total capacitance
Transmission Speed Signal Level Connection Protocol menu Character size Transmission Mode Fame checksum Message Format Cable Type Maximum cable length 3.2.3 Connection Details
Configuring this port as a DCE type connection allows direct connection to a PC, it is necessary to cross lines 2 and 3 if configured as a DTE. If the PC requires hardware handshaking lines to communicate the following connection can be used. LFZR SK2 - DCE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 3.3. 3.3.1 Rear Serial Port SK4 Pin allocation This port is configured as a DTE (Data Termination Equipment) the pin allocation is defined below, the direction is with respect to the relay.
Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6* 7 20* Signal Protective Ground (PG) Transmitted Data (TxD) Received Data (RxD) Request To Send (RTS) Clear To Send (CTS) Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal Ground (SG) Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Direction Output Input Output Input Input Output
PC - DTE 25 pin TXD RXD RTS CTS DCD DTR DSR COMMON 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 9 pin 3 2 7 8 1 4 6 5
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.3.2
Signal details The table below is a summary of the signal details for the IEC 60870 link, a more detailed description can be found in the ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd document R6510C - IEC 60870 Communication Standard. Transmission speed Signal Level Connection Protocol Character size Transmission Mode Fame checksum Message Format Cable Type Maximum cable length Isolation 600 to 19,200 bits per second RS232 Single Ended IEC 60870 - 5(FT1.2), 10 bit version without parity is menu selectable. 8 data bits, 1 even parity (optional), 1 start and 1 stop bit. Half duplex asynchronous start with synchronous frames. 16 bit summation Courier Screened multi-core 15m or 2500pF total capacitance 1kV rms to case earth and other circuits
3.3.3
Connection details This port is isolated and supports the handshaking lines required for connection to a modem. A direct connection can be used between this port and a modem since the modem will be a DCE type of connection.
3.3.3.1 Direct connection LFZR100 SK4 - DTE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 20 6 7 TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR SG TXD RXD RTS CTS DTR DSR SG Modem DCE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 20 6 7 9 pin 3 2 7 8 4 6 5
If it is necessary to directly connect a PC to the relay rear serial port then one of the following connections should be used:
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.3.3.2 PC with hardware handshaking enabled: LFZR SK4 - DTE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 TXD RXD RTS CTS DCD DTR DSR SG TXD RXD RTS CTS DCD DTR DSR SG PC - DTE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 9 pin 3 2 7 8 1 4 6 5
3.3.3.3 No handshaking between PC and relay LFZR SK4 - DTE 25 pin 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 TXD RXD [RTS] [CTS] [DCD] [DTR] [DSR] SG TXD RXD [RTS] [CTS] [DCD] [DTR] [DSR] SG 25 pin 2 3 4 5 8 20 6 7 PC - DTE 9 pin 3 2 7 8 1 4 6 5
The handshaking lines for SK4 must be pulled high for the relay to communicate. This can be performed by the modem, the communicating PC or in the last case by connecting the relay output handshaking lines back to the inputs. 3.4 3.4.1 K-Bus Port TB5 Terminal allocation Terminal SCN is used for connection to the screen, this is not connected internally as the screen should be earthed at the master end. Terminals 1 and 2 are used for K-Bus in and out and can be connected either way.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.4.1
Signal details The table below is a summary of the signal details for the K-Bus link, a more detailed description can be found in the ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd document R6509C - K-Bus Communication Standard. Transmission Speed Signal Level Connection Protocol Character size Transmission Mode Frame Check Sum Message Format Cable Type Maximum cable length Isolation 64 kb/s RS485 Multidrop (32 units and 1 master) HDLC 8 data bits with HDLC frame Half duplex synchronous HDLC - with biphase FM0 encoding CRC 16 Courier Screened twisted pair to DEF STANDARD 16-2-2c 1000m 2kV rms
3.4.3
Connection details K-Bus allows multidrop connection with up to 32 devices on a link connected to a single KITZ protocol converter. All devices are connected in parallel across the K-Bus link, the polarity of the connection is not critical. The screen should be earthed at a single point; usually at the Master end. The relay provides a terminal for the screen connection however this is not internally connected. The K-Bus spur should be terminated at either end using 150 resistors.
3.5
IRIG-B Port - SK3 This port is used to provide an accurate time synchronisation signal for the relay. The requirements for this signal are listed below: Carrier Signal Modulation ratio Signal Threshold 1kHz sinewave, digitally amplitude modulated Max 6:1, min 3:1 Peak signal >1V and <10V
Connection is via a 50 BNC connector, the polarity of the connection is not critical.
SECTION 4.
FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE
Using the relay front panel interface the user is able to examine all the relay settings, measurements, records, and all other stored data. This data is accessed using the relay softkeys which are accessible with the cover on or off. The function of the softkeys is defined in all screens by the bottom line of the LCD display. The second from bottom line in all displays acts as a status bar, indicating the presence of Alarms. With the cover removed it is possible to
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
make setting changes to the relay using the cruciform key pad. When using the front panel menu a selected item is highlighted using inverse video. A detailed description of the user interface follows. The user should note that this interface is intuitive; thus this section should be used primarily as a reference. Most of the relay menu pages have associated help text, this can be accessed by pressing softkey A (HELP). 4.1 Default display Under normal operation the front panel LCD has a default display, this contains system data values or a selection of measured values. There are four default pages which are shown below, softkey C (NEXT) can be used to select which of these is visible. Use softkey D (MENU) to access the relay menu, allowing examination of settings and data. The default display consists of the following four pages of data. Note that the header for the default display is the Relay Description found in the System Data area of the menu. [DEFAULT HEADER ] Plant Ref Active Group Group Identifier Relay Address HELP NEXT Page 2 of 4 :1 MENU Page 1 of 4
: Stafford Sub :3 : line A275-2
[DEFAULT HEADER ] Primary Real Power Reactive Power Frequency
: 101MW : 15.3MVAR : 50.2Hz
Measurement Mode : 0 HELP NEXT MENU
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Chapter 2 Volume 2 Page 12 of 44 Page 3 of 4 Current 1.02kA 10.4 1.02kA 10.4 1.02kA 10.4 MENU Page 4 of 4 I1 : 1.02kA 10.4 I2 : 1.02kA 10.4 I0 : 1.02kA 10.4
[DEFAULT HEADER ] Primary Phase A-B B-C C-A HELP Voltage 89.0kV 12.2 89.0kV 12.2 89.0kV 12.2 NEXT
[DEFAULT HEADER ] Primary V1 : 89.0kV 12.2 V2 : 89.0kV 12.2 V0 : 89.0kV 12.2
HELP
NEXT
MENU
Page 3 will display either phase or phase to phase values depending on the Measurement Values setting within the Display Option area of the menu. When a power system event occurs the default display is replaced by information about the event as described below. 4.1.1 Fault records During the relay operation for a fault the default display is overwritten by fault information. The Alarm LED flashes to indicate this information and the trip LED operates if a trip has occurred. The display indicates the nature of the fault and accumulates the start or trip information. Each relay element is assigned a field where an indication is placed if that element has operated during the current fault. The placing of the fields within the display is shown below: FAULT RECORD 13 Apr 94 12:00:00:000 Zone:1 1X 2 3 4 Phase: A B C N PSB VTS HELP ACCEPT NEXT MENU Page 1 of 6 {Field1} DEF:INST BU1 BU2 IDMT
{Field2} {Field3} Trans LoL {Field4}
A description for each of the flags that may be placed within the fault record is contained within section 6.2 of this chapter. This section also covers the additional five pages of fault analysis data that are available.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The ACCEPT softkey appears once the elements have reset; pressing this causes the Alarm LED to become permanently on. The function of softkey B then changes to CLEAR; pressing this key clears the fault record and returns to the standard default display. The fault data is still stored as a fault record and is accessible using the menu. For a fault record the fault location, duration, and recorded data are available following the reset of the elements and completion of the fault location calculation. The NEXT softkey is available to allow further examination of the fault. There are five other pages to the fault record containing details of the fault record analysis. If a second fault occurs before the first fault has been cleared it will overwrite the first. This occurs even if the fault location calculation has not been completed for the first fault or if the fault record is being examined using the NEXT softkey. If a trip fault record is removed from the display by a later event which is not a trip then the Trip LED is extinguished. There are two other methods by which a fault record can be cleared from the default display. The first of these is a manual clearance using the remote access software and the Courier language (see section 5). The second of these is by the relay self-resetting feature. The option of self-resetting flags is set under the DISPLAY OPTIONS section of the menu structure. An input from the scheme logic is used to determine that the line is energised and healthy. The displayed record is cleared in the same way as if the CLEAR softkey had been pressed. 4.1.2 Event record A scheme alarm such as PSB or VTS will overwrite the default display or any uncleared fault records providing that the fault is no longer present. If the fault is still present then the alarm is accumulated into the fault record display and also stored as a separate event. The alarm LED flashes for an event record to indicate the presence of data on the LCD display. ALARM RECORD PSB Alarm 13 Apr 94 12:00:00:000
HELP
ACCEPT
MENU
The event can be cleared using the same options as are available for clearance of a fault record; ie., the ACCEPT softkey followed by the CLEAR softkey, the remote reset through Courier, or the self-reset by the scheme logic if enabled. The event is also stored in the event record buffer and is viewable using the Records section of the menu. 4.1.3 Alarm pages The second from bottom line of the display is used to indicate the presence of any uncleared warning messages. This status bar remains clear if no alarm condition exists on the relay. If an
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
alarm occurs the message ALARMS (HOLD HELP TO VIEW) appears, the alarm LED will start to flash. To view the alarm press and hold the HELP softkey for 1 second, the relay will then display an alarm page. This alarm viewing page is of the following format ALARMS AlarmFOR AlarmVTS Page 1 of N
HELP
ACCEPT
PgDn
CLOSE
The softkeys perform the following functions in this page HELP - Pressing this will allow the on-line help text to be accessed. PgDn - This is present if more than one page of alarm messages exists, and allows access to the other pages. CLOSE - Pressing this exits the alarm page to return to the page the alarm page was accessed from, it will leave the alarms unaffected in the alarm page. ACCEPT - The Alarm LED flashes when an alarm occurs; pressing this key causes the LED to become steady, the display changes to that shown below ALARMS AlarmFOR Alarm VTS Page 1 of N
HELP
CLEAR
PgDn
CLOSE
Pressing the CLEAR softkey within this page causes the alarms to be cleared (removed from the alarm page ) and returns to the page that the alarms were accessed from. The alarm pages accumulate all new alarms. Some of these alarms are selfclearing when the cause is removed and some require the ACCEPT/CLEAR key to be used. Alarms may be written to the alarm page for the following reasons: Category 1 The protective function of the relay disabled using the menu structure. These warnings self-reset when the relay is restored to normal operation.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Category 2 Error detected at the relay inputs; eg., non-valid opto-isolator inputs on the LFZR112. These warnings also self-reset. - Group Select Optos Invalid - Parallel Printer Not Ready - Frequency out of Range The Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) indication is a special case of the type 2 error message. This is recorded in the main display as an event and is also placed within the alarm page. The message within the alarm page selfclears when the VTS signal from the scheme logic has reset. This may be due to a self-reset of the VTS by the scheme logic or by a manual reset of the VTS using the CLEAR softkey. The display of the VTS as an event in the main display operates as defined in section 4.1.2. Category 3 Internal self-test error; these are displayed until manually cleared, using the ACCEPT / CLEAR softkey. If the error is still present after being cleared it will be re-asserted by the error detection software. 4.2 Main menu The relay menu can be entered from any of the default displays using softkey D - MENU. The menu has a hierarchical structure, the top level of the menu will be displayed: MENU System Data Display Options Records Measurements Relay Version HELP CLOSE Print Communications Active Group Setting Groups Commission STEP VIEW
When a menu page is first entered none of the items within the page are highlighted, pressing the or STEP key will highlight the first item on the page as shown above. The selected item is highlighted using inverse video, to change the selection use either the STEP softkey or the / keys. To enter an area of the menu select the required item then press either the VIEW softkey or the key on the cruciform keypad. The HELP softkey allows the on-line help facility for the page to be viewed, this operates in the same way for all pages of the relay menu. The CLOSE softkey exits the current page and returns to the default display. The full menu tree structure is defined in Appendix A, Front Panel Menu Tree, setting ranges are defined in Appendix B, Courier Database. The same menu structure is used for all models of the relay. Settings that are not available on certain models are indicated in Appendix B.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.3
Sub-Menus When an option from the main menu page has been selected either a submenu page or a setting/data page will appear (this depends on the number of levels in the selected area of the menu). A sub-menu page allows the user to select from a range of displayed options; an example of a sub-menu is shown below. RECORDS Event Records Fault Records
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
The cruciform keypad and the softkeys have similar functions in a submenu as in the main menu page. Sub-menu pages only perform menu functions; no settings are included on a menu page. The 'CLOSE' softkey will exit the current page and return to the page that the sub-menu page was entered from. Most sub-menu pages follow the above fomat with all the available options being displayed on the menu page. some sub-menus display the selected option only. This is varied/modified when the 'STEP' or arrow keys are used. An example of this is the 'FAULT RECORDS' sub-menu shown below. FAULT RECORDS Fault Record N
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
The value of N changes when the 'STEP' softkey is used. 'N' can also be edited using the cruciform key pad (see Section 4.7). Pressing the 'VIEW' softkey in this case will view the selected fault record. A similar method is used for some of the 'PRINT' sub-menus (see Section 7). 4.4 Setting pages Each of the menu branch structures terminates in a single or number of setting or data pages. These pages allow the relay settings to be examined or edited, and records or data to be examined. Setting changes can only be made using the cruciform keypad. An example of a setting page is shown below:
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Chapter 2 Volume 2 Page 17 of 44 Page 1 of 2 English A1B2 Distance Prot. : **********
SYSTEM DATA Language Password Description : : :
Plant Reference
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
The HELP and CLOSE softkeys have the same function as for the menu page. The other two keys have an alternative function which depends on the area of the menu that the setting page is within. If the menu option terminates in several setting pages then softkeys C and D are allocated as page up (PgUp) and page down (PgDn) functions, these keys will allow all the setting pages within the selected option to be accessed. Certain areas of the menu structure are collected to form arrays of related setting pages, within an array it is possible to move directly between all the linked setting pages without selecting each option individually. This allows all of the settings within the linked area to be examined/edited without selecting each item individually using the menu hierarchy. To allow movement between adjacent, linked areas softkeys C and D become NEXT and PREV. These move to the next or previous linked setting page within the array. The areas of the menu which perform this function are Relay Data, Communications and each of the protection Group Settings. Unlike the menu pages, only the cruciform keypad can be used to move around the setting page to select the setting for editing. To edit a particular setting press the key on the cruciform keypad, this will call up an appropriate setting editor depending on the nature of the setting. For all relay settings except the SETTING GROUPS area of the menu, settings are edited and made active on an individual basis. When the setting editor is exited and the setting change confirmed the setting is stored in non-volatile memory and made active. When the editor has been edited the display will return to the setting page with the highlight bar on the setting that has been edited.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.5
Setting groups The relay can store eight groups of protection settings. When the SETTING GROUPS option of the main menu is selected the following sub-menu page is displayed SETTING GROUPS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
To edit one of the setting groups select the group and press either VIEW or . The settings within that setting group can then be edited, each change that is made is stored within a temporary scratchpad area - the changes are not saved to non-volatile memory or placed into service. The operation of the relay when closing out of the protection setting group will depend on whether any of the settings have been changed. If the settings are viewed and not changed then after closing the Setting Group page shown above appear. If the group settings have been modified then a setting trap is used to save/activate the setting changes. 4.6 Setting trap If the settings are changed within the group to be edited then, after exiting the menu using the CLOSE softkey to return to the SETTING GROUPS page, the following display appears SAVE AS GROUP Save as Group 1
HELP
ABORT
SAVE
This page allows the setting changes that have been made to be abandoned (ABORT) or saved (SAVE). The default group to save the changes to is that selected to edit originally. The SAVE function transfers the setting changes from volatile to non-volatile memory and if the save is to the currently active group then the new settings are then activated. To select to save the settings to a different group highlight the Save As Group option then press the key. This will allow the group number to be edited from 1 to 8 using the standard numeric editor (see section 4.7.4). When the editor
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
has been edited the SAVE and ABORT softkeys will re-appear allowing the changes to be save to the selected group. If the save causes the active group to be modified the Protection Available LED is extinguished for a short period of time while the protection settings are updated. 4.7 Setting editor When the key is pressed to edit a setting an editor will be entered, the operation of the editor will depend upon the nature of the setting to be edited. Data falls into one of the following categories Indexed string Text string Modem control strings Numeric Complex, floating point achieved by repeatedly pressing the key. Once the cursor is within the edit string the / keys can be used to move the cursor to the required position, pressing BkSp will delete the character to the left of the cursor position. To insert characters the cursor should be moved to the required location within the edit string as described above. Then, press the key to move the cursor to the character table, the edit marker will remain in the edit string. The four arrow keys on the cruciform pad can now be used to move the cursor within the character table. Pressing the key will insert the currently highlighted character into the edit string at the position of the marker. Once the edit string reaches its maximum length it is no longer possible to insert additional characters until some have been deleted. This may sometimes occur due to trailing space characters at the end of the edit string. When the editing has been completed the change can be confirmed or aborted using the softkeys. 4.7.3 Modem Control Strings There are several text strings used to provide modem control. These perform modem initialisation, disconnection and dialling. Due to the different commands required for different manufacturers modems these strings are user programmable. In addition to the standard ASCII text, certain non-printing control characters are required. SETTING: [w10]AT&F[CR][wOK] @ 0x40 A 0x41 B 0x42 C 0x43
HELP
CANCEL
CONTROL
CONFIRM
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The above edit screen allows the string to be edited, this operates using a similar method as the text string editor defined in section 4.7.2. Instead of the character table the available characters appear as a list with the hex character code next to the character. The control characters appear within the list after the standard ASCII characters, they are represented by an abbreviation, hex code and a short text description as shown below. SETTING: [w10]AT&F[CR][wOK]
[CR] 0x0D Carriage Return
[SO] [SI] [DLE] HELP
0x0E 0x0F 0x10
Shift Out Shift In Data Link Esc Device Control 1 CONTROL CONFIRM
[DC1] 0x11
CANCEL
When the control characters are inserted within the edit string they are represented using the abbreviation shown, during the editing each control character will be edited as a single character, the complete list of control characters is listed below, this contains ASCII control characters in addition to the modem control characters.
Code 80h 81h 82h 83h 90h 91h 98h 99h 0A0h 0A1h 0A2h 0A3h 0AFh 0B0h 0B1h 0B2h 0B3h 0C0h 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h Abbr [w1] [w2] [w5] [w10] [wOK] [wVAL] [wCON] [wCNX] [d10] [d20] [d50] [d100] [d0] [-DTR] [+DTR] [-RTS] [+RTS] [#] [NUL] [SOH] [STX] [ETX] [EOT] [ENQ] [ACK] [BEL] [BS] Display Descriptor Wait for 1 s Wait for 2 s Wait for 5 s Wait for 10 s Wait for OK Wait for VAL Wait for Connect Wait for CNX Char Delay 10ms Char Delay 20ms Char Delay 50ms Char Delay 100ms No Char Delay Deactivate DTR Activate DTR Deactivate RTS Activate RTS Telephone No Null Start of Header Start of Text End of Text End of Transmission Enquiry Acknowledge Bell Backspace Description Wait for 1 Second Wait for 2 Seconds Wait for 5 Seconds Wait for 10 Seconds Wait for OK response Wait for VAL response Wait for Connect ???? response Wait for CNX response Delay for 10ms between characters Delay for 20ms between characters Delay for 50ms between characters Delay for 100ms between characters No delay between characters (default) Deactivate DTR Activate DTR Deactivate RTS Activate RTS Place holder for Telephone Number Null Start of Header Start of Text End of Text End of Transmission Enquiry Acknowledge Bell Backspace
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Horizontal Tab Line Feed Vertical Tab Form Feed Carriage Return Shift Out Shift In Data Link Escape Device control 1 Device control 2(XON) Device control 3 Device control 4(XOFF) Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End of Tx Block Cancel End of Medium Substitute Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Horizontal Tab Line Feed Vertical Tab Form Feed Carriage Return Shift Out Shift In Data Link Escape Device control 1 Device control 2, (XON) Device control 3 Device control 4 (XOFF) Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End of Transmission Block Cancel End of Medium Substitute Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator
09h 0Ah 0Bh 0Ch 0Dh 0Eh 0Fh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 1Ah 1Bh 1Ch 1Dh 1Eh 1Fh
[HT] [LF] [VT] [FF] [CR] [SO] [SI] [DLE] [DC1] [DC2] [DC3] [DC4] [NAK] [SYN] [ETB] [CAN] [EM] [SUB] [ESC] [FS] [GS] [RS] [US]
It should be noted that the characters 0A0h to 0AFh (inter-character delays) are not implemented within the current version of the LFZR100 series of relays. It is possible to enter these characters within the modem control strings, however they will be ignored and thus have no effect on the sending of the control string to the modem. 4.7.4 Numeric editor DEF BACKUP DEF BackUp1: BU1 Direction: BU1 Pickup BU1 Delay : : Enabled Forward
5.00
Page 1 of 2
2.00 s
HELP
CANCEL
CONFIRM
All numeric settings are edited within the setting page to a resolution of 3 significant digits. The value of the number is edited by ramping either up or down within the limits of the setting. The step used for ramping is determined by the digit that is highlighted. When the editor is first entered the leftmost digit within the number is highlighted, pressing the / keys will increment or decrement the number in steps of the highlighted digit. To alter the rate of ramping the highlighted digit can be moved using the / keys. The decimal point will move depending on the value of the number being edited.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
To reduce the size of the number displayed, the units change where appropriate. The following scalar multipliers are available and are used for the display and editing of all floating point numbers Multiplier 10-18 10-15 10-12 10-9 10-6 10-3 10-0 10+3 10+6 10+9 10+12 10+15 10+18 k M G T P E Scalar Prefix a f p n u m
The scalar is displayed directly in front of the unit following the value. Note these multipliers are used for all displayed values even if the unit of the displayed number is not a scaleable SI unit. 4.7.5 Complex numbers Many of the relay impedance settings are in complex terms. A menu setting allows these settings to be viewed and edited using either rectangular or polar forms. The two parts of the complex number are modified using a single editor. The polar form editor is shown below ZONE 1 Phase Reach Phase Pickup : 10.0 70.0 : 0.05 A Page 1 of 2
HELP
CANCEL
CONFIRM
When the editor is entered the most significant digit of the magnitude setting is highlighted. The magnitude can be ramped up and down using the / arrow keys and edited in the same way as floating point numbers. The magnitude setting will always be a positive number. If the right key is pressed again after the least significant digit of the
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
magnitude has been reached then the angle setting can be altered. This angle is displayed as a fixed point number and is settable in a similar way with a resolution of 0.1. Depending upon the limits for this angle setting this can be negated by decrementing the number through zero. It is all possible to view/edit complex numbers in rectangular form using the setting in the Display Options area of the menu. The number will be edited in the following way: ZONE 1 Phase Reach Phase Pickup : +4.00 +j24.0 : 0.05 A Page 1 of 2
HELP
CANCEL
CONFIRM
Editing of the complex number in rectangular form is slightly different. The two parts of the number are modified using the cruciform keys to ramp at a selectable rate in the same way as the floating point numbers. Again depending on the limit for the complex vector it may be possible to set one of the complex terms to a negative value. However, when the confirm key is pressed the resultant polar vector must lie within the predefined limits. If the rectangular form is outside these limits the resistive part of the number is corrected to the closest allowable value before the setting is confirmed. The message Values Adjusted into Limits message will briefly appear on the status bar to indicate the correction has been made. The new setting should be checked to ensure that the required change to the setting has been made. Most of the complex relay settings are for setting the reach of the relays distance elements. The level to which these can be set depends on the Custom Options setting within the Distance Options page of the menu. If Custom Options are disabled then a single setting (Angle Setting) for the relay characteristic angle is applied to the relay settings. A single residual compensation (Residual Setting) factor is also applied to all zones. In this case the angle setting and residual reach for the individual zones are not editable. They will be calculated by the relay based on the reach of the element and the angle and residual settings. If Custom Options are set to enabled each zone has an independently settable angle and residual reach setting.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.8
Help pages Each menu and setting/data page of the menu structure points to an area of help text which can be accessed using softkey D. An example of the help page structure is shown below. HELP Language Use to edit selection of language used by relay. Password Use to edit password used for Courier communications, this password is used to restrict remote access to settings. CLOSE PgDn Page 1 of 3
Within a menu or setting page the help text will contain summary information as to the function of each item on the page. A brief description on the menu operation is contained in the help for the default display. The PgUp and PgDn softkeys operate as in the setting pages. The CLOSE softkey returns the user to the page that the help was called from.
SECTION 5. REMOTE ACCESS USER INTERFACE

5.1 Introduction The remote access system is based on the ALSTOM T&D, Protection & Control Ltd. Courier communications language. This generic language has been developed to provide remote control, monitoring, data extraction and setting changes for protective relays within the sub-station environment. The language consists of a standard set of commands that act upon a database of settings and data that is specific to the relay. The Courier language and its communication medium supports connection to several devices simultaneously. This is achieved by allocating a unique address to each relay, the relay will only respond to commands that are either global or specifically directed to it. The relay is referred to as a slave device since it can never initiate communication, it can only respond to a request from the master device. The remote user interface is accessed by a PC installed with Courier based access software. This software polls all relays connected to its system and allows the user to retrieve information from each relay by extracting the contents of its database. It also allows authorised users to make setting changes to the relay. ALSTOM T&D, Protection & Control Ltd. can supply remote access software for use on a standard IBM compatible PC. Alternatively, third party software developed for data acquisition can be connected to collect data for data logging equipment; eg., SCADA.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Typical features of a remote access system are: To provide the user with the ability to examine the relays menu. The remote system can present the user with a list of available sections first. By selecting a particular section its contents can then be displayed. The remote system can normally display an entire page (window) of the section titles or the section contents at once. Remote metering. The measurement values, which can be displayed on the front of the relay, can be regularly polled and stored to disk. They can also be graphically displayed on the screen of the PC. Automatic extraction of events and fault records. A sequential list of events can be captured automatically and displayed on the screen as they occur. They can also be stored on to the disk and later printed. Disturbance recorder. Disturbance records can be extracted and stored for further analysis. It is also possible for the access software to detect the presence of disturbance records as they occur and automatically extract them. These waveforms are available in the COMTRADE format. Remote change of settings. If the remote setting change facility is enabled in the relay then settings can be changed remotely. Transfer settings from or to the relay. The relay supports a setting transfer mode which allows a complete record of all settings to be transferred, regardless of the current configuration. A Windows based software program, LFZRCOM, is also available from ALSTOM T&D, Protection & Control Ltd. This allows settings to be edited off-line then transferred to the relay. This section of the manual describes the use of the LFZR menu assuming that access software is being used to interrogate the relay. It does not describe the Courier commands that are used to implement this, for more information on the Courier language the Courier User Guide, document R6512 should be referred to. This section also includes instructions as to the use of modems with the LFZR series of relays including the dialback security feature. 5.2 Courier database As has been described the Courier language consists of a standard set of commands which act upon a database which is specific to a relay. When using the access software it is not necessary to understand the commands that are being issued. This section describes the general format of a Courier database and explains the layout of the database implemented within the LFZR100 series. 5.2.1 General features of a Courier database The database is 2 dimensional with data being logically grouped together in columns, each column has a text header (in the first row). As an example all measured values or all settings related to a particular function may be placed in a single column. Each item within a column has a text descriptor and associated data, this is referred to as a cell. Depending on the attributes of the cell the data within the cell may or may not be modifiable. Modifying the value of a cell can be used to make a setting change or to perform a command. A more detailed description of the structure of a Courier database and the
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
commands used to interrogate it can be found in the Courier User Guide R5912. To access the database the relay must first be selected from a list of all connected slave devices. The column headers then appear as a list, the contents of a column can be viewed by selection of the appropriate header. This will produce a list of the cells within the column and includes the text descriptor and the value for each cell within the column. Using the same method a particular cell can be selected from the list for editing. 5.2.2 LFZR100 series database Refer to appendix B for reference to the structure of the Courier Database. The database for all models of the relay is the same. Cells associated with functions that are not implemented on all models are invisible if appropriate. The database can be separated into three areas: System data, metering, records and global settings These cells are visible at all times. Eight groups of relay protection settings Only one group is visible normally. The visible group is controlled by cells within the area defined below. Cells used to provide control and editing of the protection setting groups These cells are visible at all times and are contained within the Group Control column (Column reference 0Fh) The System Data column of the database is standard to all Courier devices and contains important information that is used to identify the relay to the access software. Other areas of the database are not normally accessed by the user directly, instead they are used by the access software to perform standard functions. These include the Disturbance recorder control and extraction columns, and the Communication System Data column. The remainder of the data base contains settings and data and can be browsed and modified by the user. 5.3. Courier passwords The Courier interface utilises two types of password. The first of these is used to prevent access to the protection settings. The second is used to re-address the relay. To be able to modify the relay settings or use the commissioning tests the user must correctly enter a four character Courier password. The relay settings are visible but not settable if the password has not been set. To set the password first select the System Data column using the Access Software, the second item within the column is the relay password. The correct value of this cell is not visible and is instead represented as ****. The password protection is unlocked by setting this cell to the correct value using the access software, to ensure security the value of the cell is not visible via the remote interface even when password protection has been unlocked. To change the relay password using the remote software the password unlock must first be removed using the method described above. Changing the setting of the password cell again allows a new password to be set. The password unlock can be removed by resetting the password cell. If no setting changes are
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
made to the database for a set period of time the password unlock will self reset. This is the Inactivity Timer the setting for which can be found within the Communications area of the relay menu.
If this password is lost and access is required please contact your local ALSTOM representative.
To modify the address of the relay remotely the full relay serial number is required, this is a six digit one alpha number. 5.4 Data cells There are cells within the database which cannot be set, these contain data allowing the relay hardware and software configuration and stored information to be viewed. Some of these cells, such as those that related to the relay configuration, will always contain the same data. Others, such as those used for accessing stored records, can be controlled using a settable cell to index the record being examined. There are other cells containing the current date and time and measurement values that are continually updated by the relay. 5.5 Editing Settings As has been covered earlier the settings within the database can be split, some of the settings are global and can be individually modified. The protection settings however form a linked group and the editing of these must take this fact into account. 5.5.1 Global settings Settings and commands for the following features are included within the global area: System Data - System and relay identifiers also allows the nominal system frequency to be set. Display Options - control the display of protection settings and measurements. Communications - Configures the remote interface Printer settings and commands Settings and commands for event storage and viewing Commissioning Test options Any setting changes within the global area are implemented on confirmation of the change, depending on the nature of the setting it may be password protected. To edit cells that are password protected the password lock must first be removed as described earlier. 5.5.2 Protection settings The relay supports eight groups of protection settings, a single group consists of the columns from Line Parameters ( Column ref. 10h) to Disturbance Setup (Column ref 19h). These columns are repeated eight times within the database, however in normal use only one group of protection settings will be visible. Control of the protection settings is achieved using the Group Control column (Column ref. 0Fh). Unlike global settings the protection settings are not implemented when edited. Instead all modifications to the group being edited are stored within a
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
temporary scratchpad area. These changes can then be confirmed and implemented using the Group Control column. 5.5.2.1 Selection of Group for Editing To create/edit a group of protection settings first select the group to be used as a starting point. Any of the eight groups can be selected since the changes are stored in a temporary scratchpad area and can be saved to any of the groups. To select the group used as the start point first select Group Control then from the column select Edit Group. This setting is not password protected and can be set from 1 to 8 allowing the selected group to be viewed and edited. 5.5.2.2 Editing the Selected Group To be able to edit any of the protection settings the relay password protection must be unlocked as described earlier. The protection settings include the following columns: Line Parameters - allows the line details such as length, transformer ratios, mode of tripping to be set Aided Scheme - allows the distance and directional earth fault schemes to be selected and configured. Distance Options - allows global settings that effect all the distance zone to be set, also controls the level of detail for the distance settings. Basic Scheme - allows the tripping of the 5 distance zones to be set including the time delay for delay zones. Distance Settings - allows the reach settings and options for all distance zones to be set. Depending on the settings within the Distance Options column some of the settings within this column may not be editable, instead they will be automatically selected by the relay. DEF Settings - allows the direction element to be set and the DEF basic scheme options and delays to be selected. Extra Features - includes settings for the following functions: tripping following breaker closure, instantaneous overcurrent tripping, power swing blocking, loss of load tripping and voltage transformer supervision. Output Contacts - allows the signals that are mapped to the programmable output contacts to be selected. Fault Locator - settings for the integral fault location algorithm. Disturbance Recorder - configures the size, sample rate, trigger conditions and monitored digital signals for the integral disturbance recorder. A brief description of the function of each of the relay protection settings can be found in Appendix B of this manual. Once setting changes have been made to a protection setting group the edit group cell should not be edited until these changes have been saved to a group or aborted. 5.5.2.4 Saving Protection Settings When all setting changes have been made they can be saved to any one of the eight groups, this is performed using the Save As cell within the Group Control column. To save to a particular group edit the Save As cell and set it
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
to the required group number, an option also exists to abandon all the setting changes at this point. The edit protection settings are confirmed and saved to non-volatile memory. If the settings have been saved to the active group then the protection elements will be disabled as the new settings are applied, this is evident by the Protection Available LED being extinguished for a short period of time. Whilst the remote software is being used to edit settings within the currently selected edit group the relay settings are locked out to prevent editing by the front panel interface. 5.5.3 Active setting group Only one of the eight protection setting groups can be active at any instant in item. The Active Group cell within the Group Control column can be used to view and change which of the eight groups is active. This cell is password protected, editing the cell will cause the selected group of protection settings to be applied to the relay. The relay protection available LED will be extinguished briefly as the protection parameters are being updated. 5.6 Event extraction The LFZR series of relays support the standard mechanism for event and fault record extraction. The access software is used to poll the relay on a regular basis. When event or fault records occur the access software is able to extract the events automatically. The events may be displayed on the VDU or stored to a file. It is also possible to manually view the fault and event records stored within the relay. Event records can be accessed via the View Events column (reference 02h) and faults via the View Faults column (reference 03h). To select the fault/ event to be viewed a setting exists in row 1 of each column, these settings are not password protected. To view the latest record this cell should be set to 0, increasing the value of this setting allows the older fault records to be viewed. Once this cell has been set the remainder of the column will then contain the information related to this fault/event. 5.7 Disturbance record extraction This follows the standard method of extraction, this allows the stored records to be extracted and stored using the Comtrade format. Depending on the software being used for extraction it will be possible to extract all records automatically, or to select any particular record from those stored. The number of records that are stored by the relay is variable depending on the size of each record and the amount of storage space. Refer to the operating instructions for the access software being used for disturbance record extraction. 5.8 Use of modems The rear serial port of the relay is suitable for permanent connection to a modem, the port is both isolated and supports the handshaking lines required for modem communications. In addition to this the relay menu offers features to support the modem.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.8.1
Selection of modem The relay communications can be configured to operate with a wide selection of modems, however the selection of modem may place restrictions on the communication parameters used. The following parameters should be considered: Frame Size - The IEC 60870 FT1.2 protocol used by the relay consists of an eleven bit frame, to use this protocol via a modem the modem must support this frame size. A 10 bit version of the protocol can be selected (IEC 60870 but with no parity bit), this is less secure but allows a wider selection of modems to be used. Idle Period - It is a requirement that the dataframes are transmitted with no idle periods, for this reason the intermodem link must be at the same baud rate as the link to the relay. It must also be possible to disable all error correction, data compression, speed buffering or automatic speed changes. Baud Rate - The relay is capable of communication at up to 19200 baud, the modem may cause a restriction on the baud rate used. It should be noted that although some modems support an eleven bit frame for communications the commands must be sent to the relay using a ten bit frame size. The relay allows for this by allowing the baud rate and framing protocol use for sending the strings to be different from those used during normal communication.
5.8.2
Connection to modem It is necessary for the hardware handshaking lines to be connected between the relay serial port SK4 and the modem. The connection details for this link are described in section 3.3.3 of this chapter.
5.8.3
Modem control strings The relay is capable of storing control codes which can be used to set-up and control the local modem. Four Modem control strings are stored to allow initialisation, starting, dialling, and hang-up. The relay provides two additional settings under the modem set-up section of the menu. These allow the baud rate and framing protocol to be applied when communicating with the modem. The relay then switches back to using the usual IEC 60870 settings after the modem control string has been issued. Each modem control string consists of eight bit characters and has a maximum length of 64 characters. The string supports Characters with the MSB set are interpreted as control characters indicating special actions that may be required during the set-up or dialling procedure. These actions are taken by the DTE controlling the DCE. Other characters are ASCII characters (in the range 0 to 7Fh) that are sent to the modem.
5.8.3.1 Modem control characters 80h 81h 82h 83h 90h 91h Wait for 1 Second Wait for 2 Seconds Wait for 5 Seconds Wait for 10 Seconds Wait for OK response (Hayes AT response) Wait for VAL response (CCITT V25bis response)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
98h 99h 0A0h 0A1h 0A2h 0A3h 0AFh 0B0h 0B1h 0B2h 0B3h 0C0h 0FFh Notes:
Wait for Connect ???? response (Hayes AT response - see note) Wait for CNX response (CCITT V25bis) Delay for 10ms between characters* Delay for 20ms between characters* Delay for 50ms between characters* Delay for 100ms between characters* No delay between characters (default)* Deactivate DTR Activate DTR Deactivate RTS Activate RTS Place holder for Telephone Number End of Control String
As the baud rate used is not fixed, the baud rate reported in the connect message is variable and is shown in the above table as ????. It is not necessarily four characters in size. Control switches for DTR and RTS are included to allow the lines to be toggled during the set-up or dialling procedures. * The control characters indicated are not implemented on this version of the relay and will be ignored, however they are supported by the modem control string editor. It should be noted that many modems have restricted command buffers (40 characters is common) and a long command string should be broken by using the modem control characters to give the modem time to process the data. 5.8.3.2 Function of modem control strings The relay supports four modem control strings, these are used in the following circumstances: Initialisation String This string is sent on request by the user when Init Modem is selected, its function is to perform the set-up for the modem. Start String The start string is sent when one of the other three modem control strings is sent. It is sent prior to the other string being sent. Dial String The dial string is only used when dialback is enabled, and is sent when the relay dials the master device. Disconnect String This string is also only used during dialback, it is sent to the modem when the relay wishes to disconnect the link.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.9
Dial-back This feature allows the security of the Courier interface to be further improved by restricting remote communication to master devices at pre-selected locations. It requires both the relay and the master device to support dialback and both be directly connected to a modem. When selected, communication with the relay can only be established by the relay dialling back to a stored telephone number.
5.9.1
Dialback Settings The relay can store up to 32 telephone numbers, these are referenced by a site identifier and a line number. A Courier master device can have up to eight incoming lines, thus four sites each with eight lines can be referenced. The relay is capable of dialling back to any of these 32 numbers depending on the selector sent when the master device initiates the connection. The relay also supports several timer settings to control the operations of the dialback function. These are detailed below: Call Place Delay - This specifies the time the relay will wait for the ringing indication to be received following the dialling being completed. Connection Delay - This specifies the time the relay will wait for the connection to be made following the ringing indication being received. Phone Recovery Time - This specifies the time the relay will wait, following the line being hung, before attempting to dial. Number Transmit Time - this timer is not used by a slave device, the setting will not effect operation These settings and the telephone numbers should be set correctly before attempting remote communication with the dialback feature enabled.
5.9.2
Telephone numbers The Hayes format for telephone numbers is used 0-9*#ABCD Characters to dial (*#ABCD only accepted when tone dialling) P T ,(comma) ! @ W R Use pulse dialling Use tone dialling Delay - typically 2 seconds Hook flash - Short hang up - needed to access some PBX features Wait for quiet answer Wait for dial tone for (typically) 2 seconds Reverse dial - call an originate only modem (must be last character)
The telephone number is inserted in the dialling string at the point indicated by the telephone number placeholder to create the dialling control string for that number. 5.9.3 Dialback operation If the dialback function is enabled the relay will ignore all Courier commands
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
until the dialback operation has been completed. This prevents unauthorised access to the relay settings and data. The following sequence of events must occur before communication with the relay can be established. With dialback enabled on the master software attempt to connect to the relay, the software will display a dialogue box requesting the following information: 1. 2. Telephone number - this is the number of the modem connected to the LFZR relay. Site reference - this is a text string for the location of the master device and should have been set into one of the relay site reference settings previously. Line number This can be set from 1 to 8 and should reference the telephone number for the master station modem that has been previously set within the LFZR relay.
3.
These identifiers are sent to the relay, if this is a valid reference it will acknowledge the message and continue the dialback sequence. If the identifiers are valid the dialback sequence will proceed, if not the access software will display a warning that the reference was incorrect. The connection between the relay and the master device is then closed, the master will then wait for the relay to dialback using the telephone number referenced by the dialback selector. If this is correct then the connection will be remade by the relay dialling the master allowing Courier communication to begin. The access software will wait for the relay to connect, in the event of the relay not dialling back correctly an error will be indicated.
SECTION 6.
RECORDS
The relay is capable of storing three differing type of records Event records The sequence of event recorder is capable of storing all changes of status of protection elements, opto inputs, relay contacts, setting changes and error messages. The selection of which of these are stored is menu selectable. Fault records These accumulate fault information during a fault and are seen on the default display when they occur. They are also available using the RECORDS section of the menu. Disturbance records The relay stores 9 analogue channels and 32 selectable digital channels, the duration, sample rate and trigger conditions for the disturbance record is menu selectable. The disturbance records are extracted through Courier and stored using the standard Comtrade format. The event and fault records are closely linked as they monitor and store the relay operation. The disturbance recorder functions independently of the protection function although it may be triggered by it.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.1
Event Records The relay records and makes available, for local or remote display or print-out, time-tagged details of any chosen event. It is possible to completely disable the event recording feature using the Event trigger section of the menu. If set to enabled the following options to control the level of event recording are available. All changes of status of the protection elements will be recorded, each of the following categories can be menu selected to be stored: The opening or closing of any output contact The receipt of any signal to a relay opto-isolator input The issue of a scheme alarm (eg., PSB or VTS) The change of any setting or selection of a new setting group The issue of a relay self-test error (eg., DSP program memory error)
The relay stores at least 48 events in chronological order. It is possible to view any or all of the stored records. Note that they are stored in non-volatile memory. When the available record storage space is exhausted the relay automatically deletes the oldest record to make room for the new one. Some of the recorded events are indicated by the default display, this is described in the Section 4.1.2. Other events are placed into the event record log only and are not displayed on the default display. The relay reacts to events in the following way Protection starts and trips from the scheme logic either cause a fault record to be initiated or accumulate in a currently active fault record. PSB and VTS cause an event record to be displayed. VTS is added to the status bar as an error condition. These conditions must be displayed even if they are not recorded as events. Self-test errors are added to the alarm page. These are displayed even if they have not been selected to be recorded as events. Errors at the relay inputs such as frequency out of range and optos invalid (for LFZR112) are placed into the alarm page.
Using the EVENT RECORD section of the menu structure the user is able to view the stored event records. The most recent record is viewed first with the older records appearing further down the list. A typical event record page is shown below EVENT RECORD Page 1 of 6 13 Apr 94 12:33:12:014 TrZone 2: ON 13 Apr 94 12:33:11:512 StZone 2: ON 13 Apr 94 12:33:11:511 StZone 3: ON 13 Apr 94 12:33:11:500 Opto 97-99: ON 13 Apr 94 12:33:11:398 AlarmPSB: OFF HELP CLOSE PgUp PgDn
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Using the PgUp and PgDn softkeys all the stored records can be viewed. Protection Starts and Trips The following table lists all the event records that are produced by the relay for operation of the protection starts and trips.
Event Zone 1X Start Zone 2 Start Zone 3 Start Zone 4 Start DEF Backup 1 Start DEF Backup 2 Start DEF IDMT Start Zone 1 Trip Zone 1X Trip Zone 2 Trip Zone 3 Trip Zone 4 Trip DEF Instantaneous Trip DEF Backup 1 Trip DEF Backup 2 Trip DEF IDMT Trip Instantaneous overcurrent Trip Stub Bus Trip Switch-onto-fault Trip on Reclose Transfer Trip Aided Trip Distance Aided Trip DEF Aided Trip Weak Infeed Aided Trip DEF Weak Infeed Aided Trip Distance Weak Infeed Aided Trip Loss-of-load Trip A Phase Fault B Phase Fault C Phase Fault Ground Fault Operate StZone1X: ON StZone2: ON StZone3: ON StZone4: ON StDEFBU1: ON StDEFBU2: ON StFDEFIDMT: ON TrZone1: ON TrZone1X: ON TrZone2: ON TrZone3: ON TrZone4: ON TrDEFInst: ON TrDEFBU1: ON TrDEFBU2: ON TrFDEFIDMT: ON TrInstOC: ON TrStubBus: ON TrSOTF: ON TrTOR: ON TrTransfer: ON TrAided: ON TrDistAid: ON TrDEFAid: ON TrWIAid: ON TrWIDEFAid: ON TrWIDistAid: ON TrLOL: ON FltAPh: ON FltBPh: ON FltCPh: ON FltN: ON Reset StZone1X: OFF StZone2: OFF StZone3: OFF StZone4: OFF StDEFBU1: OFF StDEFBU2: OFF StDEFIDMT: OFF TrZone1: OFF TrZone1X: OFF TrZone2: OFF TrZone3: OFF TrZone4: OFF TrDEFInst: OFF TrDEFBU1: OFF TrDEFBU2: OFF TrDEFIDMT: OFF TrInstOC: OFF TrStubBus: OFF TrSOTF: OFF TrTOR: OFF TrTransfer: OFF TrAided: OFF TrDistAid: OFF TrDEFAid: OFF TrWIAid: OFF TrWIDEFAid: OFF TrWIDistAid: OFF TrLOL: OFF FltAPh: OFF FltBPh: OFF FltCPh: OFF FltN: OFF
The four faulted phase indication flags use the user settable phase notations defined in the Display Options section of the menu. Contacts The relay records an event for each change of state of a contact. The contact naming convention is that used for the assignment of the contacts. For example 21 Jun 1995 14:34:23:145 Contact 37-39: ON 21 Jun 1995 14:34:23:569 Contact 37-39: OFF
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Opto-isolator inputs
The relay records an event for each change of state of the opto-isolator inputs. A similar naming convention to that for the contacts is used. For example 21 Jun 1995 14:34:25:243 Opto 85-87: ON 21 Jun 1995 14:34:25:781 Opto 85-87: OFF Scheme Alarms The following table details the event text that is stored for operation of a scheme alarm.
Signal Voltage Transformer Supervision Power Swing Blocking Circuit Breaker Fail Channel 1 Out of Service Channel 2 Out of Service Frequency out of Range Operate AlarmVTS: ON AlarmPSB: ON AlarmCBF: ON AlarmCOS1: ON AlarmCOS2: ON AlarmFOR: ON Reset AlarmVTS: OFF AlarmPSB: OFF AlarmCBF: OFF AlarmCOS1: OFF AlarmCOS2: OFF AlarmFOR: OFF
Change of Setting Setting changes are split into three different categories of change, each with its accompanying event record text Active Settings Updated (N) This is raised every time the relay downloads settings. N is the active setting group number following the change. Setting Group N Updated This is raised when a settings group is saved into non-volatile memory. N is the number of the group that has been edited. Global Settings Updated This is raised every time a setting outside the setting groups is saved to nonvolatile memory. Some setting changes may cause two of the above events to be created; e.g., editing the currently active setting group. The first event is created when the edited setting group is saved to non-volatile memory. The second event is created when the new protection settings are downloaded to the protection processor board. IRIG-B Input If the IRIG-B sync is enabled then a change of status of the IRIG-B input is recorded as an event ( see section 8). The following event record is stored under these circumstances Event Loss of IRIG-B sync Restart of IRIG-B sync Recorded Text Clock is RTC Clock is IRIG
The recorded event text for a relay self-test error is of a similar format.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
6.2
Fault records When a fault occurs, causing a relay start or trip, a fault record including relay indications and fault analysis is recorded. It is possible to view or print out any or all of these fault records independently of the other event records. The fault records can be viewed via the front panel menu or the Courier interface using the fault records section of the menu. In addition the most recent fault record will be placed within the default display as described in section 4.1.1. Both fault and event records can be automatically extracted as they occur using the Courier interface and appropriate access software (Section 5). Each fault record includes time-tagged details of relay trips, faulted phase(s), trip type, and fault location. The record also includes the system frequency, prefault and fault currents and voltages, and positive-, negative- and zerosequence quantities. All are expressed as magnitude and phase angle. It is possible to select using the menu to display either primary or secondary quantities and either phase to ground or phase to phase values (front panel only). When a relay protection element starts a fault record is created and stored in the non-volatile event log. All protection starts are also stored as events even when recorded within the fault record. The fault record accumulates all operated elements and phase selection during the fault. The final flagging in the fault record showing the operated elements are fixed when all the starting and tripping elements have reset. The 1ms resolution time-tag for the fault record is the time at which the relay start elements first operate for the fault. Any further events that occur during the fault are stored in the event list as they occur. A second start element does not cause another fault record to be created whilst the first fault record storage is still active; ie., it is accumulated within the first record. If the fault remains for a period of time such that one of the elements that has started performs a trip, then this trip information is inserted into the fault record. All the start information, except for the fault time-tag, is removed from the fault record at this time; the fault record begins to accumulate all trip information. If all the protection elements reset without the relay performing a trip then the fault record is completed with the start information retained. When the fault locator has completed its calculation this information is passed into the fault record to complete it. The additional pages are then available from the default display and the fault record is available for viewing using the fault record section of the menu. All the records are printed and extracted in chronological order which may require some events to be held waiting for an earlier fault record to be completed. If the fault locator detects that the fault is outside the protected line then the relay indicates the following for the distance-to-fault: Reverse Fault -1k% -1kmile -1kkm -1k Forward Fault 1k% 1kmile 1kkm 1k
The above options indicate the display for each format that the fault location can be displayed in.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The FAULT RECORDS section of the menu structure allows the stored fault records to be viewed from the LCD display. A typical fault record is shown below. Due to the amount of information, the fault record is spread over several pages. FAULT RECORD Page 1 of 6 13 Apr 94 12:00:00:000 {Field1} Zone:1 1X 2 3 4 DEF:INST BU1 BU2 IDMT {Field2} {Field3} Trans LoL {Field4} Phase: A B C N PSB VTS HELP CLOSE PgDn PREV
FAULT RECORD Page 2 of 6 Location : 12 km Duration : 67 ms Operate Time : 24 ms System Frequency : 50.1 Hz
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
FAULT RECORD Page 3 of 6 Primary: Prefault Values Phase Voltage Current A 89.0kV 12.2 1.02kA 10.4 B 89.0kV 12.2 1.02kA 10.4 C 89.0kV 12.2 1.02kA 10.4 HELP CLOSE PgDn Page 4 of 6 PgUp
FAULT RECORD
Primary: Prefault Values V1: 89.0kV 12.2 I1: 1.02kA 10.4 V2: 89.0kV 12.2 I2: 1.02kA 10.4 V0: 89.0kV 12.2 I0: 1.02kA 10.4 HELP CLOSE PgDn 5 of 6 Current 1.02kA 10.4 1.02kA 10.4 1.02kA 10.4 PgDn PgUp PgUp
FAULT RECORD Page Primary: Fault Values Phase Voltage A 89.0kV 12.2 B 89.0kV 12.2 C 89.0kV 12.2 HELP CLOSE
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
FAULT RECORD Page 6 of 6 Primary: Prefault Values V1: 89.0kV 12.2 I1: 1.02kA 10.4 V2: 89.0kV 12.2 I2: 1.02kA 10.4 V0: 89.0kV 12.2 I0: 1.02kA 10.4
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
Using the Display Options section of the menu it is possible to display the values as phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground, and as secondary or primary values. The phase label is also user defined within this section of the menu. The same information is available using the fault record column of the Courier database. Within this column the fault record can be selected by setitng the record number cell in row 1, 0 corresponds to the most recent record. The flagging information for the relay is composed of several pieces of data whether the event is a trip or start faulted phases (if available) the operating element(s)
The date and time correspond to the first protective element that operates due to the fault. A description of the various fields appear below Field1 Start, Trip, SOTF, TOR This depends on whether the fault record is created for a start, trip, trip on reclose (following auto-reclosure), or switch-onto-fault (following manual reclose). A fault is identified as a start if a protective element has operated but no trip has occurred. If a trip has been recorded then start information is not recorded on the display. Field2 and Field3 These are used to indicate if the channel-aided scheme has performed a trip. If there has been no channel-aided scheme trip they are both blank. Field3 can be Aided or WI Aided for a weak infeed trip. Field 2 is used to indicate which channel-aided scheme has tripped. This may be Dist for distance only, DEF for directional earth fault channel-aided schemes and Dist+DEF if both schemes have produced a trip. Field4 This is used to indicate a Stub Bus or instantaneous overcurrent (Inst OC) trip. These options are mutually exclusive on the menu, thus only one can occur. Zone information If one or more distance protection zones have operated within the basic scheme the Zone indication is given followed by the zones that operated. DEF information If one or more of the DEF basic scheme elements have operated, either as a start or trip, then the DEF flag plus the operated elements are flagged in the location shown. There can be up to four DEF flags. These are Inst(Instantaneous Trip), BU1 and BU2 (Definite time backup trips 1 and 2), and the inverse definite time trip.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Trans This is used to indicate that a transfer trip has been performed. LoL This is used to indicate that a loss-of-load trip has occurred. PSB and VTS Alarms These indicate that a scheme alarm has occurred during the fault or is still present at the time of the fault. If the VTS or PSB occurs after the fault then it is displayed as a separate event record as described in Section 4.1.2. To examine a fault record the PgUp and PgDn softkeys can be used to step through the six stored pages. It is also possible to move to the adjacent records as these softkeys become NEXT and PREV on the first and last pages of a record. 6.3 Disturbance records Disturbance recording is initiated by one or more of the following options Any relay start or trip Any scheme alarm (eg., VTS or PSB) External trigger by specific opto-isolator input The disturbance recorder has the following parameters Nine analogue channels 32 status channels, selected from any combination of relay contacts, optos and scheme logic monitor signals Prefault time 100ms to 500ms in 100ms steps Post fault time 100ms to 5s in 100ms steps Number of samples per nominal cycle: 12 or 36
These records are stored in RAM and are therefore not available following a power failure or after the relay has been de-energised. Versions of the relay with the standard 4Mbs of RAM are able to store two disturbance records of the maximum duration and the maximum sample rate. The optional additional 4Mbs permits the storage of a further 4 records of this type. Reducing the duration of the records, and/or reducing the sample rate permits the storage of more records. When the memory allocated for the storage of disturbance records is full then the oldest record is discarded to make way for the new one. The stored disturbance records can be extracted from the relay using access software, they will then be stored using the Comtrade format which allows them to be viewed or replayed using test equipment. Disturbance recorder analogue values can be extracted as either primary or secondary values, depending on the setting in the Display Options section of the menu.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 7.
MEASUREMENTS
The relay performs continuous measurement of the analog input quantities. Other signals such as real and reactive power are also calculated. All the measured and derived quantities are available using the Measurement area of the menu structure through the front panel or Courier. The following signals are available in the measurement pages of the menu phase voltages and currents sequence voltages and currents frequency real and reactive power It should be noted that the zero-sequence current that is displayed is derived from the neutral current transformer rather than summing the measured signals from the three phases. This allows the measurement information to be used to test all of the relay analog inputs that are used by the relay. The spare voltage and current channel are not recorded in the metering information. The display options settings within the menu structure are used to alter the nature of the display in the measurement section. The following options are available Display of the voltages and currents as either phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase values (front panel menu only). To view secondary values set the Values option under display options to Secondary. Display of the voltages and currents using either the polar or rectangular complex form. One of four Measurement Modes can be selected. This governs the convention used for the signing of the direction of real and reactive power flow. Note export is the direction of power flow from the busbar to the feeder; ie., the forward direction of the relay.
Mode 0 Export of Real Power = positive Watts Export Lagging VARs = negative Vars Mode 1 Export of Real Power = negative Watts Export Lagging VARs = negative Vars Mode 2 Export of Real Power = positive Watts Export Lagging VARs = positive Vars Mode 3 Export of Real Power = negative Watts Export Lagging VARs = positive Vars
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 8.
PRINTING
The relay is capable of printing settings, event and fault records using the front parallel port. The parallel port provides both a printing function and allows aspects of the relay to be tested using the monitor options. If the user chooses to perform a print manually then the function of the port is switched to provide the printing function. If the auto-print feature is enabled then the port is permanently configured for printing. Thus if the monitor options are required through the parallel port then the auto-print feature must be disabled. If printing is halted for longer than five seconds an alarm message appears on the status bar. A signal is also available as a scheme logic output to provide an alarm facility in the case of printer failure. Three pages are provided to allow printing on request of settings, fault records, and event records. The PRINT: Settings page allows the user to print either one of the eight setting groups global settings all active settings These options are selected using the STEP softkey. The PRINT softkey is used to initiate the printing. The are two separate pages for the printing of the stored fault records and event records. The user is able to print the last N fault records. When the page is first entered N is zero. However, this can be increased using the MORE softkey or by editing the value of N using the numeric editor. For the event record page N increments in steps of ten. For the fault record page N increments in steps of one. The PRINT softkey can then be used to initiate printing. The connection of the parallel port SK1 to a parallel print is covered in Section 3 of this chapter. Pin 13 (SENSE) is used to detect the presence of a printer on the parallel port. It is not possible to print unless this line is asserted high by the printer. The Busy line of the parallel port is used to detect whether the printer is ready to receive data. If this line is high then printing is halted. If printing is stopped by either the sense or the busy line for a period of 5 seconds then a Printer Not Ready warning is displayed on the relay. 8.1 Manual print information The relay does not attempt to set-up the format of the printer. It prints using the printers internal settings. The relay uses the IBM extended ASCII character set when printing. All printouts are headed with pertinent information to define the relay they were taken from and the date and time of printing.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Print header: ******************************************** Relay Type: Description: Serial Number: Plant Reference: Printed on: LFZR111******** Distance Relay ********C Stafford Sub. 12:00:00 14 July 1994
******************************************** The structure of the settings printout is similar in format to the front panel interface. The selected display options are applied to the printout. Events and faults are printed in the order of oldest first. If a further event occurs during printing then this is added to the end of the print. The format of the fault record printout is the same as that used on the front panel menu. 8.2 Auto-printing It is possible to auto-print both fault and event records to the parallel printer as each occurs. This is used during testing only as the parallel printer cannot be permanently connected when the relay is in service. It is possible using the menu structure to disable the auto-print print the events only print fault reports only print all events and fault reports The format of the auto-printed fault and event records is the same as that used for the manual print.
SECTION 9.
IRIG-B CLOCK SYNC
The relay is capable of synchronising the internal clock to an IRIG-B signal on the defined IRIG input. The signal must be in the code format specified in the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard 200-89. The signal level requirements for this input are described in Section 3 of this chapter. The time signal produced by the IRIG-B input is universal co-ordinated time (UTC), depending on the timezone of the relay location this will be different to local time. For this reason the relay provides a setting allowing the time difference between UTC and the local time to be set in steps of 30 minutes. This setting and other data concerning the relay clock can be found in the Date and Time sub-menu under the RECORDS section of the menu. If the IRIG-B synchronisation has been enabled the date and time section of the menu will indicate whether a valid time signal is being received. If the status of the IRIG-B input changes an event will be logged (see Section 6.1).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 10. MULTIPLE SETTING GROUPS

The relay supports eight groups of protection settings and global settings which are common to all groups. Only one of the protection setting groups is active at any one time although it is possible to edit any of the groups using either the front panel interface or the Courier Interface. 10.1 Setting interlock When the global settings area or one of the setting groups is being edited using either interface, editing of any setting by any other interface is prohibited. It is not possible to edit another area of settings using the same interface until the setting trap has been exited. Global settings are edited and applied individually, each setting having its own setting trap. All group setting changes are stored in a temporary area of memory until the group setting changes are confirmed. They are then stored in non-volatile memory and made active if appropriate. 10.2 Opto selectable setting groups This feature is only opto-isolator inputs opto-isolator inputs allowing the menu available on the LFZR112 model. It allows the Group Select to change the active setting group. If all the Group Select have no applied voltage then the relay operates as normal structure to set the setting group.
If the opto-isolator inputs have a valid input then the appropriate group is made active. It is possible to view the active setting group using the user interfaces, however, this is not editable. The group select opto-isolators are used in the following manner to select a setting group. Active group GS1 Menu Set Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 GS2 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 GS3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 GS4 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 GS5 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
The opto-isolator inputs must remain energised for 0.5s before they are acted upon by the relay. This prevents any intermediate switch positions causing erroneous settings during changeover. After this period if a valid input is received then the selected group is placed into service. Any other opto-isolator input combinations other than those defined in the above table cause the relay to flag an error although the relay maintains the settings of the last selected setting group. The option of selecting the relay setting group using the opto-isolator inputs has no effect on the editing of the contents of a setting group using either the front panel interface or Courier.
Volume 2 Chapter 3 Installation
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Figure Figure Figure Figure 1 2 3 4 RECEIPT OF RELAYS UNPACKING RELAY MOUNTING GROUNDING ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) HANDLING PRECAUTIONS AC INPUT MODULE CALIBRATION RELAY CASE EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS Terminal block 1, AC inputs Terminal block 2, output contacts Terminal block 3, output contacts LFZR111 only Terminal block 4, opto-inputs FIGURES Rear view of relay showing external connections External connections for LFZR relays Case outlines Typical application diagram - LFZR100 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 1.
RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Protective relays require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and a ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd representative should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and stored in a clean dry place. THE SAFETY SECTION OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE READ BEFORE ANY WORK ON THE RELAY IS UNDERTAKEN.
SECTION 2.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged, or the settings altered and they must only be handled by skilled persons. It is strongly recommended that modules or PCBs are not removed from the case. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applied to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
SECTION 3.
RELAY MOUNTING
The relays can be supplied for either rack or flush panel mounting. Relays for rack mounting are supplied in cases designed for housing in standard 19 inch racks. The case outline diagrams (Figure 3) show the necessary dimensions for panel cut-outs. Panels should be vertical to within 5. Flush mounted relays are inserted from the front into the panel cut-out and secured by means of nuts and bolts through holes in the upper and lower flanges in the relay and corresponding holes in the panel.
SECTION 4.
GROUNDING
The relay grounding terminal on the rear of the relay case must be connected to ground.
SECTION 5.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal modules should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the modules outside of the case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. It is strongly recommended that modules/pcbs are not removed from the case. If removed from the case for storage, a module should be placed in an electrically conducting anti-static bag.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Touching the printed circuit boards should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
SECTION 6.
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. (i) (ii) Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
(iii) Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. (iv) (v) Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the aforementioned BS and IEC documents. It should also be noted that the internal battery used as a back-up for the calendar clock should be replaced every 5 years. The battery should be returned to the factory safely packaged for disposal.
SECTION 7.
AC INPUT MODULE CALIBRATION
The calibration of the board in the input module is related to the specific current and voltage transformers in that module. Therefore, under no circumstances should the board be replaced with a board from another module without first being recalibrated.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 8.
RELAY CASE
The relay case is designed to securely hold the relays printed circuit boards to prevent damage due to vibration and mechanical shock, and provide protection against electromagnetic interference and dust entrance. The case is divided into five separate screened compartments. The left-hand side of the case (viewed from the front) holds up to 6 output contact cards or optically isolated input cards, which run the full depth of the relay to make contact with the MIDOS terminal blocks on the rear. The addresses of the optical isolator cards increase from left to right (as seen from the front of the case); the addresses of the output contact cards increase from right to left (also as seen from the front). The right-hand side contains the power supply, again extending to the back of the case where it makes contact with the supply terminals. The area of the case around the power supply heatsink is ventilated to improve air circulation around the device. The centre section is divided into three partitions. The lower centre section holds the analogue input module, which makes contact with a MIDOS terminal block at the rear of the relay. The upper centre compartment is divided into front and rear sections. The front section holds the processor cards. The rear section contains the communications module
SECTION 9.
9.1
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Terminal Block 1, AC Inputs Terminal 1 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-18 16-18 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 LFZR111/112/113 Ground Voltage (spare) Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank A Phase Voltage (Va) B Phase Voltage (Vb) C Phase Voltage (Vc) A Phase Current (Ia) B Phase Current (Ib) C Phase Current (Ic) Neutral Current (In) Current (spare)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
9.2
Terminal Block 2, Output Contacts The output contacts which can be normally closed are indicated with the designation nc. The settings marked with * are those that are provided with the relay when shipped; these settings are user programmable.
Terminal 29-31 29-33 29-35 37-39 41-43 45-47 nc 49-51 nc 53-55 30-32 30-34 30-36 38-40 42-44 46-48 50-52 54-56
LFZR111 Relay inoperative alarm (RIA) Zone 1 trip* Time delayed trip* Trip A* TripB* Signal send (1)* Block auto-reclose* Trip C* DEF trip* Overcurrent trip* Start* Trip A* Trip B* Trip C* Signal send (2)* Any trip*
LFZR112/113 Relay inoperative alarm (RIA) Zone 1 trip* Time delayed trip* Trip* Trip* Signal send (1)* Block auto-reclose* Trip* Trip* DEF trip* Switch-on-to-fault* Channel-aided trip* Power swing blocking* Voltage transformer supervision* Start* Any trip*
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
9.3
Terminal Block 3, Output Contacts LFZR111 only The output contacts which can be normally closed are indicated with nc. The settings marked with * are those that are provided with the relay when shipped; these settings are user programmable. Terminal 57-59 57-61 57-63 65-67 69-71 73-75 77-79 nc 81-83 58-60 58-62 58-64 66-68 70-72 74-76 78-80 82-84 LFZR111 Voltage transformer supervision* Power swing blocking* DEF Instantaneous* Trip A* Trip B* Trip C* Block auto-reclose* Switch-on-to-fault Start A* Start B* Start C* Trip A* Trip B* Trip C* Distance channel-aided trip* DEF channel-aided trip*
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
9.4
Terminal 85-87 89-91 93-95 97-99 101-103 105-107 109-111 86-88 90-92 94-96 98-100 102-104 106-108 110-112
Terminal Block 4, Opto Inputs

LFZR111 CB Auxiliary A CB Auxiliary B CB Auxiliary C Channel Receive (1)/ Z1X Channel out of Service (1)/ Loss of Guard (1) Channel Receive (2) Channel out of Service (2)/ Loss of Guard (2) Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger disturbance record Autoreclose in progress Convert to three pole trip Spare opto LFZR112 CB Auxiliary Channel Receive (1)/ Z1X reset Channel out of Service (1)/ Loss of Guard (1) Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger disturbance record Setting Group Select 1 Setting Group Select 2 Seting Group Select 3 Setting Group Select 4 Setting Group Select 5 Channel receive (2) Channel out of Service (2)/ Loss of Guard (2) LFZR113 CB Auxiliary Channel Receive (1)/ Z1X reset Channel out of Service (1)/ Loss of Guard Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger disturbance record N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Figures 1 and 2 illustrate the external connections to be made to the relay.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SK3
TB3
TB4
TB5
SCN 1
SK3
2
SK4
SK5
TB1
28
12
TB6
56
84
112
Figure 1.
Rear view of relay showing external connections
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Direction of power flow for operation

A
IA IB In
MMLG01 Test block 1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB1-19 TB1-20 TB1-21 TB1-22 TB1-23 TB1-24 TB6-1 TB6-2 TB2-49 TB2-51 TB1-25 TB1-26 TB1-27 TB1-28
L F Z R 1 0 0
Signal send
{
In
17 19 21 23 25 27
Spare current
MMLG01 Test block 2 1 3 5 7 Opto Inputs LFZR111/112/113 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 Opto Inputs LFZR111/112 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB4-109 TB4-86 TB4-90 TB4-94 TB4-98 TB4-102 TB4-111 TB4-88 TB4-92 TB4-96 TB4-100 TB4-104 TB4-85 TB4-89 TB4-93 TB4-97 TB4-101 TB4-105 TB4-87 TB4-91 TB4-95 TB4-99 TB4-103 TB4-107
MMLG01 Test block 3 1 3 5 7 Commissioning contact 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB1-1 TB1-2 TB1-15 TB1-16 TB1-17 TB1-18 TB4-106 TB4-110 TB4-93 TB4-97 TB4-101 TB4-105 TB4-108 TB4-112
DC supply
Spare voltage
{ { {
9 11 + 13 15 17 VA VB VC VN 19 21 23 25 27
Figure 2.
External connections for LFZR relays
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

32.00 306.00 10.00
414.00 (with cover fitted)
177.00 (4U Nom) 10.00 Front view (cover removed)
157.00
Side view
Communications
29 57 85
T.B.
T.B.
T.B.
84
T.B.
112
T.B.
28
56
Processing AC input
Power supply
M4 earth connection Rear view Terminal block detail 1 13 1 2 28 way max Each way accepting 2M4 Ring terminals or 24,8 x 0,8 Snap-on terminals or 1 Ring+ 28 1 Snap-on terminal
Front view (panel removed) 411.00 362.60 246.05 116.55
24.20
14 25 25 way 'D' connector detail 159.00 168.00 27
8 holes 4.4
Panel cut-out detail
483.0 465.1
4.50
32.00 88.9
306.00
10.00
13
177.00 (4U Nom) 101.6 37.7 Front view (cover removed) Fixing Slot 10.6 Long x 7.0 Wide
157.00 57.1 15.5 10.00 Side view
14 25 25 way 'D' connector detail
Communications
29 57 85
Terminal block detail

1 2
T.B.
T.B.
T.B.
84
T.B.
112
T.B.
28
56
Processing AC input
Power supply
M4 earth connection Rear view U = 44.45 483 (19" )Rack detail for unit to comply with IEC 255-21-2, Class 1.
27
28 28 way max Each way accepting 2M4 Ring terminals or 24,8 x 0,8 Snap-on terminals or 1 Ring+ 1 Snap-on terminal
Front view (panel removed)
U = 44.45
483 (19" )Rack detail to IEC 297
Nom Height 4U
Equipment
Nom Height 4U
Equipment
Rack detail recommended fixing
Figure 3.
Case outlines
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
A B C A B C N n
P2 S2 S1
P1
Direction of power flow for operation A
B C Phase rotation MMLG 01 Test plug or equivalent A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 a b c A21 A23 Fuses or MCB A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A12 A22 A24
LFZR111 TB119 TB120 TB121 TB122 TB123 TB124 TB125 TB126
C21 C23 C25 C27
C22 C24 C26 C28
TB115 TB116 TB117 TB118
LFZR111 A13 A14 B13 B14 C13 C14 TB61 DC supply TB62 A16 A15 B16 B15 C16 C15
CB AUXA CB AUXB CB AUXC CRX1 COX1 CRX2 COX2 MCB DIRX SBI ETDR AR
B1 B3 B5 B7 B9 B11 B17 B19 B21 B23 B25 B27
B2 B4 B6 B8 B10 B12 B18 B20 B22 B24 B26 B28
TB485 TB489 TB493 TB497 TB4101 TB4105 TB4109 TB486 TB490 TB494 TB498 TB4102
CB auxiliary A CB auxiliary B CB auxiliary C Channel receive (1) Channel out of service (1) Channel receive (2) Channel out of service (2) Block voltage dependent functions Direct intertrip receive Stub bus isolation A/R in progress
TB487 TB491 TB495 TB499 TB4103 TB4107 TB4111 TB488 TB492 TB496 TB4104
External trigger disturbance recorder TB4100
TPT
C1 C3
C2 C3 External resistor box required for 220V/250V supply only
TB4106 TB4110
Force three pole trip Spare opto
TB4108 TB4112
A17 A25
A18 A26
TB245 TB250
Signal send (1) Signal send (2)
TB247 TB252
A20 A28
A19 A27
C9
C10
TB254
Any trip
TB256
C12
C11
Opto-isolator inputs: CB AUXA Circuit breaker contact (closed with breaker open) CB AUXB Circuit breaker contact (closed with breaker open) CB AUXC Circuit breaker contact (closed with breaker open) CRX1 Contact from signalling channel 1 (closed on receive) COX1 Contact from signalling channel 1 (closed when out of service) CRX2 Contact from signalling channel 2 (closed on receive) COX2 Contact from signalling channel 2 (closed when out of service) MCB Contact from miniature circuit breaker (required when VT fuses are not used) DIRX Contact for direct intertrip initiation (closed to initiate) SBI Line isolator contact for stub bus protection initiation (closed to initiate) ETDR Contact to externally trigger disturbance record (closed to trigger) AR Contact for auto-reclose in progress (closed during A/R) TPT Contact for force three pole trip (closed to prevent single pole tripping)
Figure 4.
Typical application diagram - LFZR100
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Chapter 4 Commissioning, Test and Maintenance
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 1.1 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.15 4.16 GENERAL NOTES Commissioning level TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS Wiring Rating details CT shorting contacts Insulation test SECONDARY INJECTION TESTS Isolation Initial checks Calendar and clock Settings Test plugs Output relay contacts Input optical isolators Measurements check Reach and fault locator checks Connections and preliminaries Fault locator Zone 1 ground faults Zone 1 phase faults Zone 1X, forward and reverse Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Resistive reach check (quadrilateral characteristic) Load blinders Distance elements operating times Zone 1 Zone 1X Zone 2 Zone 3 operation time Zone 4 operation time Voltage transformer supervision Neutral voltage level detector Timing check Blocking check Switch on to fault Trip on reclose Loss of load feature High set overcurrent (loss of load) level detector Loss of load testing Instantaneous overcurrent level detector Circuit breaker failure detection 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 13
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Contents 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 26 26
4.17 5. 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.4.1 5.3.4.2 5.3.4.3 5.3.4.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 6. 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2 6.2.1 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3
Direction reversal Scheme tests Zone 1 extension Permissive underreach Aided trip Signal send TW timer, unblocking logic Channel-out-of-service Permissive overreach Variable voltage setting Aided trip Signal Send TP and TD timers Recommendations for timer settings in current reversals POR1, POR1 Unblock Recommendations for timer setting for POR2, POR2 Unblock, POR2 WI Trip, POR2 WI Trip Unblock TP (POR1 only) TD TW timer, unblocing logic Echo feature (POR1 or POR2) Weak infeed trip (POR2) if selected Channel out of service Blocking 1 TP timer TD timer Signal send Channel-out-of-service Blocking 2 TP timer and distance channel-aided trip TD timer and signal start Channel-out-of-service check Signalling channel test DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT Current level detectors DEF instantaneous level detector BU1 level detector BU3 level detector Time delayed trip Operation time DEF channel-aided trip POR1 or POR1 unblock POR2 Blocking 1 Blocking 2 Aided trip Channel-out-of-service Independent channel DEF trip POR Blocking Blocking 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Contents 27 27 27 27 27 27 28 33 33 34 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 39
7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 8. 9. 10. 10.1 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 11. 11.1 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3
LIVE SYSTEM TESTS Signalling channel Final setting check On load tests Voltage transformer tests VT/CT phasing LIVE SYSTEM TESTS MONITOR OPTIONS FAULT FINDING Failure during power up Failure during operation Self test error Analogue input failure Opto input failure Contact failure RELAY MAINTENANCE PCB and module handling Module replacement Initial instructions Analogue input module replacement Power supply module replacement Processor module replacement Opto input and relay output replacement battery replacement Instructions for replacing the battery Post modification tests Battery disposal
Figure 1. Figure 1a. Figure 2. Figure 3a. Figure 3b. Figure 4
FIGURES MMLG test block connections for LFZR relays Normal test plug connections for secondary injection Test plug connection for on load test CT/VT phasing IEC characteristics American characteristics Relay LCD, power up diagnostic information
29 30 31 32 32 34
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Page 1 of 40
SECTION 1.
GENERAL NOTES
THE SAFETY SECTION OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE READ BEFORE ANY WORK ON THE RELAY IS UNDERTAKEN. The commissioning engineer should be supplied with all the required settings for the relay. The testing of the LFZR relay requires the use of a test set capable of applying a prefault condition followed by a fault condition. The prefault condition should consist of three balanced voltages with or without balanced current, during the fault application the current and voltages should evolve over time from fault inception, as per a real power system. If a test set is used which cannot accurately evolve the fault, ie. one which simple switches from a prefault condition to a fault condition then the phase selector option within the commissioning section of the menu must be disabled. If this is done then the protection available LED will be extinguished, single phase DEF faults will only appear as three phase trips and the fault locator will not function. In addition, the operating times obtained will appear slower. If the phase selector is not disabled then identification of the faulted phase and operation of the fault locator will become unreliable. 1.1 Commissioning level The user has to decide what level of commissioning is necessary to prove the correct set-up of the relay. The commissioning instructions are written to test all the protection functions and settings entered into the relay. The LFZR is a fully numerical relay using a combination of processors to carry out the protection functions, therefore if a failure occurs within the relay then the relay will cease to function and flag an error. Since the relay employs a high degree of self checking it is only necessary to verify that the settings have been entered correctly by either printing them out (preferred method) or by using the menu. Then carrying out a reduced set of tests to confirm basic operation. A typical list of reduced tests is detailed below: Preliminary Tests Initial Checks Reach Tests Operation Time Tests Active Scheme Test Signalling Checks DEF Scheme Checks Live System Checks (Section (Section (Section (Section (Section (Section (Section (Section 3.0) 4.1-4.8) 4.10.3-4.10.4) 4.11.1 and 4.11.3) 5.0) 5.6) 6.3) 8.0)
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 2.
1 1
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

dynamic three phase test set interval timer capable of being triggered by a contact or a 5V signal and able to measure dwell times (this function may be incorporated into the test set) Multimeters (20,000W/V on DC ranges) double pole switches monitor point box DC power supply (if panel supply unavailable) MMLB01 test plugs (if MMLG test blocks are used) phase rotation meter phase angle meter electronic insulation tester (if panel wiring is to be checked) Printer (not essential) PC (not essential) running either LFZRCOM or Courier Access Software
2 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
SECTION 3.
3.1
PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTIONS
Wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant external connection diagram and/or scheme diagram. If test blocks type MMLG are provided, the connections should be checked to the scheme diagram; particularly that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block (coloured orange and allocated with odd numbered terminals 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.). See Figure 1 for recommended connections. Note: The earth connection of the rear of the relay is a safety protective earth and must be connected at all times. When connecting the relay, the earth should be made before any other connections, and when disconnecting the relay, it should be removed last.
3.2
Rating details Check that the ratings for frequency, AC voltage and current, auxiliary DC supplies Vx(1) and Vx(2) are correct. These can be found on the nameplate on the front of the relay. Note: Auxiliary DC supply Vx(1) and opto-isolator input supply Vx(2) may be different. If Vx(2) supply is 220/250V, an external resistor box GJ0229 002 containing 7 resistors is required for the LFZR113. Two of the GJ0229 002 are required for the LFZR111 and LFZR112.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
3.3
CT shorting contacts First observe electrostatic discharge precautions (ie. wear an earthed wrist strap) and ensure that all DC supplies are isolated from the relay. Open the relay front panel. Remove the analogue input module (located in the centre section of the relay) by removing the fixing screws and use the folding handles to free the module from the terminal block at the rear of the relay. Note: When removing the input module from the relay using the folding handles, the module must be supported from beneath to prevent injury since this module carries the CTs and VTs and can cause injury due to its weight. Check that the contact block within the case is fitted with CT shorting contacts. The following pairs of terminals are provided with shorting facilities 19 and 20, 21 and 22, 23 and 24, 25 and 26, 27 and 28. If the MMLB test blocks are fitted the relay is easily isolated from its supply CTs. See Figure 2 - test plug connection. Pass current through each pair of contacts to ensure a circuit is indicated or check that a low resistance is measured. The equipment label is on the back of the front panel and indicates PCB/ module identification numbers. These numbers are needed if replacements are ever required.
Caution
DO NOT OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION. When type MMLG test block facilities are installed it is essential that the sockets in the type MMLB01 test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are LINKED BEFORE THE TEST PLUG IS INSERTED INTO THE TEST BLOCK (see Figure 1a). Similarly, an MMLB02 single finger test plug must be terminated with an ammeter BEFORE IT IS INSERTED to monitor CT secondary currents. 3.4 Insulation test This test may be done by the main plant contractor at an earlier date. An electronic or brushless insulation tester should be used having a DC output that does not exceed 1000V. Deliberate circuit grounding links removed for these tests must subsequently be replaced. The relay and associated wiring may be tested between: - all electrical isolated circuits - all circuits and ground Accessible terminals of the same circuit should first be strapped together.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 4.
4.1
SECONDARY INJECTION TESTS
Isolation All the relay contacts can be prevented from operating while the rest of the relay functions normally and gives indications. Signals for operation times may be taken from the front panel parallel port. The relay contacts can also be configured to enable a single commissioning contact (terminals 54-56) to be configured for any relay scheme logic function. It is necessary however, to check the operation of all contacts during commissioning so alternate trip isolation must be obtained as necessary.
4.2
Initial checks If the DC supplies are available on the panel they should be checked for correct polarity and voltage before linking through to the relay. If the panel supply is unavailable, a suitable supply should be connected to the relay side of the test block. On application of the DC to the relay the power LED will illuminate followed by the relay healthy LED, the display will indicate that a self test is taking place after which the green protection available LED will illuminate and remain on. The power up process takes approximately 45s. Check that the normally closed relay inoperative alarm (RIA) contact (terminals 29-31) is open. Note: The relay on power up will always show the default display page that it was on prior to the power being removed. If the default display contains a fault record it will power up to show the first page of this record. This page can be one of four pages. Page one will consist of a page detailing the relay identifiers. Page two will detail the frequency and power supplied in the line. Page three will consist of a page displaying the three phase-to-phase voltage and current values. Page four will display the positive, negative and zero phase sequence components. If a fault has been previously applied to the relay, then the default pages will be overwritten by fault information. Upon completion of a successful power up the Alarm LED will flash indicating that an event has been stored. This event is the power up alarm and can be viewed by holding down the help key and it can be cleared according to the on-screen instructions.
4.3
Calendar and clock The calendar and clock should now be set to the correct values. If a satellite time clock signal conforming to the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) is provided, this should be enabled. The IRIG-B status line within the date and time section of the menu should be checked to ensure that the signals are active. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, the relay clock should be set by adjusting the time offset to alter the universal co-ordinated time (satellite clock time) to that of the local time.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
If no IRIG-B signal is available then the clock should be set to the correct local time and date using the relay date and time menu. The IRIG-B synchronous option should be disabled in this case. The time and date functions are maintained in the event of a power loss via an internal battery. Once the date and time have been set the relay should be deenergized. On re-energization the clock should maintain the correct time. 4.4 Settings When commissioning an LFZR for the first time the engineer should allow an hour to familiarize himself/herself with the menu. All settings on the LFZR are accessible by means of the following: LFZRCOM, an off-line setting editor using the Courier language through either the K-Bus or serial ports. Courier Access Software, a communication package for communicating via Courier through either the K-Bus or serial ports. Front Panel User Interface, using relay keypad and LCD. Any of the above setting methods can be used to enter the settings. However, the use of a printer to record the settings either directly or via one of the PC based packages is recommended. The relay can store eight independent groups of settings identified as 1 to 8. The default display details which setting group is active. Ensure that group 1 is selected for the first or only new set of settings to be entered. The user has to decide what level of testing is necessary if more than one setting group is used. If only zone reaches are involved then the user may select to test the appropriate settings. Alternatively, having proved that correct settings can be selected by the menu, for additional groups of settings it should only be necessary to obtain a record or printout of the selections. Alternatively, some users may require a complete repetition of the test procedure for each group. Note: The LCD menu will remain on the last page viewed and therefore on completion of commissioning the relay should be set back to the default setting level. The user selectable contacts must be checked for correct contact allocation against the customers wiring diagram. It is recommended that the disturbance recording feature of the relay is disabled for the duration of commissioning tests. 4.5 Test plugs If MMLG01 Test Blocks are installed, it is recommended that they are wired as shown in Figure 1. Test plug type MMLB01 should be wired for normal secondary injection as shown in Figure 1a. 4.6 Output relay contacts The LFZR111 has 31 user programmable contacts while the LFZR112 and LFZR113 have 15 user programmable contacts. The wiring of these contacts must be checked against the wiring diagram.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Trip isolation should be obtained if breaker operation is not desired. The breaker operation will only occur if previously closed. Auto-reclose should be blocked. Check user programmable relay contacts using the commissioning test options. This is performed by setting contacts to disabled within the Contact Test section of the Commissioning Test section of the menu. Once the contacts are disabled and for the duration of the disablement the protection available LED will be extinguished. A warning message will remain within the status bar if the relay is left in this condition. The contact to be operated is selected in turn using the menu structure and its operation toggled using the softkeys. Within the contact control section of the menu there is also the option to perform a single phase trip for each of the three phases and a three phase trip. The operation of the relevant contacts should be verified. Note: If the contact is left in the operated state it will reset back to the unoperated state after 1 minute. The operation of Trip A, Trip B, Trip C and Trip 3 Ph will cause the contacts that have been assigned to these functions to operate. The contacts that operate for these conditions should be checked against the contact allocation under the 'SETTINGS: CONTACTS' section of the menu. 4.7 Input optical isolators The LFZR111 and LFZR112 provide 14 opto-isolator inputs. The LFZR113 provides 7 opto-isolator inputs. Note that monitor option 16 is only required for LFZR111 and LFZR112. Select monitor option 15 and 16. Energize/de-energize the opto-isolator inputs with the following test pattern 10101010101010. The monitor options in the commissioning column of the menu are used to confirm the receipt of signal. LCD position and parallel socket no. Data line number Parallel port pin no. Option 15 Option 16 0 2 1 0 1 3 0 1 2 4 1 0 3 5 0 1 4 6 1 0 5 7 0 1 6 8 1 0 7 9 0 0
Logical 1 is represented by 5V while logical 0 is represented by 0V. Note that data line number 7 is a dummy position; ie. number 7 is always zero for these tests. The pattern should be reversed and the test repeated. 4.8 Measurements check To verify that the CTs and VTs and accuracy of the analogue input circuitry a balanced three phase voltage and current should be injected into the relay. The measurement display should be checked to ensure that the values displayed by the relay match those injected. The magnitude of the voltage and current displayed upon the relay will be dependent upon the setting of the VT and CT if the 'Display Option', 'Values' section of the menu is set to primary. If the
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
'Display Options', 'Values' section of the menu is set to secondary then the measured values will reflect those injected. The displayed value of measurements should be within 5% of the applied values. 4.9 Reach and fault locator checks Information on the operation of the fault locator and distance elements can be found in Volume 1, Section 2, Application Notes. More detailed information can be found in Volume 1 Section 3, Technical Description. 4.9.1 Connection and preliminaries The relay should now be connected to equipment able to supply phase-phase and phase-neutral volts with current in the correct phase relation for a particular type of fault on the selected relay characteristic angle. The facility for altering the loop impedance (phase-to-ground fault or phase-phase) presented to the relay is essential. The test equipment must provide the currents and voltages via a dynamic power system model for the phase selectors within the relay to function correctly. If the test equipment is incapable of dynamically modelling the fault condition then the phase selectors must be disabled from the relay menu. Disabling the relay phase selectors causes the Protection Available LED to be extinguished and the relay is then incapable of producing a single phase DEF trip and fault locator will not function. Connect the test equipment to the relay via the test block(s) taking care not to open-circuit any CT secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of the test plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block. VT supervision should be set 'INDICATION', giving indication only. 4.9.2 Fault locator The fault locator checks can be done on its location readings while checking Zone 1 reaches. The location reading is unaffected by whatever CT and VT ratios are selected in the line parameters section of the menu. The fault locator is set under the fault locator section of the menu with the line length, line impedance, neutral line impedance, positive-sequence and negative-sequence susceptances being required. Locations can be selected to be given in percentages, miles or kilometres. After a fault the display will indicate a fault record that will display the nature of the fault and accumulate the start or trip information. The fault record provides the fault location, duration and recorded data following the reset of the relay measuring elements and completion of the fault location calculation. This information is accessible from the fault record via the 'NEXT' softkey that is available following the completion of the fault location calculation. A fault applied in the reverse direction will cause the fault locator to indicate it is in the reverse direction, ie. -1000% displayed as the fault location. Note: The fault locator should only be tested on a dynamic test set capable of modelling a real power system. If a static test set or any set that does not model the power system is used then the operation of the fault locator will be unreliable giving large inaccuracies. If the phase selector is disabled then the protection available LED will be extinguished and the fault locator will not operate.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.9.3
Ground faults Zone 1 If the Zone 1 extension or blocking scheme is selected, read Section 5.1 or Section 5.4 before proceeding. Commence with connections for an A-G fault. The appropriate loop impedance is given by the vector sum: Z1 Ground + Z1 Residual Z1 Ground + Z1 Residual must be added vectorially. eg. 570 + 1080 = (1.71 + j4.70) + (1.74 + j9.85) = 3.446 + j14.546 = 14.9476.67 Momentarily apply an impedance slightly greater than above to the relay. The relay will indicate START AN (for the enabled forward zones). DEF start will also be obtained if enabled. Reduce the impedance and reapply this to the relay. This procedure should be repeated until the indication Z1 AN occurs. Note: If the circuit breaker open optical isolator input is energized then all faults can appear as SOTF. Appropriate action must be taken to prevent the optical isolator input from being energized. This is easily done if the recommended test blocks are used. The ALARM LED will flash to indicate the fault and the TRIP LED will light. Once the relay measuring elements have reset the 'ACCEPT' softkey will appear; pressing this will cause the Alarm LED to become permanently illuminated. The function of the softkey will then change to CLEAR. Pressing this key will clear the fault record and return to the standard default display. The fault data will still however be stored as a fault record and will be accessible using the menu. Any new events will automatically be displayed. The measured impedance should be within 10% of the calculated value. Check that the contacts configured as the block autoreclose (BAR) contacts operate for single or three phase tripping as selected. Also check for operation of ANY TRIP contact and the block autoreclose (BAR) contact. Change the direction of the current and ensure that none of the forward zones of the relay operate for a reverse fault; the Z4 reverse element may operate if enabled. This can be checked with a close-up fault briefly applied. Repeat the above tests for the other two phases, ie. B-G and C-G.
4.9.4
Zone 1 phase faults The appropriate loop impedance is now given by: 2 x Z1 phase Carry out the same type of tests that were performed for the three ground fault comparators. The loop impedance will now be checked for A-B, B-C and C-A. The measured impedances should be within 10% of the calculated values.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.9.5
Zone 1X forward and reverse The ground fault loop impedance required is given by: Z1X Ground + Z1X Residual For phase-phase faults the loop impedance required is given by: 2 x Z1X Phase Zone 1X has the facility to be set to either forward reach or reverse reach. All phase-ground and phase-phase elements of the relay should be checked and the operation of the appropriate contacts confirmed.
4.9.6
Zone 2 The ground fault loop impedance required is: Z2 Ground + Z2 Residual For phase-phase faults the loop impedance required is given by: 2 x Z2 Phase The reach for each phase-ground and phase-phase element of the relay should be checked and the operation of the appropriate contacts confirmed.
4.9.7
Zone 3 The zone 3 element has the facility to be set in either a forward or reverse offset. The reach for each phase-ground and phase-phase element of the relay should be checked and the operation of the appropriate contacts confirmed. The ground fault loop impedance required is: Z3 Ground + Z3 Residual For phase-phase faults the loop impedance required is given by: 2 x Z3 Phase For offset zones the ground fault loop impedance required is: Z3 Ground Offset + Z3 Residual Offset For offset phase-phase faults the loop impedance required is given by: 2 x Z3 Phase Residual
4.9.8
Zone 4 The ground fault loop impedance required is: Z4 Ground + Z4 Residual For phase-phase faults the loop impedance required is given by: 2 x Z4 Phase The zone 4 element is a reverse zone. The reach for each phase-ground and phase-phase element of the relay should be checked and the operation of the appropriate contacts confirmed.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.9.9
Resistive reach check (quadrilateral characteristic) This tests the characteristic at its resistive reach point along the real axis. Checks are done using resistive faults. The loop impedance for each resistive element will be the resistive setting of each zone (there is no neutral compensation to account for). The checks should be done for all phase-ground measuring elements and results should be within 15% of the selected setting.
4.9.10 Load blinders This tests the load blinder comparator at its reach point along the resistive axis. When the quadrilateral elements are enabled their resistive blinders are used instead of the load blinders for the mho ground fault elements. Each zones quadrilateral resistive blinder is applied as the load blinder for that particular zone's mho ground fault elements. The checks should be done for all phase-phase measuring elements and results should be within 5% of twice the selected setting. 4.10 Distance elements operating times
4.10.1 Zone 1 Zone 1 operation times should be checked by applying a fault at 50% of Zone 1 reach. An interval timer should be started when the fault is applied and stopped by a suitable pair of contacts. The following points should be noted: To obtain 'correct' operating times, it is essential to use a dynamic test set capable of modelling a real power system. If the application of the fault is a step change in the voltage and currents then the operating times may be slower than expected. Typically operating times for ideal test sets should be 1 cycle. For tests sets not accurately modelling the line the operating times will typically be 1 - 2 cycles. Times vary with the point-on-wave of fault application. It is therefore suggested that 10 operations be done for each type of fault and the mean value recorded. The setting of the instantaneous trip delay or zone delay timer to any value other than zero will result in the operating time being delayed accordingly. For faults applied beyond 80% of the reach of an element the operating times will typically be 1 - 2 cycles. 4.10.2 Zone 1X Apply a fault midway between Zone 1X and Zone 1 to check the operation time. The actual measured time should be within 5% of the set time. Check for correct indication and contact operation. 4.10.3 Zone 2 Apply a fault midway between Zone 2 and Zone 1X to check the operation time. The measured time should be within 5% of the set time. Check for correct indication and contact operation.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
4.10.4 Zone 3 operation time Apply a fault midway between Zone 3 and Zone 2 to check the operation time. The measured time should be within 5% of the set time. Check for correct indication and contact operation. 4.10.5 Zone 4 operation time Apply a fault at 50% of the reach of Zone 4 to check the operation time. The measured time should be within 5% of the set time. Check for correct indication and contact operation. 4.11 Voltage transformer supervision Failure of a VT fuse is detected by the neutral voltage level detector and the biased neutral current level detector. Logic is included to ensure that a VTS decision is not produced under inappropriate conditions; eg. while an all poles dead condition exists. If set to INDICATION, indication will be given after 5s of a voltage failure. If set for BLOCKING, blocking can take place instantaneously and the indication and seal-in of the blocking will occur after the delay of 5s. The relay has the facility for automatic or manual resetting of the block, indication and alarm. 4.11.1 Neutral voltage level detector This level detector only needs testing if VTS is being used on the relay. Select monitor option 07. Apply balanced three phase volts and reduce the voltage of one phase. The pick-up of the voltage level detector should be when the phase voltage has reduced by 45% of 63.5V (28.6V 5%). LCD position and parallel socket no: Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 07 4.11.2 Timing check Timing is checked by using a double pole switch to remove one healthy voltage and start a timer that is stopped by the VTS alarm contact. The time obtained should be 5s 5%. Note: Modern test sets can be programmed to simulate line events by applying two events and starting the timer at the beginning of the second event when one of the phase voltages has collapsed. This would replace the need for the double pole switch. 4.11.3 Blocking check If VTS is set to BLOCKING, check that the voltage elements are blocked instantaneously on removal of a phase voltage. Remove a single phase voltage and immediately apply a zone 1 fault. The distance element should not operate. Indication that the relay is blocked is obtained after the 5s delay. Note that the indication cannot be reset until normal voltage is restored. 7 9 6 8 LDVOVTS 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
If the self resetting option has been selected in the menu the RELAY BLOCKED indication will automatically reset when voltage is restored leaving the V~FAIL indication only. 4.12 Switch on to fault The switch onto fault feature is enabled when all poles have been dead for 110s. When the line is energized and the pole dead signal is deactivated, the SOTF feature is active for an additional 20 cycles. Implement the following procedure to check this function. The initial condition should be that the relay has no voltage or current applied for at least 110s. Next apply a zone 1 fault condition with no prefault. Arrange a timer to start when the fault is applied and to stop when the SOTF alarm contact closes. The time obtained should be typically 1 cycle. Confirm three pole tripping. Note that a BAR and a SOTF indication are given. Note: The SOTF enable time of 110s must elapse before a shot is attempted. Once SOTF enable time has elapsed it is desirable to restrict the duration of any fault condition to less than 20 cycles. The short duration faults avoid the need to wait 110s to re-enable the SOTF mode. If VTs are located on the bus-side, the BREAKER OPEN opto-isolator input should be energized. Faults can then be applied in the normal manner resulting in an SOTF indication. 4.13 Trip on reclose The trip on reclose mode is entered when a pole has been dead for a period of 20 cycles. Provided that the pole dead condition remains, this feature is enabled for 110s, after which it reverts to the SOTF condition. A three phase or a single phase reclosure is performed by closing the breaker onto a close-up fault. Start with a breaker open condition, ie. with all poles dead. Start the timer when the breaker is closed onto a close-up fault and stop the timer when the any trip contact closes. The time obtained should be typically 1 cycle. Confirm that three phase TOR trips occur for all multi-phase faults and that single phase TOR trips occur for single phase-ground faults. A TOR indication and no BAR indication should be issued for any of the single or three phase reclosure conditions. Note: The single pole tripping feature is only available on the LFZR111. The TOR enable time of 20 cycles must elapse before a shot is attempted. The all poles dead must not be maintained for longer than 110s, else the relay enters the SOTF mode. 4.14 Loss of load feature Three pole loss of load tripping is initiated when a fault is detected by the zone 2 elements and a loss-of-load in the remaining phases. The load must have
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
been present in all the three phases prior to detecting a loss-of-load and no other form of tripping is in progress; eg. zone 1. Note that the load current must exceed the variable current level detector setting. 4.14.1 High set overcurrent (loss-of-load) level detector These level detectors only need testing if the loss of load option is being used. The operating current is selectable over the range 0.05In - 1.0In when In is the rated value of the relay CTs. The setting is located under the Loss of Load menu. Select monitor option 08. Inject current in turn into each phase (A-G, B-G, C-G) to determine the pick-up and drop-off. Drop-off should be within 20% of pick-up. LCD position and parallel socket no. Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 08 4.14.2 Loss of load testing To test this function use the following procedure. Apply balanced three phase nominal voltage and load current to the relay. A single phase-ground fault is applied on phase A just inside of zone 2 reach. The load current should be removed from phases B and C. Three phase tripping should occur in typically one cycle after the load current is removed. 4.15 Instantaneous overcurrent level detector This level detector only needs testing if the overcurrent element, stub bus or instantaneous trip is enabled. The operating current is selectable over the range 0.2In - 30In when In is the rated value of the relay CTs. The setting is located under the overcurrent menu. Select monitor option 08 Inject current as above and determine the pick-up and drop-off. Drop-off should be within 20% of pick-up. LCD position and parallel socket no. Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 08 7 9 6 8 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 LDOC C 1 3 LDOC B 0 2 LDOC A 7 9 6 8 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2
LOL LOL LOL C B A
4.16
Circuit breaker failure detection The circuit breaker failure is detected by the relay monitoring the phase currents in the appropriate phases via the appropriate phase current level detectors. To test the operation of the circuit breaker failure timer apply a fault with a
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
duration longer than the circuit breaker failure alarm setting. Set a timer to start at the instant of the fault and to stop on either the breaker fail trip or the remote alarm contact as set via the menu. The circuit breaker failure time should be its setting plus up to 9ms to allow for program loop time and auxiliary relay operation time. No indication of the circuit breaker failure timer timing out will be given on the display. 4.17 Direction reversal Apply a forward close-up single phase-ground fault to the relay. Check for the operation of one of the directional zones Z1, Z1X, Z2, Z3 and the DEF forward decision via monitor options from the relay LCD. Reverse the relay's sense of direction via the menu setting. Note: Re-apply the fault and check for operation of the reverse directional zone 4 and the DEF reverse decision element. The relay will flash the alarm LED and cause the alarm relay reversed to be displayed on the alarm page.
SECTION 5.
SCHEME TESTS
Standard Schemes for LFZR BASIC Z1 EXTENSION PUR PUR UNBLOCK POR1 POR1 UNBLOCK POR2 POR 2 WI TRIP POR 2 UNBLOCK POR 2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK
Permissive Underreach. Unblocking Permissive Underreach. Permissive Overreach using Tp & Td for current reversal guard. Unblocking Permissive Overreach using Tp & Td for current reversal guard. Permissive Overreach using reverse Z4 for current reversal guard and including Weak Infeed echo. Permissive Overreach using reverse Z4 for current reversal guard and including Weak Infeed Trip. Unblocking Permissive Overreach using reverse Z4 for current reversal guard and including Weak Infeed Echo. Unblocking Permissive Overreach using reverse Z4 for current reversal guard and including Weak Infeed Trip.
BLOCKING1 BLOCKING2 In addition to these distance schemes, the relay has the following directional ground fault schemes available POR Permissive Overreach. POR UNBLOCK Unblocking Permissive Overreach. POR WI Permissive Overreach including Weak Infeed Trip. POR WI UNBLOCK Unblocking Permissive Overreach including Weak Infeed Trip.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
BLOCKING1 BLOCKING2 All the schemes are tested for correct operation within the factory. It is therefore only necessary to test the schemes to be used. 5.1 Zone 1 extension If this scheme is selected, zone 1 reach is extended to that of zone 1X. Ensure the opto-isolator input for RESET ZONE 1 EXTENSION is de-energized. Check the reaches (should be zone 1X) for each fault condition. Indication given should be for a zone 1 trip on the LCD. Energize RESET ZONE 1 EXTENSION opto-isolator input and recheck the reaches which should now be that of zone 1. 5.2 5.2.1 Permissive underreach Aided trip Energize opto-isolator input CRX1 and check that application of a zone 2 fault gives an instantaneous aided trip. Make sure that a zone 2 time-delayed trip is obtained when CRX1 opto-isolator input is de-energized. If the UNBLOCKING scheme is selected, LOSS OF GUARD (LGS) opto-isolator input must also be energized from the same switch as CRX1. 5.2.2 Signal send With CRX1 de-energized (and LGS if UNBLOCKING has been selected) check that application of a zone 1 fault causes the SIGNAL SEND contact to operate and a zone 2 fault does not. Note: If the reach stepped zone 1X is used then the SIGNAL SEND contact will drop off after zone 1X time delay. 5.2.3 TW timer, unblocking logic Ensure CRX1 opto-isolator input is de-energized. Apply a zone 2 fault and measure the trip time from energizing LGS optoisolator input. The time measured should be TW plus up to 9ms to allow for program loop time and contact operation time. Note: If zone 2 time delay is short then it may prove helpful to temporarily increase this timer to facilitate performing this test. Remember to reset it to the required setting. The recommended setting for TW is 10ms. 5.2.4 Channel-out-of-service If the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized, only three phase trips are allowed. On the LFZR111 three phase tripping is performed even if single phase tripping has been selected. This may be tested by applying a single phase-to-ground fault and monitoring the A, B and C trip contacts which should all close simultaneously.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
When the channel-out-of-service opto-isolator input is energized, the BAR contact should be checked to confirm that it operates when a trip occurs. Apply a zone 1 single phase-ground fault on phase A. 5.3 Permissive overreach If DEF aided tripping is selected then it should be blocked until the later tests are done. Alternatively, phase-phase faults could be applied. If either POR2 WI TRIP or POR2 WI TRIP UNBLOCK are selected, the weak infeed tripping feature should not be enabled until that particular test is performed. 5.3.1 Variable voltage setting This level detector only needs testing if the POR2 scheme is being used. The operating voltage is selectable over the range 3V - 20V. The setting is located under the DEF element menu. Select monitor option 06. Apply balanced three phase nominal voltage to the relay. Reduce one phase voltage until the detector operates. Note the level required to obtain the pickup. Drop-off should be within 20% of pick-up. LCD position and parallel socket no: Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 06 5.3.2 Aided trip Energize opto-isolator input CRX1 and check that application of a zone 2 fault gives an instantaneous aided trip. Make sure that a zone 2 time-delayed trip is obtained when CRX1 opto-isolator input is de-energized. Note: If an unblocking scheme is selected, energize the CRX1 and LOSS-OF-GUARD opto-isolator input from the same switch. 5.3.3 Signal send With CRX1 opto-isolator input de-energized (and LGS if unblocking has been selected), check that the application of a zone 2 fault causes the signal send contact to operate. 5.3.4 TP and TD timers 7 9 6 8 LDVN 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2
5.3.4.1 Recommendations for timer settings in current reversals POR1, POR1 Unblock The recommendation for setting TP is 30ms - channel operate. The recommendation for setting TD is 35ms + channel reset. The recommendation for setting TDW is 10ms. The recommendation for setting TDG is 35ms + channel reset.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.3.4.2 Recommendations for timer setting for POR2, POR2 Unblock, POR2 WI Trip, POR2 WI Trip Unblock The recommendation for setting TD is 35ms + channel reset delay. This provides a significant stability margin. The recommendation for setting TDG is 35ms + channel reset delay. This provides a significant stability margin. 5.3.4.3 TP (POR1 only) The current reversal guard in the POR1 scheme is initiated when a relay on a healthy line receives a permissive signal. A time delay, TP, is required to allow time for a zone 2 comparator to pick up. Note that TP is not used in schemes which utilise the weak infeed feature and/ or the guard is initiated by reverse-looking zone 4. Select monitor option 13. Arrange for a timer to start on monitor point box 7 (going from 0V to 5V) and stop on monitor point box 9 (going from 0V to 5V). The interval timer used should have 'Break to Start' and 'Break to Stop'. Energize CRX1 opto-isolator and note the time displayed on the timer which corresponds to the TP setting plus up to 7ms for allowance of program loop time. Note: If an unblocking scheme is selected, arrange a timer to start when the CRX1 and LGS opto-isolator inputs are energized. Record the time from energising the input to the time the output operates via timer1 on the monitor option. 5.3.4.4 T D When the current reversal guard is picked up, transfer tripping is inhibited until the permissive trip signal drops out or the zone 2 comparator operates in POR1. In POR2 the guard is on when a reverse-looking comparator picks up. A delay on dropout (TD) is required in case the zone 2 comparator picks up while the permissive signal is in the process of resetting; ie. would otherwise cause healthy line tripping. If POR1 is selected proceed as follows Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 3 (going from 0V to 5V) and stop on monitor point box 9 (going from 5V to 0V) with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should have 'Break for Start' and 'Make for Stop'. Ensure CRX1 opto-isolator input is energized. Apply a zone 2 fault and note the time which corresponds to the TD setting plus up to 5ms for allowance of program loop time. If an unblocking scheme is selected, energize CRX1 and LGS opto-isolator input and then proceed as above. If POR2 is selected proceed as follows: Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 5 (going from 5V to 0V) and stop on monitor point box 9 (going from 5V to 0V) with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should have 'Make for Start' and 'Make for Stop'.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Apply a zone 4 fault then reset the timer and remove the fault. The time obtained corresponds to the TD setting plus up to 5ms for allowance of program loop time. 5.3.5 TW timer, unblocking logic Time delay TW is necessary to prevent tripping during transient loss of guard. Ensure CRX1 opto-isolator input is de-energized. Apply a zone 2 fault and measure the time required to trip from the instance of energising the LGS opto-isolator input. TW time corresponds to its setting plus up to 9ms for allowance of program loop time and auxiliary relay operation time. Note: If zone 2 time-delay is short it may prove helpful to temporarily increase the delay to facilitate this test. The recommended setting for TW is 10ms. 5.3.6 Echo feature (POR1 or POR2) To make this functional, the opto-isolator input used to inform the relay when the breaker is open must be available. The feature enables signal send for 100ms on receipt of carrier once the breaker has been open for 250ms. If the feature is to be used, check it as follows: Connect a double pole switch so that one pole energizes the breaker open opto-isolator input and the other pole starts a timer. The switch should be open initially. The timer is stopped when the commissioning contact set to signal send operates. Energize CRX1 opto-isolator input then close the double pole switch. A time delay of 255-265ms should be obtained. Re-arrange the timer to measure the dwell time of the signal send contact. Open the double pole switch and on reclosing a time of 100-110ms should be measured. Note: Modern test sets can be programmed to open and close contacts in a sequential manner; ie. this would replace the need for the double pole switch. 5.3.7 Weak infeed trip (POR2) if selected This logic contains a delay on tripping of 60ms. Ensure the breaker open opto-isolator input is de-energized and no AC voltage is applied to the relay. Use a double pole switch to energize CRX1 opto-isolator input and start the timer. Stop the timer on operation of the any trip contact. A time delay of 60ms plus up to 10ms for allowance of program loop time and auxiliary relay contact operation time should be obtained. Aided trip indication should be obtained and three phase trips given. Note: If an unblocking scheme is selected, the loss-of-guard opto-isolator input must be energized with the same switch as CRX1. If single or three phase tripping has been selected, this may be confirmed by applying three phase voltage to the relay and reducing one phase-to-neutral
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
voltage. Energize CRX1 as above and observe that single pole tripping is achieved and the correct indication is given. 5.3.8 Channel-out-of-service If the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized, only three phase trips are allowed. On the LFZR111 three phase tripping is performed even if single phase tripping has been selected. This may be tested by applying a single phase-to-ground fault and monitoring the A, B and C trip contacts which should all close simultaneously. When the channel-out-of-service opto-isolator input is energized, the BAR contact should be checked to confirm that it operates when a trip occurs. Apply a zone 1 single phase-ground fault on phase A. 5.4 Blocking 1 A blocking signal is sent when a high-speed zone 4 element operates and its corresponding zone 2 element does not operate. A distance aided trip is achieved by the operation of the zone 2 element. This is blocked by operation of the distance current reversal guard logic. The reverse-looking zone 4 must be selected from the menu. Time delays are necessary to prevent maloperation. These time delays have to be set to take into account different signalling channel times, comparator operation times, and logic processing times. TP is set to delay tripping after a zone 2 comparator has operated. This allows a possible blocking signal to be received from the relay at the other line end. For current reversal conditions a small delay in drop-off of the blocking signal is required to prevent unwanted trips while the zone 2 comparator is resetting. The recommended settings are: Recommendations for the setting of the current reversal guard timers (recorded with carrier pickup and drop off delay of 10ms) Distance scheme: TP = 14ms + channel pickup delay TD = 30ms + channel pickup delay Shared channel DEF: TPG = 14ms + channel pickup delay TDG = 30ms + channel pickup delay 5.4.1 TP Timer DEF aided tripping should be inhibited until later tests are done (alternatively, phase-phase faults can be applied). Ensure the CRX1 opto-isolator input and channel-out-of-service opto-isolator input are de-energized. Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 3 (going from 0V to 5V) and stop on monitor point box 6 (going from 0V to 5V) with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should have 'Break for Start' and 'Break for Stop'.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Apply a fault just outside the zone 1 reach. The time obtained is the TP setting plus up to 10ms for program loop time. A DISTANCE AIDED indication should appear on the LCD. The aided trip alarm contact should be checked if used. 5.4.2 TD timer Ensure that the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is de-energized and CRX1 opto isolator is initially energized. Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 7 (going from 5V to 0V) and stop on monitor point box 9 (going from 5V to 0V) with terminal 22 common. De-energize the CRX1 opto isolator input and note the TD time which is the TD setting plus up to 4ms for allowance of the program loop time. Energize the CRX1 opto isolator input then apply a fault outside the zone 1 reach and check that a time-delayed trip is obtained. 5.4.3 Signal send Check that the application of a high speed zone 4 fault causes the signal send contact to operate and that a zone 2 fault does not. 5.4.4 Channel-out-of-service If the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized then the relay reverts to the basic scheme and only three phase trips are allowed. On the LFZR111 three phase tripping is performed even if single or three phase tripping has been selected. This may be proved by applying a single phaseground fault and monitoring the A, B and C trip contacts which should all close simultaneously. When the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized, the BAR contact should be checked to confirm that it operates when a trip occurs. Apply single zone 1 phase-ground fault on phase A. 5.5 Blocking 2 A normally open contact is used to start carrier. A normally open contact stops carrier when it closes. It will work with just the signal start contact if required. The operation of high speed zone 4 elements operates signal start. If the DEF is enabled then the reverse DEF element will also operate signal start. The signal stop is controlled by the zone 2 comparator and also the DEF forward element if enabled. Aided tripping is obtained when either of these operate and no block signal is received within a small delay time. The start and stop signals are also used internally to control aided tripping. These time delays have to be set to take into account different signalling channel times, comparator operation times, and logic processing times. TP is set to delay tripping after a zone 2 element has operated to allow a possible blocking signal to be received from the relay at the other line end. For current reversal conditions a small delay in drop-off of the blocking signal is required to prevent unwanted trips while the zone 2 comparator is resetting.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The recommended settings are: Recommendations for the setting of the current reversal guard timers (recorded with carrier pickup and drop offdelay of 10ms). Distance scheme: TP = 14ms + channel pickup delay TD = 30ms + channel pickup delay Shared channel DEF: TPG = 14ms + channel pickup delay TDG = 30ms + channel pickup delay Independent channel DEF POR: TDG = 14ms + channel reset delay TD = 30ms + channel reset delay 5.5.1 TP timer and distance channel-aided trip Apply a fault just inside the zone 2 reach with sufficient current to operate the high set current level detectors. DEF aided tripping should be inhibited until later tests are done. Alternatively, phase-phase faults can be applied. Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 3 (going from 0V to 5V) and stop on monitor point box 6 (going from 0V to 5V) with terminal 22 being common. Ensure CRX1 opto-isolator input and CHANNEL-OUT-OF-SERVICE opto isolator input are de-energized. The interval timer used should have 'Break to Start' and 'Break to Stop' selected. The time obtained is the TP setting plus up to 3ms for program loop time. A DISTANCE AIDED indication should be given on the LCD. Check that the signal stop contact closes. Also, the aided trip alarm contact should be checked if used. 5.5.2 TD timer and signal start Select monitor option 13 and arrange a timer to start on the pick-up of the high speed zone 4 element, monitor point box 5 (going from 0V to 5V). The timer is stopped on the drop off of monitor point box 9 (going from 5V to 0V) with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should have 'Break to Start' and 'Make to Stop' selected. Ensure that the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is de-energized. Apply a reverse zone 4 fault and measure the time obtained on removing the fault. This will result in TD plus up to 3ms. Also check that the signal start contact closes while the fault is applied. 5.5.3 Channel-out-of-service check If the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized the relay reverts to the basic scheme and only three phase trips are allowed. On the LFZR111 three phase tripping is performed even if single or three phase tripping has been selected. This may be proved by applying a single phase-ground fault
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
and monitoring the A, B and C trip contacts which should all close simultaneously. When the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input is energized the BAR contact should be checked to confirm that it operates when a trip occurs. Apply single zone 1 phase-ground fault on phase A. 5.6 Signalling channel test This test should be applied to any scheme using a signalling channel when the channel in service is available and in service. An engineer is required at each end of the protected line and some form of verbal communication is necessary; eg. telephone or radio. At one end select the contact test page of the menu structure and enable the signal send 1 or 2 contact. At the other end select either monitor option 15 and observe position 1 (CRX1 opto isolator input) or monitor option 16 and observe position 5 (CRX2 opto isolator input). Turn on the contact at the first end and the appropriate monitor option position will display 1 to indicate that carrier has been received. This procedure should then be reversed.
SECTION 6.
6.1 6.1.1
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT
Current level detectors DEF instantaneous level detector The operating current is selectable over the range 0.2In - 30In. Select monitor option 06. Apply unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase and note the level required to obtain the pick-up of the level detector. The directional element is tested by applying unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase above the level of the level detector such that the A phase voltage and current are in phase. The DEF-FWD indication must pick up. Repeat the above test with the A phase current in antiphase with the A phase voltage. The DEF-REV indication must pick up. LCD Position and Parallel Socket No. Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 06 7 9 6 8 5 7 4 6 3 2 5 4 LDEHS1N 1 0 3 2 DEF_REV DEF_FWD
6.1.2
BU1 level detector The operating current is selectable over the range 0.2In - 30In. Select monitor option 06. Apply unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase and note the level
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
required to obtain the pick-up of the level detector. The directional element is tested by applying unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase above the level of the level detector such that the A phase voltage and current are in phase. The DEF-FWD indication must pick up. Repeat the above test with the A phase current in antiphase with the A phase voltage. The DEF-REV indication must pick up. LCD Position and Parallel Socket No. Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 06 6.1.3 BU3 level detector The operating current is selectable over the range 0.2In - 30In. Select monitor option 06. Apply unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase and note the level required to obtain the pick-up of the level detector. The directional element is tested by applying unbalanced three phase voltage to the relay with the A phase voltage set to nominal voltage less 3V. Inject current into A phase above the level of the level detector such that the A phase voltage and current are in phase. The DEF-FWD indication must pick up. Repeat the above test with the A phase current in antiphase with the A phase voltage. The DEF-REV indication must pick up. LCD Position and Parallel Socket No. Data line no. Parallel port pin no. Option 06 6.2 6.2.1 Time delayed trip Operation time Set the relay to the required curve setting. For curves 1 to 4 inject 10 x base setting (or see Note 1) and note the time for the DEF TRIP contact to operate. Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for this setting is set to 1.0. For other values of TMS multiply the operating time given below accordingly. CURVE IEC SI IEC VI IEC EI IEC LTI US MI US SI US VI US EI TIME (x MULT t) s 2.971 1.500 0.808 13.333 2.413 2.401 1.378 0.813 TOLERANCE UNDER COMMISSIONING CONDITIONS 10% FOR CURRENTS GREATER THAN 2Is 7 9 6 8 5 7 4 6 LDEHS3N 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2 7 9 6 8 5 7 4 6 LDEHS2N 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2
DEF_REV DEF_FWD
DEF_REV DEF_FWD
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
For curves 5 to 8 it may be necessary to check two points; see Note 1. Note: 1. If the test equipment used is not capable of supplying 10Is or a different point on the curve is checked, refer to Figure 3 which gives the DEF back-up time delay curves. 2. If a blocking scheme is selected, energize CRX opto isolator input. 6.3 DEF channel-aided trip DEF aided tripping is available on all the permissive overreach schemes and in the blocking schemes. Schemes POR1 and POR1 UNBLOCK make use of timer TDG. If these schemes are to be used they may be checked as follows. Note: POR2 DEF uses the same reversal guard timer setting as the distance. There is only one menu setting for the drop-off time delay for the guard (TD). 6.3.1 POR1 or POR1 unblock T DG Apply a fault that will only pick up the reverse-looking DEF comparator. This is shown by monitor option 14, monitor point box 3 (going from 0V to 5V). To time the operation of the TDG timer select monitor option 14 and arrange a timer to start on monitor point box 2 (going from 0V to 5V). The timer is stopped on monitor point box 5 (going from 5V to 0V) with terminal 22 being common. The interval times used should be set for 'Break to Start' and 'Make to Stop'. The time obtained is TDG plus up to 9ms for processing time. 6.3.2 POR2 The procedure is exactly the same as above but the time obtained will be T DG plus up to 9ms processing time. 6.3.3 Blocking 1 IND CHANNEL BLOCKING 1 TPG = 14ms + channel pickup delay TDG = 30ms + channel pickup delay TPG Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 2 picks up (going from 0V to 5V) on the application of a fault only seen by the DEF forward comparator. The timer is stopped when monitor point box 5 picks up (going from 0v to 5V), with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should be set to 'Break to Start' and 'Break to Stop'. If single or three phase tripping is selected the measured time is T PG plus up to 8ms for contact operation and processing. T DG The CRX1 opto input is initially energized. Select monitor option 13 and start a timer when monitor point box 7 drops off
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
(going from 5V to 0V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 4 drops off (going from 5V to 0V), with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should be set to 'Make to Start' and 'Make to Stop'. The CRX1 opto isolator input should be energized. The time obtained is TDG plus up to 6ms processing time. 6.3.4 Blocking 2 IND CHANNEL BLOCKING 2 Shared channel DEF: TPG = 14ms + channel pickup delay TDG = 30ms + channel pickup delay TPG Apply a ground fault that will only be seen by the DEF forward-looking comparator; ie. a high impedance or resistive fault outside the reach of the distance elements. Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 2 picks up (going from 0V to 5V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 5 picks up (going from 0V to 5V), with terminal 22 being common. Ensure CRX opto isolator input and channel-out-of-service opto isolator input are de-energized. AN ALSTOM timer should be set to 'Break to Start' and 'Break to Stop' selected. The time obtained will be TPG setting plus up to 3ms for program loop time. DEF AIDED indication will be given on the LCD. Check that the signal stop contact closes. Also, check the aided trip alarm contact if it is used. TDG Apply a ground fault that will only be seen by the DEF reverse-looking comparator; ie. a high impedance or resistive fault outside the reach of the distance elements. Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 3 drops off (going from 5V to 0V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 9 drops off (going from 5V to 0V), with terminal 22 being common. Ensure that the channel-out-of-service opto isolator is de-energized. The interval timer used should have 'Make to Start' and 'Make to Stop' selected. Apply the fault. Reset the timer and measure the time obtained on removing the fault. This time is TDG plus up to 3ms. Also check that the signal start contact closes while the fault is applied. 6.3.5 Aided trip If a POR scheme is selected, energize CRX1 opto isolator input. If an unblocking POR scheme is selected, energize the Loss-of-guard opto isolator input alone. If the blocking scheme is selected ensure that all opto-isolator input inputs are deenergized.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Apply a forward fault outside the distance zones reach and check that the instantaneous DEF aided trip is given. (There must be sufficient current to pick up the DEF current level detectors). 6.3.6 Channel-out-of-service Apply a forward fault with the channel-out-of-service opto isolator input energized, and check that DEF aided tripping can not be obtained. 6.4 6.4.1 Independent channel DEF trip POR The independent channel DEF POR scheme can be checked by enabling it through the menu and then testing as described in Section 6.3.1. 6.4.2 Blocking TPG This time can be measured in the same way as Section 6.3.3. T DG The CRX2 opto isolator input is initially energized. Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 7 drops off (going from 5V to 0V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 4 drops off (going from 5V to 0V), with terminal 22 being common. The interval timer used should be set to 'Make to Start' and 'Make to Stop'. The CRX2 opto isolator input should be energized and the time obtained is TDG plus up to 3ms processing time. 6.4.3 Blocking 2 TPG Apply a ground fault that will only be seen by the DEF forward-looking comparator; ie. a high impedance or resistive fault outside the reach of the distance elements. Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 2 picks up (going from 0V to 5V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 5 picks up (going from 0V to 5V), with terminal 22 being common. Ensure that the CRX2 opto isolator isolator and channel-out-of-service 2 opto isolator inputs are de-energized. The interval timer used should be set to 'Break to Start' and 'Break to Stop' selected. The time obtained is TPG plus up to 3ms for program loop time. The DEF AIDED indication should be given on the LCD. T DG Apply a ground fault that will only be seen by the DEF reverse-looking comparator. Select monitor option 14 and start a timer when monitor point box 3 drops off (going from 5V to 0V). Stop the timer when monitor point box 4 drops off (going from 5V to 0V), with terminal 22 common.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
The interval timer used should have 'Make to Start' and 'Make to Stop' selected. Apply the fault. Reset the timer and measure the time obtained on removing the fault. This is TDG plus up to 3ms. Also, check that the signal start contact closes while the fault is applied.
SECTION 7.
7.1
LIVE SYSTEM TESTS
Signalling channel If the scheme requires the use of a signalling channel and the check has not been done recently then the tests in Section 5.6 should be carried out.
7.2
Final setting checks The check list in the commissioning sheets, Appendix D, should now be referred to and used in conjunction with the menu scrolling facility to check that all settings are correct. As an alternative, a print out of settings may be obtained using the print option in the menu and a suitable printer.
7.3
On load tests As there could be a risk of tripping, maintain trip isolation or block contact operation in the menu if required. For the following checks it has been assumed that 3 type MMLG test blocks have been fitted and are wired as recommended in Figure 1. If alternative test facilities are provided, refer to the panel wiring diagram and adapt the procedure to suit.
7.3.1
Voltage transformer tests Insert an MMLB01 test plug into test block 3. With the line energized, check the voltage input to the protection across each pair of phases and between each phase and neutral. Check for correct phase rotation with a phase rotation meter.
7.3.2
VT/CT phasing To ensure that the corresponding voltage and current go to a given relay element it is necessary to check that the phase angle between them agrees with the known load power factor. Connect A-G voltage to a phase angle meter voltage input terminals. Pay careful attention to polarity. Check that the default displays metering information is in agreement. Pre-wire another MMLB01 connecting A phase current to the current connection of the phase angle meter and providing shorts for the other current paths as shown in Figure 2. Insert this plug into MMLG test block 1. Check that the phase angle measured gives reasonable agreement with the known load power factor.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
This procedure must be repeated for all phases. Remove both test plugs. With the relay energized from the line voltage transformers and current transformers, use the metering option of the relay to ensure that the phase relationship between the three phases is correct. In addition confirm that the importing/exporting power agrees with known values for the line.
SECTION 8.
OPTO ISOLATOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND FUNCTIONS

LFZR111 CB auxiliary A CB auxiliary B CB auxiliary C LFZR112 CB auxiliary Channel receive (1)/ Z1X reset Channel out of service (1)/Loss of guard (1) Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger Disturbance record Setting group select 1 Setting group select 2 Setting group select 3 Setting group select 4 Setting group select 5 Channel receive (2) Channel out of service (2)/Loss of guard (2) LFZR113 CB auxiliary Channel receive (1)/ Z1X reset Channel out of service (1)/Loss of guard Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger Disturbance record N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Terminal 85-87 89-91 93-95 97-99 101-103 105-107 109-111 86-88 90-92 94-96 98-100 102-104 106-108 110-112
Channel receive (1)/ Z1X Channel out of service (1)/Loss of guard (1) Channel receive (2) Channel out of service (2)/Loss of guard (2) Block voltage dependent functions (MCB) Direct transfer trip Stub bus isolator External trigger Disturbance record Autoreclose in progress Convert to three pole trip Spare opto
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Direction of power flow for operation

A
IA IB In
MMLG01 Test block 1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB1-19 TB1-20 TB1-21 TB1-22 TB1-23 TB1-24 TB6-1 TB6-2 TB2-49 TB2-51 TB1-25 TB1-26 TB1-27 TB1-28
L F Z R 1 0 0
Signal send
{
In
17 19 21 23 25 27
Spare current
MMLG01 Test block 2 1 3 5 7 Opto Inputs LFZR111/112/113 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 Opto Inputs LFZR111/112 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB4-109 TB4-86 TB4-90 TB4-94 TB4-98 TB4-102 TB4-111 TB4-88 TB4-92 TB4-96 TB4-100 TB4-104 TB4-85 TB4-89 TB4-93 TB4-97 TB4-101 TB4-105 TB4-87 TB4-91 TB4-95 TB4-99 TB4-103 TB4-107
MMLG01 Test block 3 1 3 5 7 Commissioning contact 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 TB1-1 TB1-2 TB1-15 TB1-16 TB1-17 TB1-18 TB4-106 TB4-110 TB4-93 TB4-97 TB4-101 TB4-105 TB4-108 TB4-112
DC supply
Spare voltage
{ { {
9 11 + 13 15 17 VA VB VC VN 19 21 23 25 27
Figure 1.
MMLG test block connections for LFZR relays
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

MMLB 01 Test Plug 1
IA IB IC
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 These connections must be made before the test plug is inserted
IN
22 24 26 28
MMLB 01 Test Plug 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
MMLB 01 Test Plug 3 2 4 6 8 10 12 Check volts V before linking X1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
14 16 18
VA These connections must be made after the test plug is inserted VB VC VN
20 22 24 26 28
Figure 1a.
Normal test plug connections for secondary injection
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

MMLB 01 Test Plug 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 These connections must be made before the test plug is inserted + Current coil phase angle meter
MMLB 01 Test Plug 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
MMLB 01 Test Plug 3 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Current coil phase angle meter +
Figure 2.
Test plug connection for on load test CT/VT phasing
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
1000.0000
1000.0000
100.0000
100.0000
Operating time (s)
10.0000 Curve 4
Curve 1
Operating time (s)
10.0000
Curve 6 Curve 5 Curve 7
1.0000 Curve 2
1.0000
Curve 3
Curve 8
0.1000 1.0000 10.0000 Current (Multiples of Is) 0.14 100.0000
0.1000 1.0000
100.0000
Curve 1 Standard Inverse Curve 2 Very Inverse Curve 3 Extremely Inverse Curve 4 Long time Earth Fault
t= t= t= t=
0.02
-1 13.5
I-1 80 I
2
-1 120
I-1
Figure 3a.
IEC characteristics
Figure 3b. American characteristics
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 9.
Monitor Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1
MONITOR OPTIONS
2 3 4 5 6 7
Z1_A Z1X_A Z2_A Z3_A Z4_A Z4HS_A DEF_FWD LDLSA LDOCA PHS_AN PHS_ABN TrAPh SOTF_EN SigSend1 DEF_FWD Opto 1 Opto 8 Contact 1 Contact 9 Contact 17 Contact 25 Z1mhoAN Z1quadAN Z1XmhoAN Z2mhoAN Z2quadAN Z3mhoAN Z4mhoAN Z4quadAN
Z1_B Z1X_B Z2_B Z2_B Z4_B Z4HS_B DEF_REV LDLSB LDOCB PHS_BN PHS_BCN TrBPh TOR_EN Z2 DEF_REV Opto 2 Opto 9 Contact 2 Contact 10 Contact 18 Contact 26 Z1mhoBN Z1quadBN Z1XmhoBN Z2mhoBN Z2quadBN Z3mhoBN Z4mhoBN Z4quadBN
Z1_C Z1X_C Z2_C Z3_C Z4_C Z4HS_C LDLSBN LDLSC LDOCC PHS_CN PHS_CAN TrCPh PD_A Timer2 Timer2 Opto 3 Opto 10 Contact 3 Contact 11 Contact 19 Contact 27 Z1mhoCN Z1quadCN Z1XmhoCN Z2mhoCN Z2quadCN Z3mhoCN Z4mhoCN Z4quadCN
Z1_AB Z1X_AB Z2_AB Z3_AB Z4_AB Z4HS_AB LDEHS1N LDOVA LOLA PHS_AB PHSp3PH FltBph PD_B Z4HS DEF Aided Opto 4 Opto 11 Contact 4 Contact 12 Contact 20 Contact 28 Z1mhoAB Z1XquadAN Z1XmhoAB Z2mhoAB Z3quadAN Z3mhoAB Z4mhoAB DEFrawFW
Z1_BC Z1X_BC Z2_BC Z3_BC Z4_BC Z4HS_BC LDEHS2N LDOVB LOLB PHS_BC PHS_2CYCL FltCPh PD_C Dist Aided SigSend2 Opto 5 Opto 12 Contact 5 Contact 13 Contact 21 Contact 29 Z1mhoBC Z1XquadBN Z1XmhoBC Z2mhoBC Z3quadBN Z3mhoBC Z4mhoBC DEFrawFW
Z1_CA Z1X_CA Z2-CA Z3_CA Z4_CA Z4HS_CA LDEHS3N LDOVC LOLC PHS_CA PHS_5CYCL FltN PSB_ACTIV AnyStart FREQ_OUT LDVN LDVOVTS IDMT Reset LDVN
CRX1A ICDEF_CRX Opto 6 Opto 13 Contact 6 Contact 14 Contact 22 Contact 30 Z1mhoCA Z1XquadCN Z1XmhoCA Z2mhoCA Z3quadCN Z3mhoCA Z4mhoCA DEFrawREV
CRX1B CRX1B Opto 7 Opto 14 Contact 7 Contact 15 Contact 23 Contact 31
Timer1 Timer1 O O Contact 8 Contact 16 Contact 24 Contact 32
SECTION 10. FAULT FINDING

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY FAULT FINDING ON THE RELAY REFERENCE SHOULD BE MADE TO THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL. The aim of this section is to allow faults within the LFZR100 relay system to be identified. It is also possible for the LFZR to indicate errors in the inputs to the relay which are indicated using alarm type event records, an example of this is the frequency out of range alarm (AlarmFOR). The details of these alarm event records can be found in Volume 2 of the manual (User Interface). A description of the LFZR hardware and software system can be found in Volume 1 Chapter 3, Section 5. This also details the physical structure of the relay and the locations of the relay sub-modules. If the fault finding indicates the failure of one of the relay sub-modules, refer to the maintenance section before attempting to replace the faulted module.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Page 34 of 40 Test Conclusion Off-Goto 2 On-Goto 3
10.1 Index 1
Failure during power up Symptom
Relay Fails to Check Power LED power up to menu. Power LED Off Test terminal block TB6 for rated DC voltage Vx(1), Terminal 1DC+, Terminal 2 DCCheck Relay Healthy LED Unscrew door catch and open relay front panel. Check board LEDs Remove then re-apply DC voltage Vx(1) to the relay, check the LCD display for diagnositcs during power up, see Figure 4
DC Voltage vx(1) CorrectPower supply failure DC Voltage Vx(1) Incorrect, check fuse and wiring. Off - Goto 4 On - Goto 5 The board issuing the failure should be indicated by the LED being off. No display during power up Front panel Failure Host display only Protection processor board failure. Protection display only Host Processor board Failure. Both host and protection diagnostics Goto 6.
3 4
Power LED On Relay Healthy Off
Relay Healthy On
Self Test Diagnostics
Examine diagnostic information displayed during the power up self testing. (See Figure 4.)
"Failure Code 1" indicates a Front Panel Failure. For all other codes (2 to 7) the error is detected on the Host or PPB board and that board requires replacing.
Host Processor Diagnostic Information
Protection Processor Diagnostic information
Figure 4:
Relay LCD, Power-up diagnostic information
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
10.2
Failure during operation
10.2.1 Self test error If the relay self testing indicates an error in either of the two main processor boards the relevant board will automatically re-boot. If the failure is due to a fault in the hardware the fault will be detected by the power up diagnositcs, refer to the table above. If the relay successfully performs a re-boot the event records should be examined. 10.2.2 Analogue input failure As is mentioned in the relay description of Chapter 3 the analogue input module incorporates self testing. This ensures that an error will be flagged if the module stops acquiring analogue data. The measurements area of the menu can be used to verify the correct operation of the analogue inputs, this test is included as part of the commissioning procedure. If, on examination of the measurements, one of the analogue signals does not appear to be being read correctly the problem can be isolated using the following method: 1. Check the wiring to the relay is complete. Ensure that the signal path is not broken by a test block. If any other equipment is connected to the same supply this can be used to verify the correct functioning of this supply. 2. If the signal to the relay appears to be correct then secondary injection testing can be used to decide whether the fault is within the LFZR relay. Refer to Section 4 of the commissioning instructions for the secondary injection connections. If the correct measurement information is recorded for the faulted analogue signal the problem must lie in the connection to the relay. If the injected analogue signal cannot be measured by the relay the fault must lie within the relay analogue input module. 10.2.3 Opto input failure If the relay does not appear to be responding to status information present on the opto inputs the operation can be verified. Selecting the appropriate monitor option (either 15 or 16 in Section 9) allows the status of the opto input signals to be examined. The rated DC Voltage Vx(1) should be applied to the relevant opto input, this can be checked at the rear of the relay using a voltmeter. The monitor options can then be used to verify whether the relay is receiving the input. If it cannot the fault must lie on one of the opto input PCBs. Opto inputs 86-88, 90-92, 94-96, 98-100, 102-104,106-108, 110-112 85-87, 89-91, 93-95, 97-99, 101-103, 105-107, 109-111 10.2.4 Contact failure If one of the relay contacts is suspected of not operating correctly the commissioning test options can be used to verify correct operation of the relay. To perform the test the contacts should be disabled from the Contact Tests page, the appropriate contact can be selected and manually closed and opened. If the contact does not operate (this can be checked using a continuity tester) the relevant output contact card may be at fault. If the card is replaced the jumper Board position 1 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
(link) positions for the card must be the same as that being replaced (see the System Overview section of the manual). Note 1. The trip contacts of the relay should be isolated before operating any of the output relays. 2. To operate the individual contacts all output relays have to be disabled from the menu, this will cause the protection to become unavailable. Contact Outputs 58-60, 58-62, 58-64, 66-68, 70-72, 74-76, 78-80, 82-84 57-59, 57-61, 57-63, 65-67, 69-71, 73-75, 77-79, 81-83 30-32, 30-34, 30-36, 38-40, 42-44, 46-48, 50-52, 54-56 29-31, 29-33, 29-35, 37-39, 41-43, 45-47, 49-51, 53-55 Board Position 3 4 5 6
SECTION 11. RELAY MAINTENANCE

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE RELAY REFERENCE SHOULD BE MADE TO THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL . 11.1. PCB and module handling The electronic circuits within the LFZR relay are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. When removing a PCB or module from the case a conductive wrist strap should be worn at all times and the module placed on an anti-static or conductive surface. The wrist strap should have a resistance to ground of between 500k to 10M. ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd strongly recommends that modification work on the electronic circuitry should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F. 11.2 Module replacement If the relay fails to operate correctly then refer to section 10 Fault Finding which is used to determine which of the hardware modules has become faulty. The module removed should be replaced with one of an identical part number.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Chapter 4 Page 37 of 40 Number GJ0334 001 GJ0334 002 GJ0343 001 GJ0343 002 GJ0343 003 ZJ0267 001 ZJ0267 002 ZJ0267 003 ZJ0267 004 ZJ0268 001 ZJ0268 002 ZJ0270 001 ZJ0271 001 ZJ0271 002
Module Description Analogue Input Module (1A CTs) Analogue Input Module (5A CTs) Power Supply (50V) Module Power Supply (110v) Module Power Supply (220V) Module Relay Ouput (all NO contacts) Relay Output (NO contacts with NC alarm) Relay Output (NO contacts with RL7 NC) Relay Output (NO contacts with NC alarm and RL6 & 7 NC) Opto Input (50V) Opto Input (110V) Protection Processor Host Processor (4M DRAM) Host Processor (8M DRAM) 11.2.1 Initial instructions
The PCB and module housing instructions should be observed when removing any modules. Ensure that the trip contacts are isolated before removing the auxiliary dc voltage Vx(1) supply from the relay. For personal safety, all ac supplies should be removed from the relay. Undo the top and bottom securing screws and remove the relay front cover. Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the securing screw located to the right hand side of the case. 11.2.2 Analogue input module replacement The analogue module is removed by undoing the two retaining screws and sliding the catch up on the power supply module and then sliding the unit forward by means of the handles provided. The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure. Note: The PCB and transformers within the analogue module are calibrated together therefore the PCB and transformers which make up the module must not be separated. 11.2.3 Power supply module replacement The power supply is removed by sliding the catch located on the front of the module and sliding the unit out. The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
11.2.4 Processor module replacement The processors board are removed using an extraction tool to withdraw the appropriate PCB. The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot. 11.2.5 Opto input and relay output replacement To gain access to the boards the ribbon cable should be unplugged from the rear of the front door and the door lifted up from its hinge. The hinge plate fixed to the relay should be removed by means of the four fixing screws. The ribbon cable running along the front of the opto and relay boards should be unplugged from each card. The appropriate PCB should be removed using an extraction tool. The address jumpers on the replacement PCB should be set as per the instructions detailed in the system overview section of the manual. The replacement PCB should then be slotted into place. The relay can be reassembled using the reverse procedure. 11.3 Battery replacement The battery within the LFZR is provided to maintain the clock to the correct time following an interruption of the DC Voltage Vx(1) supply to the relay. If the clock is not required to be maintained during an interruption of the DC Voltage Vx(1) supply or a permanent IRIG-B signal is provided, then the steps below can be followed to remove the battery, but do not replace with a new battery. Note: If the battery is removed a DC voltage Vx(1) interruption will cause the clock and date to start from 00:00:00 1980 Jan 01. No warning of the date and time needing resetting is given. 11.3.1 Instructions for replacing the battery Ensure that the trip contacts are isolated before removing the auxiliary DC supply from the relay. For personal safety, all ac supplies should be removed from the relay. Undo the top and bottom securing screws and remove the relay front cover. Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the securing screw located to the right hand side of the case. Using an extraction tool, withdraw the top PCB from the relay (Main Microcontroller Board ZJ0271) from the relay case and place it on the conductive surface with the electronic components facing upwards. Gently extract the battery from its socket using a small screwdriver to prize the battery free. Once removed care should be taken NOT to place the battery legs down on the conductive surface. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder. The flat area on the holder should be aligned with the flat area on the battery.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
If the PCB is left with the battery fitted on the anti-static surface the battery will begin to discharge through the conducting surface. Therefore it is recommended that the PCB ZJ0271 is replaced into the case immediately after replacing the battery. Close the front panel of the relay and tighten the securing screw. Relocate the front cover and tighten the top and bottom screws. 11.3.2 Post modification tests Energise the relay DC Voltage Vx(1) and check the self power routine. Set the relay clock to the correct time and date and power the relay down and on again, ensure that the battery has maintained the time correctly. Re-connect the Trip contacts and the AC supplies to the relay, putting it back into service. 11.3.3 Battery disposal The spent battery should have its legs cut off and be disposed of in accordance with the country of operations disposal procedure for Lithium batteries.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Appendix A Relay Front Panel Menu
MENU System Data Display Options Records Measurements Relay Data Page 1 of 2 English **** Main One ************ LFZR100******* PgDn Page 2 of 2 *********C 50Hz 1 1
Print Communications Active Group Setting Groups Commission
SYSTEM DATA Language Password Description Plant Reference Model Number
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE
SYSTEM DATA Serial Number System Frequency Comms Level Relay Address
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
HELP Page 1 of 3 Primary km Polar 0 Phase PgDn Page 2 of 3 Distance A B C N
CLOSE
PgDn
DISPLAY OPTIONS Values Distance Units Complex Measurement Mode Meas
HELP
CLOSE
DISPLAY OPTIONS Fault Location Phase A Label Phase B Label Phase C Label Ground Label
HELP Page 3 of 3 Enabled
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
DISPLAY OPTIONS Self Reset Flags
HELP
CLOSE
PgUp
RECORDS Event Records Fault Records Event Trigger Date and Time Clear Records EVENT RECORD 13Apr1994 12.00:11:110 13Apr1994 12.00:11:172 PSB Alarm: ON PSB Alarm: OFF
HELP HELP CLOSE PgDn PgUp
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
FAULT RECORDS Last Fault-N
FAULT RECORD Page 1 of 6 13Apr1994 12:00:00:000 Trip Zone: 1 1X 2 Phase: A B
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE FAULT RECORD Location Duration Operate Time System Frequency
PgDn 34km 54ms 24ms 50.1Hz
PREV Page 2 of 6
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix A Page 1 of 16
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
FAULT RECORD Prefault Primary Values Phase Voltage A 89.0kV 0 B 89.0kV 120 C 89.0kV -120 Current 2.00kA 0 2.00kA 120 2.00kA -120 PgDn Page 4 of 6 I1: I2: I0: 2.00kA 0 0.20kA 120 0.50kA -120 PgUp HELP FAULT RECORD Prefault Primary Values V1: 123kV 0 V2: 23kV 110 V0: 8kV -215 CLOSE
Page 3 of 6
HELP FAULT RECORD Fault Primary Values Phase Voltage A 89.0kV 0 B 89.0kV 120 C 89.0kV -120 Current 2.00kA 0 2.00kA 120 2.00kA -120 PgDn Page 6 of 6 I1: I2: I0: 2.00kA 0 0.20kA 120 0.50kA -120 PgUp HELP FAULT RECORD Fault Primary Values V1: 123kV 0 V2: 23kV 110 V0: 8kV -215 CLOSE Page 5 of 6
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP EVENT TRIGGER Any Contact Status Input Scheme Alarm Setting Change Page 1 of 2 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
HELP EVENT TRIGGER Event Recording Page 2 of 2 Enabled
CLOSE
PgDn
HELP
CLOSE
PgUp
DATE AND TIME Date + time IRIG-B Sync IRIG B Status Local Time=UTC 12:00:00,1994 Jan01 Enabled Active +1:00
HELP
CLOSE
CLEAR RECORDS Clear Records
HELP
CLOSE
CLEAR
MEASUREMENTS Primary Real Power Reactive Power Frequency Measurement Mode
Page 1 of 3
100MW 20.0MVAR 50.2Hz 0
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
MEASUREMENTS Primary Phase Voltage A 89.0kV 0 B 89.0kV 120 C 89.0kV -120 PgUp
Page 2 of 3
Current 2.00kA 0 2.00kA 120 2.00kA -120
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
MEASUREMENTS Fault Primary Values V1: 123kV 0 V2: 23kV 110 V0: 8kV -215
Page 3 of 3
I1: I2: I0:
2.00kA 0 0.20kA 120 0.50kA -120
HELP
CLOSE
PgUp
RELAY DATA Relay Version Host Processor Protection Processor Analogue Input Front Display RELAY VERSION Model Number Serial Number Nominal current Nominal Voltage DC Rating Vx1 VIEW HELP RELAY VERSION DC Rating Vx2 Page 2 of 2 110V CLOSE PgDn Page 1 of 2 ******** ******** 1A 110V 110V
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
HOST SOFTWARE Host Software Host PDU Serial Comms
Page 1 of 2 ******** ******** ********
HELP HOST SOFTWARE Host PLD A Host PLD B Host PLD C Page 2 of 2 ******** ******** ********
CLOSE
PgDn
PREV
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
PROTECTION PROCESSOR SLP Software ******** DSP Software ******** Scheme PDU ******** SLP PLD ********
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
ANALOGUE INPUT Calibration Software Analogue Input PLD ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
FRONT PANEL Front Panel PLD ********
HELP
CLOSE
PREV
PRINT Serial Print Parallel Print Printer Setup PARALLEL PRINT Print Settings Print Event Records Print Fault Records SETTINGS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Global STEP VIEW HELP CLOSE
(not available)
Group Group Group Group Active
5 6 7 8
HELP HELP CLOSE
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
STEP
PRINT
EVENT RECORDS Print Last 10
HELP
CLOSE
MORE
PRINT
FAULT RECORDS Print Last 10
HELP PRINTER SETUP Serial Baud Rate Serial Protocol Flow Control Serial Auto Print Parallel Auto Print N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Fault Records
CLOSE
MORE
PRINT
HELP
CLOSE
COMMUNICATIONS Configuration Modem Setup Dial Back CONFIGURATION Remote Setting Communication Port Communication Mode Transmit Delay Baud Rate VIEW HELP COMMS CONFIG Inactivity Timer Front Port Page 2 of 2 30min DTE CLOSE PgDn Page 1 of 2 Enabled Rear serial IEC 60870FT1.2 1.00ms 4800
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
MODEM SETUP Modem Support Initialisation String Start String Disconnect String Dial String HELP MODEM SETUP Initialise Modem CommandBaudRate CommandProtocol Page 2 of 2 Control 4800 7 Even 1 CLOSE PgDn PREV
Page 1 of 2 Enabled ****** ****** ****** ******
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
DIAL BACK Dial Back Call Place Delay Connection Delay Number Transmit Time Phone Recovery Time HELP DIAL BACK Site A Ref Site A Line 1 Site A Line 2 Site A Line 3 Site A Line 4 HELP DIAL BACK Site A Line 5 Site A Line 6 Site A Line 7 Site A Line 8 CLOSE PgDn PgUp Page 2 of 9 Stafford ******** ******** ******** ******** CLOSE PgDn PREV
Page 1 of 9 Enabled 10s 10s 10s 10s
Page 3 of 9 ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
DIAL BACK Site B Ref Site B Line 1 Site B Line 2 Site B Line 3 Site B Line 4 HELP DIAL BACK Site C Line 5 Site C Line 6 Site C Line 7 Site C Line 8 Page 5 of 9 ******** ******** ******** ******** CLOSE PgDn PgUp
Page 4 of 9 Cannock ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP DIAL BACK Site C Ref Site C Line 1 Site C Line 2 Site C Line 3 Site C Line 4 Lichfield ******** ******** ******** ******** PgDn Page 7 of 9 PgUp HELP DIAL BACK Site C Line 5 Site C Line 6 Site C Line 7 Site C Line 8 ******** ******** ******** ******** CLOSE Page 6 of 9
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP DIAL BACK Site D Ref Site D Line 1 Site D Line 2 Site D Line 3 Site D Line 4 Page 8 of 9 Telford ******** ******** ******** ********
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP DIAL BACK Site D Line 5 Site D Line 6 Site D Line 7 Site D Line 8 Page 9 of 9 ******** ******** ******** ********
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP
CLOSE
PgUp
ACTIVE GROUP Active Group 1
HELP
CLOSE
SETTING GROUPS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 5 6 7 8
Group Group Group Group
SETTING GROUP Line Parameters Aided Scheme Distance DEF
1 Extra Features Contacts Fault Locator Disturbance Set
LINE PARAMETERS Identifier Line Type Line Length Tripping Inst Trip Delay CLOSE STEP VIEW HELP CLOSE
Page 1 of 2 ************ Overhead Line 100km 1&3 Pole 0ms PgDn
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
SAVE AS GROUP Save As Group 1
LINE PARAMETERS ICB Fail Logic CB Fail Timer Relay Direction VT Ratio CT Ratio HELP CLOSE NEXT PgUp
Page 2 of 2 Enabled 200ms Forward 4750:1 2000:1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
HELP
ABORT
SAVE
AIDED SCHEME Distance Scheme DEF Scheme
DISTANCE SCHEME Distance Scheme Tripping TP TD TDW STEP VIEW HELP CLOSE
POR1 Phase + Ground 20ms 20ms 5ms NEXT PREV
HELP
CLOSE
DEF SCHEME DEF Scheme TPG TDG
20ms 20ms
Shared Channel
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
DISTANCE Distance Options Basic Scheme Zone 1 Zone 1X
Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Load Blinder
DISTANCE OPTIONS Page 1 of 2 Quadrilateral Enabled Custom Options Disabled Angle Setting 75 Residual Comp 1.00 70.1
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn DISTANCE OPTIONS Custom Sensitivity Enabled Directional Pol Standard
PREV Page 2 of 2
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
BASIC SCHEME Zone 1 Zone 1X (T) Zone 1X Delay Zone 2 (T) Zone 2 Delay HELP CLOSE BASIC SCHEME Zone 3 (T) Zone 3 Delay Zone 4 (T) Zone 4 Delay
Page 1 of 2 Phase + Ground Phase + Ground 1.00s Phase + Ground 2.00s PgDn PREV Page 2 of 2 Phase + Ground 4.00s Phase + Ground 8.00s
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
ZONE 1 Page 1 of 2 Z1 Phase Reach 10.0 70.0 Z1 Ph Pref Pickup 0.05A Z1 Ph Min Pickup 0.05A
HELP ZONE 1 Z1 Ground Reach Z1 Residual Reach Z1 Quad Resistance Z1 Ground Pref Pickup Z1Ground Min Pickup HELP CLOSE
CLOSE
PgDn
PREV Page 2 of 2 10.0 70.0 7.00 70 30.0 0.05A 0.05A NEXT PgUp
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
ZONE 1X Z1X Direction Z1X Phase Reach Z1X Ph Pref Pickup Z1 Ph Min Pickup
Page 1 of 2 Forward 10.0 70.0 0.05A 0.05A
HELP
CLOSE ZONE 1X Z1X Ground Reach Z1X Residual Reach Z1X Quad Resistance Z1X Ground Pref Pickup Z1X Ground Min Pickup HELP CLOSE
PgDn
ZONE 2 Z2 Phase Reach Z2 Ph Pref Pickup Z2 Ph Min Pickup
Page 1 of 2 10.0 70.0 0.05A 0.05A
HELP
CLOSE ZONE 2 Z2 Ground Reach Z2 Residual Reach Z2 Quad Resistance Z2 Ground Pref Pickup Z2 Ground Min Pickup HELP CLOSE
PgDn
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
ZONE 3 Z3 Offset Direction Z3 Phase Reach Z3 Phase Offset Z3 Phase Pref Pickup Z3 Phase Min Pickup
Page 1 of 3 Forward 10 70 2.0 70 0.05A 0.05A
ZONE 3 Z3 Ground Z3 Ground Z3 Ground Z3 Ground
Reach Offset Pref Pickup Min Pickup
Page 2 of 3 10.0 70.0 2.00 70 0.05A 0.05A
HELP
CLOSE ZONE 3 Z3 Ground Offset Z3 Residual Offset Z3 Quad Res. Fwd Z3 Quad Res. REv
PgDn
PgUp Page 3 of 3 2.0 70.0 1.50 70 30.0 35.0
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
ZONE 4 Z4 Phase Reach Z4 Phase Pref Pickup Z4 Phase Min Pickup
Page 1 of 2 10 70 0.05A 0.05A
ZONE 4 Z4 Ground Reach Z4 Residual Reach Z4 Quad Resistance Z4 Ground Pref Pickup Z4 Ground Min Pickup HELP CLOSE
Page 2 of 2 10.0 70.0 7.00 70 30 0.05A 0.05A NEXT PgUp
LOAD BLINDERS Load Blinders Active Zone 3 Blinder Active Forward reach 10.0 Reverse reach 12.0
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF Element Inst Backup IDMT Zero sequence 80 0.05A 0.10A N/A
DEF ELEMENT Polarising Char. Angle Reverse Pickup Forward Pickup Level Det. V0
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
DEF INST DEF Inst. Status Inst Direction Inst Pickup
Enabled Forward 10.0A
HELP
CLOSE
DEF BACKUP DEF Backup 1 BU1 Direction BU1 Pickup BU1 Delay
NEXT
PREV
Page 1 of 2 Enabled Forward 5.00A 2.00s
HELP
CLOSE
DEF BACKUP DEF Backup 2 BU2 Direction IDMT Curve Base Setting Time Multiplier
PgDn
Enabled Forward IEC LTI 0.10A 1
PREV
Page 2 of 2
HELP
CLOSE
DEF IDMT IDMT Status IDMT Direction IDMT Curve Base Setting Time Multiplier
PgDn
Enabled Forward IEC LTI 0.10A 1
PREV
Page 1 of 2
HELP
DEF IDMT Reset Timer
CLOSE
0ms
PgDn
PREV
Page 2 of 2
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
EXTRA FEATURES Overcurrent Loss of Load PwrSwg Blocking VT Supervision Block A/R
Trip On Close
OVERCURRENT IPhase >I Function Phase >I Setting
Stub Bus 2A
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
LOSS OF LOAD LoL Status LoL Level Detector Enabled 1A
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
PWRSWG BLOCKING PwrSwg Status PwrSwg Timeout PwrSwg Block Zone 1 PwrSwg Block Zone 1X PwrSwg Block Zone 2
Page 1 of 2 Indication Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
HELP
CLOSE
PWRSWG BLOCKING PwrSwg Block Zone 3 PwrSwg Block Zone 4
PgDn
PREV
Page 2 of 2 Enabled Enabled
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
VT SUPERVISION VTS Status
Indication
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
BLOCKA/R Zone 1X (T) Zone 2 (T) Z1 + Aided 2&3Ph/F Z1 + Aided 3Ph/F DEF Aided
Page 1 of 2 Block A/R Block A/R Block A/R Block A/R Block A/R
HELP
BLOCK A/R DEF Inst
CLOSE
PgDn
PREV
Page 2 of 2 Block A/R
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
TRIP ON CLOSE SOTF TripOnReclose TOR Logic TOR Trip
Z1+Z2+Z3+LD TOR Logic Z1+Z2+Z3+LD 1&3 Pole
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
CONTACTS Terminal 29-31 Terminal 29-33 Terminal 29-35 Terminal 37-39 Terminal 41-43
Page 1 of 7 Relay Inoperative ****** ****** ****** ******
HELP
CONTACTS Terminal 45-47 Terminal 49-51 Terminal 53-55 Terminal 30-32 Terminal 30-34 ****** ****** ****** ****** ****** Page 2 of 7
CLOSE
PgDn
PREV
HELP
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
****** ****** ****** ****** ******
Page 5 of 7
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
Page 6 of 7 ****** ****** ****** ****** ******
HELP
CLOSE
CONTACTS Terminal 78-80 Terminal 82-84
PgDn
PgUp
Page 7 of 7 ****** ******
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PgUp
FAULT LOCATOR Line Length 100km Line impedance Line Residual Susceptance B1 Susceptance B0
12.0 70.0 0.00 70.0 0.50mho 0.40mh
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
DISTURBANCE SET Record Setup Record Trigger Digital Inputs RECORD SETUP Prefault Postfault Sample/cycle 200ms 500ms 36
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
HELP HELP CLOSE
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
NEXT
PREV
RECORD TRIGGER Protection Scheme Alarm External H>L External L>H
Trip + Start Enabled Enabled Disabled
HELP
CLOSE
NEXT
PREV
DIGITAL INPUTS Digital Ch1 Digital Ch2 Digital Ch3 Digital Ch4 Digital Ch5
Page 1 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PREV
Page 2 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
Page 3 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
Page 4 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
Page 5 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
Page 6 of 7 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
HELP
DIGITAL INPUTS Digital Ch31 Digital Ch32
CLOSE
PgDn
PgUp
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Page 7 of 7 ******** ********
HELP
CLOSE
PgUp
MONITOR OPTION Selection 12 Bit Status 76543210 00010011
COMMISSION Monitor Option Contact Tests Contact Control Phase Selector
HELP
CLOSE
STEP
VIEW
HELP
CLOSE
CONTACT TESTS Contacts Terminal Function Disabled 38-40 Trip A
HELP
CLOSE
ON
OFF
CONTACT CONTROL Contacts Terminal 54-56 only Function Trip A
HELP
CLOSE
PHASE SELECTOR Status Enabled
HELP
CLOSE
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Appendix B Courier Database Settings
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Contents
CONTENTS 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 4. 4.1 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.10 6. 6.1 7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 SYSTEM DATA Language Password Description Plant reference Model number Serial number System frequency Relay address Communication level DISPLAY OPTIONS Values Distance units Measurement mode Fault location Phase A label Phase B label Phase C label Neutral label Self reset flags Relay alarms VIEW EVENTS Last event Event type Date and time VIEW FAULTS Last fault EVENT CONTROL Clear all records Date/time IRIG B sync IRIG B status Local time = UTC Output contact Status input Scheme alarm Relay failure Setting change Event records MEASUREMENTS Measurements RELAY DATA Model number Serial number Nominal current Nominal voltage 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Contents 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15
7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 9.15 10. 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 12. 12.1
DC rating Vx1 DC rating Vx2 Host software Host PDU Comms software Host PLD A to C Scheme software DSP software Scheme PDU SLP PLD Calibration software Analogue input PLD Front panel PLD PRINTING Parallel print status Parallel print: events Parallel print: faults Parallel print: setting group Parallel print: global settings Parallel print: active settings COMMUNICATIONS Remote setting Comms port Comms mode Transmit delay Baud rate Inactivity timer Front port Modem support Modem initialization string Modem start string Modem disconnect string Modem dial string Initialize modem Command baud rate Command protocol DIAL-BACK Dial-back Call place delay Connection delay Number transmit time Phone recovery time Site references A-D Site/Line 1-8 GROUP CONTROL Active group Edit group Save as LINE PARAMETERS Identifier
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 13. 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 15. 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 15.9 16. 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9 16.10 16.11 16.12 16.13
Line type Line length Tripping Instantaneous trip delay Circuit breaker failure logic Circuit breaker failure timer Relay direction VT ratio CT ratio CHANNEL-AIDED SCHEMES Distance scheme Tripping TP TD TDW DEF scheme TPG TDG DISTANCE OPTIONS Quadrilateral Custom options Angle setting Residual ratio Residual angle Custom sensitivity Directional polarizing BASIC SCHEME Zone 1 Zone 1X (T) Zone 1X delay Zone 2 (T) Zone 2 delay Zone 3 (T) Zone 3 delay Zone 4 (T) Zone 4 delay DISTANCE SETTINGS Zone 1 phase reach Zone 1 phase angle Zone 1 phase preferred pickup Zone 1 phase minimum pickup Zone 1 ground reach Zone 1 ground angle Zone 1 residual impedance Zone 1 residual angle Zone 1 ground preferred pickup Zone 1 ground minimum pickup Zone 1 quadrilateral resistance Zone 1X direction Zone 1X phase reach
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Contents 1 phase angle 1X phase preferred pickup 1X phase minimum pickup 1X ground reach 1X ground angle 1X residual impedance 1X residual angle 1X ground preferred pickup 1X ground minimum pickup 1X quadrilateral resistance 2 phase reach 2 phase angle 2 phase preferred pickup 2 phase minimum pickup 2 ground reach 2 ground angle 2 residual impedance 2 residual angle 2 ground preferred pickup 2 ground minimum pickup 2 quadrilateral resistance 3 offset direction 3 phase reach 3 phase angle 3 phase offset reach 3 phase offset angle 3 phase preferred pickup 3 phase minimum pickup 3 ground reach 3 ground angle 3 residual impedance 3 residual angle 3 ground preferred pickup 3 ground minimum pickup 3 offset ground reach 3 offset ground angle 3 offset residual reach 3 offset residual angle 3 quadrilateral forward resistive reach 3 quadrilateral reverse resistive reach 4 phase reach 4 phase angle 4 phase preferred pickup 4 phase minimum pickup 4 ground reach 4 ground angle 4 residual impedance 4 residual angle 4 ground preferred pickup 4 ground minimum pickup 4 quadrilateral resistance 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29
16.14 16.15 16.16 16.17 16.18 16.19 16.20 16.21 16.22 16.23 16.24 16.25 16.26 16.27 16.28 16.29 16.30 16.31 16.32 16.33 16.34 16.35 16.36 16.37 16.38 16.39 16.40 16.41 16.42 16.43 16.44 16.45 16.46 16.47 16.48 16.49 16.50 16.51 16.52 16.53 16.54 16.55 16.56 16.57 16.58 16.59 16.60 16.61 16.62 16.63 16.64
Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.65 16.66 16.67 16.68 17. 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 17.9 17.10 17.11 17.12 17.13 17.14 17.15 17.16 17.17 17.18 17.19 17.20 17.21 17.22 18. 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 18.12 18.13 18.14 18.15 18.16 18.17 18.18 18.19 18.20 18.21 18.22
Load blinders Zone 3 blinder Forward load blinder Reverse load blinder DEF SETTINGS DEF polarizing DEF characteristic angle Reverse pickup Forward pickup V0 level detector DEF instantaneous DEF instantaneous direction DEF instantaneous pickup DEF backup 1 DEF backup 1 direction DEF backup 1 pickup DEF backup 1 delay DEF backup 2 DEF backup 2 direction DEF backup 2 pickup DEF backup 2 delay DEF IDMT DEF IDMT directionality DEF IDMT curve DEF IDMT base DEF IDMT time multiplier DEF IDMT reset time EXTRA FEATURES Phase >I function Phase overcurrent pickup Loss-of-load Loss-of-load level detectors Power swing blocking Power swing blocking timeout Power swing - block zone 1 Power swing - block zone 1X Power swing - block zone 2 Power swing - block zone 3 Power swing - block zone 4 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) BAR - zone 1X (T) BAR - zone 2 (T) BAR - Z1 + aided 2&3ph/f BAR - Z1 + aided 3ph/f BAR - DEF aided BAR - DEF instantaneous Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) Trip on reclose (TOR) TOR logic TOR trip
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Contents 34 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 41 42 43 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 45 45
19. 19.1 20. 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 21. 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.7 22. 22.1 23. 23.1 24. 24.1 25. 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 26. 26.1 26.2 26.3
OUTPUT CONTACTS Output contact allocation FAULT LOCATOR Line length Line impedance Line angle Line residual Residual angle Susceptance B1 Susceptance B0 DISTURBANCE RECORDS Prefault duration Postfault duration Samples/cycle Protection trigger Scheme alarm trigger External H>L External L>H RECORDER CONTROL Start/trigger RECORDER EXTRACTION Disturbance recorder extraction FAULT EXTRACTION Fault extraction COMMISSIONING Monitor option Monitor status Output contacts Select contact Contact control Terminal 54-56 Phase selector COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DATA Disturb Rec Cntrl Disturb Rec Ext Upload mode
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix B Page 1 of 48
SECTION 1.
Col 0 Row 0 1
SYSTEM DATA
Menu Text SYSTEM DATA Language Values English Francais Deutsch Espanol AAAA """Main One""" *********** *********** *********** 50 Hz 1 1 Min 0 Max 3 Step 1
2 4 5 6 8 9 0A 0B
Password Description Plant Reference Model Number Serial number System Frequency Communication level Relay Address
65 32 32
90 159 159
1 1 1
50 0
60 255
10 1
1.1
Language The relay menu can be configured in any one of four different languages: English French German Spanish
1.2
Password Password protection is provided for remote access. This four character password must be entered using the remote interface to allow any of the relay protection settings to be changed.
1.3
Description This alphanumeric value should be used to refer to the line terminal.
1.4
Plant reference This alphanumeric value should be used to refer to the substation.
1.5
Model number This character string is fixed and contains the full relay model number.
1.6
Serial number This seven character string is fixed and contains the relay serial number. This consists of 6 numbers and an uppercase alpha. This setting determines the power system frequency for which the relay will properly operate.
1.7
System frequency This setting determines the power system frequency for which the relay will properly operate.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
1.8
Relay address This refers to the Courier address of the relay on the communication network; ie. K-bus.
1.9
Communication level This datacell identifies the level of the Courier language supported by the relay.
SECTION 2.
Col 1 Row 0 1 2 3 4
DISPLAY OPTIONS
Menu Text DISPLAY OPTIONS Values Distance Units Measurement Mode Fault Location Values Primary Secondary km miles 0 Distance % Line Reactive Ohms A B C N Enabled Disabled Not Present Present Clear Alarms Min 0 0 0 0 Max 1 1 3 2 Step 1 1 1 1
5 6 7 8 9 0A
Phase A Label Phase B Label Phase C Label Phase N Label Self Reset Flags Relay Alarms
32 32 32 32 0 2
159 159 159 159 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
2.1
Values This setting determines whether the values are displayed as primary or secondary quantities. This setting affects all protection settings, metering, fault records, and disturbance records. Note that these values are stored internally within the relay in secondary terms; primary values are determined using the CT and VT ratios of the active group.
2.2
Distance units This setting determines whether or not the distance is shown in miles or kilometers.
2.3
Measurement mode This setting determines signing of the power flow quantities.
2.4
Fault location This setting determines whether the distance to fault is displayed as a percentage of the line length, using the currently related distance units (km/ miles), or in ohms.
2.5
Phase A label This setting determines the two character (alphanumeric) label for phase A; eg. A.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
2.6
Phase B label This setting determines the two character (alphanumeric) label for phase B; eg. B.
2.7
Phase C label This setting determines the two character (alphanumeric) label for phase C; eg. C.
2.8
Neutral label This setting determines the two character (alphanumeric) label for the neutral; eg. N.
2.9
Self reset flags If this setting is enabled then when a flag (target) is issued due to a protection operation or alarm, when the power system returns to a balanced state then the relay will clear the flag. For example, if the relay were to trip its breaker to clear a transient fault then it would clear the protection flag after the successful reclosure.
2.10
Relay alarms When communicating with the relay via remote access this indicates whether or not an alarm(s) is present. If so, the user can move to the appropriate section of the menu to view the alarms. The user also has the option of clearing all alarms.
SECTION 3.
Col 2 Row 0 1 2 3
VIEW EVENTS
Menu Text VIEW EVENTS Last Event Event Type Date and Time Values 0 to oldest record No [Taken from record] [Taken from record] Min 0 Max Step
Max Rec 1
3.1
Last event This setting selects which event the user will view via the remote access communications software. Event 0 will be the most recent event.
3.2
Event type This text string describes the nature of the event indexed by the setting in row 1.
3.3
Date and time This cell returns the date and time of the event indexed by the setting in row 1.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 4.
Col 3 Row 0 1 2 3
VIEW FAULTS
Menu Text VIEW FAULTS Last Fault Date and Time Record Type Values 0 to oldest record No [Taken from record] Trip Trip on Reclose Switch onto Fault Start Zone: [1][1X][2][3][4] [Inst][BU1][BU2][IDMT] Transfer Trip Loss of Load Inst OC Stub Bus ABCN [PSB][VTS] 12km 8 miles 50% 5.43 80ms 1 50.1Hz 89.0kV 0 89.0kV 120 89.0kV -120 123kV 30 123kV -90 123kV 150 89.0kV 0 0.00kV 0 0.00kV 0 1.00kA 0 1.00kA 120 1.00kA -120 1.40kA 30 1.40kA -90 1.40kA 150 1.0kA 0 0.00kA 0 0.00kA 0 89.0kV 0 Min 0 Max Step
Max Rec 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B
Distance Directional Earth Fault Event Type Event Type Event Type Faulted Phase Alarms Fault Location
0C 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35
Fault Duration Active Group System Frequency Prefault VA Amp Prefault VA Phase Prefault VB Amp Prefault VB Phase Prefault VC Amp Prefault VC Phase Prefault VAB Amp Prefault VAB Phase Prefault VBC Amp Prefault VBC Phase Prefault VCA Amp Prefault VCA Phase Prefault V1 Amp Prefault V1 Phase Prefault V2 Amp Prefault V2 Phase Prefault V0 Amp Prefault V0 Phase Prefault IA Amp Prefault IA Phase Prefault IB Amp Prefault IB Phase Prefault IC Amp Prefault IC Phase Prefault IAB Amp Prefault IAB Phase Prefault IBC Amp Prefault IBC Phase Prefault ICA Amp Prefault ICA Phase Prefault I1 Amp Prefault I1 Phase Prefault I2 Amp Prefault I2 Phase Prefault I0 Amp Prefault 10 phase Fault VA amp Fault VA Phase
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

VB Amp VB Phase VC Amp VC Phase VAB Amp VAB Phase VBC Amp VBC Phase VCA Amp VCA Phase V1 Amp V1 Phase V2 Amp V2 Phase V0 Amp V0 Phase 1A Amp 1A Phase 1B Amp 1B Phase 1C Amp 1C Phase 1AB Amp IAB Phase IBC Amp IBC Phase ICA Amp ICA Phase I1 Amp I1 Phase I I2 Phase I0 Amp I0 Phase 89.0kV 120 89.0kV -120 123kV 30 123kV -90 123kV 150 89.0kV 0 0.00kV 0 0.00kV 0 1.00kA 0 1.00kA 120 1.00kA -120 1.40kA 30 1.40kA -90 1.40kV 150 1.0kA 0 2A 0 0.00kA 0
36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
0.00kA
4.1
Last fault This setting selects which fault record the user will view via the remote access communications software. Faults prior to the one selected can be viewed next in sequential order. Fault 0 will be the most recent fault. The remainder of this column of the Courier database contains the complete fault record indexed by this setting.
SECTION 5
Col 4 Row 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EVENT CONTROL
Menu Text EVENT CONTROL Clear All Records Date/Time IRIG B Sync IRIG B Status Local Time=UTC Output Contact Status Input Values No Yes 94/Jan/01 00:00:00 Enabled Disabled Active Inactive +04:00:00 Trigger Event No Trigger Trigger Event No Trigger Min 0 0 0 Max 1 Step 1
99 years 1 1
+12:00 0 0
-12:00 1 1
00:30 1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Trigger Event No Trigger Trigger Event No Trigger Trigger Event No Trigger Enabled Disabled 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 9 0A 0B
Scheme Alarm Relay Failure Setting Change Event Recording
5.1
Clear all records This allows the user to clear all event records via remote access.
5.2
Date/time This setting allows the user to set the current date and time.
5.3
IRIG B sync This setting determines if IRIG-B synchronization is to be enabled.
5.4
IRIG B status The cell is only visible if IRIG-B synchronization is enabled and indicates whether a valid IRIG-B signal is being received.
5.5
Local time = UTC If enabled the user can offset the local time from the Universal Co-ordinated Time (UTC).
5.6
Output contact This settings determines whether or not an event record is generated when a contact changes states.
5.7
Status input This setting determines whether or not an event record is generated when an opto-isolated input changes state.
5.8
Scheme alarm This setting determines whether or not an event record is generated for a scheme alarm.
5.9
Relay failure This setting determines whether or not an event record is generated when the relay fails a self-test.
5.10
Setting change This setting determines whether or not an event record is generated when a setting is changed.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
5.10
Event records This setting can be used to completely disable all event recording.
SECTION 6.
Col 5 Row 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13` 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
MEASUREMENTS
Menu Text MEASUREMENTS Real Power Reactive Power Frequency VA Amp VA Phase VB Amp VB Phase VC Amp VC Phase VAB Amp VAB Phase VBC Amp VBC Phase VCA Amp VCA Phase V1 Amp V1Phase V2 amp V2 Phase V0 Amp V0 Phase IA Amp IA Phase IB Amp IB Phase IC Amp IC Phase IAB Amp IAB Phase IBC Amp IBC Phase ICA Amp ICA Phase I1 Amp I1 Phaseq I2 Amp I2 Phase I0 Amp I0 Phase Values 100MW 20 VA 50.1Hz 89.0kV 0 89.0kV 120 89.0kV -120 123kV 30 123kV -90 12kV 150 89.0kV 0 0.00kV 0 0.00kV 0 1.00kA 0 1.00 kA 120 1.00kA -120 1.40kA 30 1.40kA -90 1.40kA 150 1.0kA 0 0.00kA 0 0.00kA 0 Min Max Step
6.1
Measurements This column of the database contains the power system data continuously measured by the relay. This includes real and imaginary power, frequency, voltages and currents. The data may be either primary or secondary depending on the setting within the display options column.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 7.
6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13
RELAY DATA
RELAY DATA Model Number Serial Number Nominal Current Nominal Voltage DC Rating Vx1 DC Rating Vx2 Host Software Host PDU Comms Software Host PLD A Host PLD B Host PLD C Scheme Software DSP Software Scheme PDU SLP PLD Calibration Software Alog Input PLD Front Panel PLD ********** ********** 1A 5A 110V 110V 110V ********** ********** ********** ********** ********** ********** ********** ********** ********* ********* ********* ********* *********
7.1
Model number This datacell contains the full model number identifying the relay version.
7.2
Serial number This datacell contains the 7 character relay serial number, consisting of 6 digits and 1 alpha.
7.3
Nominal current This datacell indicates the nominal AC current rating for the relay.
7.4
Nominal voltage This datacell indicates the nominal AC voltage rating for the relay.
7.5
DC rating Vx1 This datacell indicates the nominal DC auxiliary voltage rating for the relay.
7.6
DC rating Vx2 This datacell indicates the nominal DC opto input voltage rating for the relay.
7.7
Host software This datacell indicates the version of host processor software within the relay.
7.8
Host PDU This datacell indicates the version of the host processor program download utility.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
7.9
Comms software This datacell indicates the version of the software version of the sub-module of the relay which performs the low level Courier communications.
7.10
Host PLD A to C These three version numbers are for the programmable logic devices used on the host processor board of the relay.
7.11
Scheme software This datacell indicates the version of scheme logic software within the relay.
7.12
DSP software This datacell indicates the version number of the digital signal processor software within the relay.
7.13
Scheme PDU This datacell indicates the version of the protection processor board program download utility. This is used to download protection software.
7.14
SLP PLD This datacell indicates the version of the protection processor board programmable logic device.
7.15
Calibration software This datacell indicates the software version of the test equipment used to calibrate the analogue input module.
7.16
Analogue input PLD This datacell indicates the version of the analogue input module programmable logic device.
7.17
Front panel PLD This datacell indicates the version of the front panel programmable logic device.
SECTION 8.
PRINTING
Col 7
Row 7
Menu Text Parallel Print: Status
8 9 0A 0B 0C
Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel
Print: Events Print: Faults Print: Setting Group Print : Global Settings
Parallel Print: Active Settings
Values Stopped Printing Not ready 0 0 0 No Yes No Yes
Min
Max
Step
0 0 0 0 0
Max Rec 10 Max Rec 1 8 1 1 1 1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
8.1
Parallel print status Datacell to indicate the status of the parallel printer. The function to support this cell is not implemented on the current version of the relay, thus the value of the cell will remain fixed.
8.2
Parallel Print: Events This setting prints event records to the parallel printer. The number of event records to be printed can be selected.
8.3
Parallel Print: Faults This setting prints fault records to the parallel printer. The number of fault records to be printed can be selected.
8.4
Parallel Print: Setting Group This setting prints the selected setting group to the parallel printer.
8.5
Parallel Print: Global Settings This setting prints the non-protection settings that are applicable to all groups to the parallel printer.
8.6
Parallel Print: Active Settings This setting prints all non-protection settings and the active setting group to the parallel printer.
SECTION 9.
Sect 8 Item 1 2
COMMUNICATIONS
Menu Text COMMUNICATIONS Remote Setting Comms Port Values Enabled Disabled K-Bus Front Serial Rear Serial IEC870FT1.2 10 Bit 1.00 ms 600 1200 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 14400 19200 5 mins DTE DCE Enabled Disabled ************ Min 0 0 Max 1 2 Step 1 1
3 4 5
Comms Mode Transmit Delay Baud Rate
0 0 0
1 5ms 8
1 0.25ms 1
6 7 8 9
Inactivity Timer Front Port Modem Support Modem Init Strg
5 min 0 0 0
30 min 1 1 192
5 min 1 1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

************ ************ ************ No Yes 600 1200 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 14400 19200 8 NONE 1 8 EVEN 1 8 ODD 1 8 NONE 2 7 EVEN 1 7 ODD 1 7 EVEN 2 7 ODD 2 7 NONE 2 0 0 0 1 0 192 192 192 1 8 1 1 1 1 1
0A 0B 0C 0D 0E
Modem Strt Strg Modem Disc Strg Modem Dial Strg Init Modem CommandBaudRate
0F
Command Protocol
9.1
Remote Setting This setting selects whether setting changes via remote access are allowed.
9.2
Comms Port This setting selects which one of the three Courier ports is currently active.
9.3
Comms Mode This setting selects whether IEC 60870 or IEC 60870 without parity (10bit) is used for RS232 communications. IEC 60870 should be selected if the modem can support an 11bit character length.
9.4
Transmit Delay This setting defines the minimum response time of the relay for a command. This should be set to zero for a full-duplex link and non-zero for half-duplex links.
9.5
Baud Rate This setting selects the baud rate used for IEC 60870 Courier communication. The following are available: 600, 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200
9.6
Inactivity Timer Following a valid password being entered, this setting is the maximum time between Courier commands before password protection is reapplied.
9.7
Front Port This setting selects whether the pinout for port SK2 is DTE or DCE. This reverses the functions of pins 2 and 3.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
9.8
Modem Support This setting allows the relay to communicate via a modem connected to SK4.
9.9
Modem Initialization String This string is sent to the modem to initialize its settings when the Initialize Modem option is selected.
9.10
Modem Start String This string is sent at the beginning of each modem transaction.
9.11
Modem Disconnect String This is the string which is sent to the modem to cause it to hang up.
9.12
Modem Dial String This is the string which is sent to the modem when dialing out from the relay. This is only used for the dial-back operation.
9.13
Initialize Modem This sends the Modem Initialization String to the modem.
9.14
Command Baud Rate The following baud rates are available for the modem 600, 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200
9.15
Command Protocol The following framing protocols are available for sending command strings to the modem 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 NONE EVEN ODD NONE EVEN ODD EVEN ODD NONE 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 10. DIAL-BACK

Col 9 Row 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Menu Text DIAL-BACK Dial-Back Call Place Dly Connection Dly Number Tx Time Phone Rcvy Time Site A Ref Site A Line 1 Site A Line 2 Site A Line 3 Site A Line 4 Site A Line 5 Site A Line 6 Site A Line 7 Site A Line 8 Site B Ref Site B Line 1 Site B Line 2 Site B Line 3 Site B Line 4 Site B Line 5 Site B Line 6 Site B Line 7 Site B Line 8 Site C Ref Site C Line 1 Site C Line 2 Site C Line 3 Site C Line 4 Site C Line 5 Site C Line 6 Site C Line 7 Site C Line 8 Site D Ref Site D Line 1 Site D Line 2 Site D Line 3 Site D Line 4 Site D Line 5 Site D Line 6 Site D Line 7 Site D Line 8 Values Enabled Disabled 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s Stafford ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* Cannock ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* Lichfield ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* Milford ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* ************* Min 0 10 s 10 s 1s 1s 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 Max 1 200 s 500 s 60 s 60 s 159 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 159 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 159 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 159 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s s s s
10.1
Dial-Back This setting selects whether the dial-back function is enabled. This is used to increase remote access security as the relay must dial-back to the master to allow remote access. The master device will send a site location and a line number which will reference a telephone number stored within the relay. The relay will then hangup and dial-back using this number.
10.2
Call Place Delay This setting edits the time that the relay will wait for the ringing tone having once dialled the telephone number. It is only used in the dial-back mode.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
10.3
Connection Delay This setting edits the maximum time the relay will wait for the connection to be made after the ringing indication is received. It is only used for the dial-back operation.
10.4
Number Transmit Time This setting edits the maximum time for which the relay sends the dial-back selectors. This setting is only required if the relay is operating as a master device.
10.5
Phone Recovery Time This setting edits the minimum time between hanging up the connection and making a call. It is only used for the dial-back operation.
10.6
Site References A - D This setting edits the site reference string used to look up the telephone number for dial-back operation.
10.7
Site/Line 1 - 8 This setting edits the telephone number stored for the site reference/line number. The dial-back selector is used to select which of the stored numbers is used for the dial-back.
SECTION 11. GROUP CONTROL

Sect 0F Item 0 1 2 3 Menu Text GROUP CONTROL Active Group Edit Group Save As Values 1 1 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Abort Changes Saving Not Saving Min 1 1 0 Max 8 8 8 Step 1 1 1
11.1
Active Group This setting determines which of the eight stored protection setting groups is active.
11.2
Edit Group This setting selects which of the eight stored protection setting groups is visible to allow editing of that group.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
11.3
Save As This setting performs a save of the edited group settings to one of the eight protection setting groups.
SECTION 12. LINE PARAMETERS

Col 10 Row 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A Menu Text LINE PARAMETERS Identifier Line Type Line Length Tripping Inst Trip Delay CB Fail Logic CB Fail Timer Relay Direction VT Ratio CT Ratio Values ************** Overhead Line Cable 100km 60miles 1&3 Pole 3 Pole Only 0ms Enabled Disabled 100 ms Foward Reverse 4750:1 2000:1 Min 32 0 0 0 0 0 100ms 0 Max 159 1 999 km 1 1s 1 500ms 1 Step 1 1 3SFg 1 2 ms 1 50ms 1 10:1 10:1
10000:1 10:1 5000:1 10:1
12.1
Identifier This alphanumeric setting is used to identify the protected line; ie. group identifier.
12.2
Line Type This setting selects the polarization used for the distance characteristics. If an overhead line is specified then the memory/cross-polarized mho characteristic is enabled. If an underground cable is specified then the self-polarized offset mho characteristic is enabled. Both types permit the quadrilateral characteristic to be enabled for ground fault protection.
12.3
Line Length This setting edits the line length using the currently selected distance units.
12.4
Tripping This setting selects either three pole only or single and three pole tripping (LFZR111 only).
12.5
Instantaneous Trip Delay This setting adds an intentional time-delay to all instantaneous tripping elements; eg. zone 1 or instantaneous overcurrent.
12.6
Circuit Breaker Failure Logic This setting enables the circuit breaker breaker failure protection.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
12.7
Circuit Breaker Failure Timer If the logic is enabled then this setting determines the time for which the trip must be maintained before the circuit breaker failure contact is asserted.
12.8
Relay Direction This setting allows the relays sense of direction to be reversed for all protection and metering functions. If the relays direction is reversed then an alarm is raised.
12.9
VT Ratio This setting determines the line potential transformer turns ratio. This is used to calculate primary values.
12.10
CT Ratio This setting determines the line current transformer turns ratio. This setting is used to calculate primary values.
SECTION 13. CHANNEL-AIDED SCHEMES

Sect 11 Item 0 1 Menu Text AIDED SCHEMES Distance Scheme Values Basic Zone 1 Extension PUR PUR Unblock POR1 POR1 Unblock POR2 POR2 WI POR2 Unblock POR2 Unblock WI Blocking Blocking 2 Disabled Phase Ground Phase+Ground 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms Disabled Shared Channel POR POR Unblock POR WI POR WI Unblock Blocking Blocking 2 20 ms 20 ms Min 0 Max 11 Step 1
Tripping
3 4 5 6
TP TD TDW DEF Scheme
0 0 0 0
100ms 100ms 100ms 7
1ms 1ms 1ms 1
7 8
TPG TDG
0 0
100ms 100ms
1ms 1ms
13.1
Distance Scheme This setting determines which channel-aided scheme is used. Distance aided overreach and blocking schemes can incorporate a common channel DEF scheme.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
13.2
Tripping This setting determines whether phase and/or ground distance elements are used by the channel-aided schemes.
13.3
TP This determines the distance scheme current reversal pickup timer setting.
13.4
TD This determines the distance scheme current reversal drop-off timer setting.
13.5
TDW This determines the unblocking scheme timer. This is used to control the distance aided tripping during a loss-of-guard signal.
13.6
DEF Scheme This determines if a channel-aided DEF scheme is to be used. If the distance scheme is POR or Blocking then a common channel can be applied. LFZR111 and LFZR112 can also be used with independent channel DEF, in which case the choice of scheme is independent of that selected for the main distance scheme.
13.7
TPG This determines the DEF current reversal pick up timer.
13.8
TDG This determines the DEF current reversal drop off timer.
SECTION 14. DISTANCE OPTIONS

Sect 12 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Menu Text DISTANCE OPTIONS Quadrilateral Custom Options Angle Setting (ph) Residual Ratio (KN) Residual Angle (N) Custom Sensitivity Directional Pol Values Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 75 (global) 1 (global) 70.0 (global) Enabled Disabled Standard Alternate Min 0 0 20 0.25 -45 0 0 Max 1 1 85 4 85 1 1 Step 1 1 0.1 3SFg 0.1 1 1
14.1
Quadrilateral This setting is used to enable the quadrilateral characteristics for ground fault protection.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
14.2
Custom Options If enabled the angle and residual compensation settings are individually set for each zone. If it is disabled then the following global settings are used.
14.3
Angle Setting This setting selects the characteristic angle setting for all distance zones.
14.4
Residual Ratio This global setting selects the residual compensation ratio applied to all ground fault distance elements. This ratio is applied to the positive-sequence reach. Residual ratio = KN = |(ZL0 - ZL1)/(3ZL1)|
14.5
Residual Angle This global setting selects the residual angle applied to all ground fault distance elements. Residual angle = N = ARG(ZL0 - ZL1)
14.6
Custom Sensitivity This setting determines whether the current sensitivity for all zones is settable. If disabled the default sensitivity will be used depending on the reach setting for the element. If enabled the custom or preferred pickup is used to control the minimum sensitivity for the zone.
14.7
Directional Polarizing This setting is used to chose either standard (memory/cross polarized) or alternate (DEF polarizing) directional line for the distance ground fault elements.
SECTION 15. BASIC SCHEME

Col 13 Row 0 1 Menu Text BASIC SCHEME Zone 1 Values Disabled Phase only Ground Only Phase+Ground Disabled Phase only Ground Only Phase+Ground 0ms Disabled Phase only Ground Only Phase+Ground 0ms Disabled Phase only Ground Only Phase+Ground Min 0 Max 3 Step 1
Zone 1X (T)
3 4
Zone 1X Delay Zone 2 (T)
0 0
10 s 3
3SFg 1
5 6
Zone 2 Delay Zone 3 (T)
0 0
10 s 3
3SFg 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

0ms Disabled Phase only Ground Only Phase+Ground 0ms 0 0 10 s 3 3SFg 1
7 8
Zone 3 Delay Zone 4(T)
Zone 4 Delay
10 s
3SFg
15.1
Zone 1 This setting determines whether the zone 1 phase and/or ground distance elements are enabled for basic scheme tripping.
15.2
Zone 1X (T) This setting determines whether the zone 1X phase and/or ground distance elements are enabled for basic scheme tripping.
15.3
Zone 1X Delay This setting determines the zone 1X time-delay.
15.4
Zone 2 (T) This setting determines whether the zone 2 phase and/or ground distance elements are enabled for basic scheme tripping.
15.5
Zone 2 Delay This setting determines the zone 2 time-delay.
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 16. DISTANCE SETTINGS

Col 14 Row 0 1 2 3 4 Menu Text DISTANCE SETTINGS Z1 Ph Reach Z1 Ph Angle Z1 Ph Pref Pickup Z1 Ph Pickup Values Min Max Step 3SFg 0.1 3SFg
5 6 7 8 9 0A
Z1 Gnd Reach (Z1g) Z1 Gnd Angle (Z1g) Z1 Residual Imp (Z1res) Z1 Residual Angle (Z1res) Z1 Gnd Pref Pickup (IZ1g) Z1 Gnd Pickup (IZ1)
0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10
Z1 Quad Resistance (R1) Z1X Direction Z1X Ph Reach (Z1Xph) Z1X Ph Angle (Z1Xph) Z1X Ph Pref Pickup (IZ1Xph) Z1X Ph Pickup (IZX1)
11 12 13 14 15 16
Z1X Gnd Reach (Z1Xg) Z1X Gnd Angle (Z1Xg) Z1X Residual Imp (Z1Xres) Z1X Residual Angle (Z1Xres) Z1X Gnd Pref Pickup (IZ1Xg) Z1X Gnd Pickup (IZ1X)
17 18 19 1A 1B
Z1X Quad Resistance (R1X) Z2 Ph Reach (Z2ph) Z2 Ph Angle (Z2ph) Z2 Ph Pref Pickup (IZ2ph) Z2 Ph Pickup (IZ2)
10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 10In 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 0.25In/Z1ph min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In/Z1ph min IZ1ph (custom) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 7.00 (custom) 0.01/In 1000/In Z1g*KN (global) 70 (custom) -45 85 N (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.05 10In 0.25In/Z1g, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In/Z1g, min IZ1g (custom) 30 0.1/In 250/In Forward 0 1 Reverse 10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70.0 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In 0.25In/Z1Xph, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In/Z1Xph, min IZ1Xph (custom) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70.0 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 7.00 (custom) 0.01/In 1000/In Z1Xg*KN (global) 70 (custom) -45 85 N (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.05 10In 0.25In/Z1Xg, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In/Z1Xg, min IZ1Xg (custom) 30 0.1/In 250/In 10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In 0.25In/Z2ph, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In/Z2ph, min IZ2ph (custom) 0.375In/Z2ph, min 0.075*In (default, Aided Scheme, any POR2 or Blocking) 0.375In/Z2ph, min IZ2ph (custom, Aided Scheme, any POR2 or Blocking)
3SFg 0.1 3SFg 0.1 3SFg
3SFg 1 3SFg 0.1 3SFg
3SFg 3SFg 0.1 3SFg
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21
14
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
3A 3B
10.0 0.025/In 250/In 70 20 85 ph (global) 7.00 (custom) 0.01/In 1000/In Z2 Residual Imp (Z2res) Z2g*KN (global) 70 (custom) -45 85 Z2 Residual Angle (Z2res) N (global) Z2 Gnd Pref Pickup (IZ2g) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In 0.25In/Z2g, min 0.05*In Z2 Gnd Pickup (IZ2) (default) 0.25In/Z2g, min IZ2g (custom) 0.375In/Z2g, min 0.075*In (default, Aided Scheme, any POR2 or Blocking) 0.375In/Z2g, min IZ2g (custom, Aided Scheme, any POR2 or Blocking) Z2 Quad Resistance (R2) 30 0.1/In 250/In Z3 Offset Dir Forward Reverse 10.0 0.025/In 250/In Z3 Ph Reach (Z3ph) 70.0 (custom) 20 85 Z3 Ph Angle (Z3ph) ph (global) Z3 Ph Offset (Z3ph-off) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In 20 85 Z3 Ph Offset Angle (Z3ph-off) 70.0 (custom) ph (global) Z3 Ph Pref Pickup (IZ3ph) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In 0.25In /Z3ph, min 0.05*In Z3 Ph Pickup (IZ3) (default) 0.25In /Z3ph, min IZ3ph (custom) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In Z3 Gnd Reach (Z3g) Z3 Gnd Angle (Z3g) 70.0 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 7.00 0.01/In 1000/In Z3 Residual Imp (Z3res) Z3g*KN (global) 70.0 (custom) -45 85 Z3 Residual Angle (Z3res) N (global) Z3 Gnd Pref Pickup (IZ3g) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In 0.25In /Z3g, min 0.05*In Z3 Gnd Pickup (IZ3) (default) 0.25In /Z3g, min IZ3g (custom) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In Z3 Gnd Offset (Z3g-off) Z3 Gnd Offset Angle (Z3g-off) 70 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 7.00 0.01/In 1000/In Z3 Res Offset (Z3res-off) Z3g-off*KN (global) -45 85 Z3 Res Offset Angle (Z3res-off) 70.0 (custom) N (global) Z3 Quad Res.Fwd (R3F) 30 0.1/In 250/In 30 0.1/In 250/In Z3 Quad Res.Rev (R3R) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In Z4 Ph Reach (Z4ph) Z4 Ph Angle (Z4ph) 70.0 (custom) 20 85 ph (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.05In 10In Z4 Ph Pref Pickup (IZ4ph) Z4 Ph Pickup (IZ4) 0.25In /Z4ph, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In /Z4ph, min IZ4ph (custom) 10.0 0.025/In 250/In Z4 Gnd Reach (Z4g) 70.0 (custom) 20 85 Z4 Gnd Angle (Z4g) ph (global) Z2 Gnd Reach (Z2g) Z2 Gnd Angle (Z2g)
3SFg
3SFg 0.1 3SFg 0.1 3SFg 3SFg 3SFg 0.1 3SFg
3SFg 0.1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

7.00 (custom) Z4g*KN (global) 70 (custom) N (global) 0.05A (custom) 0.25In /Z4g, min 0.05*In (default) 0.25In /Z4g, min IZ4g (custom) 30 Active Disabled Active Disabled 30 30 0.01/In -45 0.05In 1000/In 3SFg 85 10In 0.1 3SFg
3C 3D 3E 3F
Z4 Residual Imp (Z4res) Z4 Residual Angle (Z4res) Z4 Gnd Pref Pickup (IZ4g) Z4 Gnd Pickup (IZ4)
14
40 41 43 43 44
Z4 Quad Resistance (R4) Load Blinders Z3 Blinder Fwd Blinder Rev Blinder
0.1/In 0 0 0.1/In 0.1/In
250/In 1 1 250/In 250/In
3SFg 1 1 3SFg 3SFg
16.1
Zone 1 Phase Reach This setting determines the positive-sequence impedance that corresponds to the zone 1 reach for its phase fault elements.
16.2
Zone 1 Phase Angle This setting determines the postive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 1 phase fault elements.
16.3
Zone 1 Phase Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 1 phase fault elements will operate (custom only).
16.4
Zone 1 Phase Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 1 phase fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 1 phase reach and the zone 1 phase preferred pickup. To ensure accuracy of the zone elements the threshold is inversely proportional to the reach ie. pickup = 0.25/Z1ph. When default sensitivity is selected the pickup is subject to a minimum value of 0.05In. If custom sensitivity is enabled the minimum value is the preferred pickup setting for that element. This relationship is shown in the two graphs in Figure 1. The figure on the left illustrates the case of the default current sensitivity, 5%In, while the figure on the right illustrates the case for a preferred sensitivity of 50%In.
16.5
Zone 1 Ground Reach This setting determines the ground reach impedance of the zone 1 ground fault elements.
16.6
Zone 1 Ground Angle This setting determines the angle of the zone 1 ground reach impedance (custom only).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Pickup (A)
Pickup (A)
0.25/Reach 0.05 = 0.25/Reach 0.5A
0.05A
Default 5%
5.0
Reach ()
0.5
Custom 50%
5.0
Reach ()
Figure 1.
1A relay element sensitivity
16.7
Zone 1 Residual Impedance This setting determines the residual impedance of the zone 1 ground fault elements. Note that the total loop impedance of the zone 1 ground fault elements equals the ground reach (magnitude and angle) plus the residual reach (magnitude and angle). These two reaches must be added vectorially. When global settings are applied (custom option disabled) the residual reach is calculated using the ground reach setting for that zone and the global residual ratio setting. When custom settings are applied the residual reach for each zone is independently settable.
16.8
Zone 1 Residual Angle This setting determines the angle of the residual impedance for the zone 1 ground fault elements.
16.9
Zone 1 Ground Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 1 ground fault elements will operate.
16.10
Zone 1 Ground Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 1 ground fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 1 ground reach and the the zone 1 ground preferred pickup. Refer to section 16.4 for a description of the operation of this cell.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.11
Zone 1 Quadrilateral Resistance This setting determines the resistive reach of the zone 1 quadrilateral ground fault elements (if enabled).
16.12
Zone 1X Direction This setting determines whether the zone 1X elements are forward or reverselooking.
16.13
Zone 1X Phase Reach This setting determines the positive-sequence impedance that corresponds to the zone 1X reach for its phase fault elements.
16.14
Zone 1 Phase Angle This setting determines the postive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 1X phase fault elements (custom only).
16.15
Zone 1X Phase Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 1X phase fault elements will operate (custom only).
16.16
Zone 1X Phase Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 1X phase fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 1X phase reach and the zone 1X phase preferred pickup. See Section 16.4.
16.17
Zone 1X Ground Reach This setting determines the ground reach impedance of the zone 1X ground fault elements.
16.18
Zone 1X Ground Angle This setting determines the angle of the zone 1X ground reach impedance (custom only).
16.19
Zone 1X Residual Impedance This setting (if custom) determines the residual impedance of the zone 1X ground fault elements. See Section 16.7. Note that the total loop impedance of the zone 1X ground fault elements equals the ground reach plus the residual reach.
16.20
Zone 1X Residual Angle This setting determines the angle of the residual impedance for the zone 1X ground fault elements (custom only).
16.21
Zone 1X Ground Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 1X ground fault elements will operate (custom only).
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.22
Zone 1X Ground Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 1X ground fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 1X ground reach and the zone 1X ground preferred pickup. See Section 16.4.
16.23
Zone 1X Quadrilateral Resistance This setting determines the resistive reach of the zone 1X quadrilateral ground fault elements (if enabled).
16.24
16.25
Zone 2 Phase Angle This setting determines the postive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 2 phase fault elements (custom only).
16.26
16.27
Zone 2 Phase Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 2 phase fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 2 phase reach and the zone 2 phase preferred pickup. To ensure accuracy of the zone elements the threshold is inversely proportional to the reach, ie. pickup = 0.25/Z1ph. When default sensitivity is selected the pickup is subject to a minimum value of 0.05In. If custom sensitivity is enabled the minimum value is the preferred pickup setting for that element. This relationship is altered if the Aided Scheme has been selected to be any of the permissive overreach 2 or blocking schemes. In this case it is important that the zone 2 element is less sensitive than the remote reverse element. The dependency on the reach becomes: pickup = 0.375/Z2ph. If default sensitivity has been selected this is subject to a minimum value of 0.075In. If custom sensitivity has been selected the minimum value remains the preferred pickup for the element. If this is used it should be set 50% higher than the remote zone 4 element sensitivity.
16.28
16.29
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.30
Zone 2 Residual Impedance This setting determines the residual impedance of the zone 2 ground fault elements (custom only). Note that the total loop impedance of the zone 2 ground fault elements equals the ground reach plus the residual reach.
16.31
Zone 2 Residual Angle This setting determines the angle of the residual impedance for the zone 2 ground fault elements (custom only).
16.32
Zone 2 Ground Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 2 ground fault elements will operate.
16.33
Zone 2 Ground Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 2 ground fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 2 ground reach and the the zone 2 ground preferred pickup. See Section 16.27.
16.34
16.35
Zone 3 Offset Direction This setting determines whether zone 3 has a forward or reverse offset.
16.36
16.37
Zone 3 Phase Angle This setting determines the postive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 3 phase fault elements (custom only).
16.38
Zone 3 Phase Offset Reach This setting determines the positive-sequence reach of the zone 3 offset for its phase fault elements.
16.39
Zone 3 Phase Offset Angle This setting determines the positive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 3 offset reach for its phase fault elements (custom only).
16.40
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.41
Zone 3 Phase Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 3 phase fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 3 phase reach and the zone 3 phase preferred pickup. See Section 16.4.
16.42
16.43
16.44
Zone 3 Residual Impedance This setting determines the residual impedance of the zone 3 ground fault elements. See Section 16.7. Note that the total loop impedance of the zone 3 ground fault elements equals the ground reach plus the residual reach.
16.45
16.46
Zone 3 Ground Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 3 ground fault elements will operate (custom only).
16.47
16.48
Zone 3 Offset Ground Reach This setting determines the ground reach impedance of the zone 3 offset ground fault elements.
16.49
Zone 3 Offset Ground Angle This setting determines the angle of the zone 3 offset ground reach impedance (custom only).
16.50
Zone 3 Offset Residual Reach This setting determines the residual impedance of the zone 3 offset ground fault elements. If custom options are disabled this is not a setting and is calculated by multiplying the residual ratio and the ground offset reach. If custom options are enabled it can be independently set.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.51
Zone 3 Offset Residual Angle This setting determines the angle of the residual impedance for the zone 3 offset ground fault elements (custom only).
16.52
Zone 3 Quadrilateral Forward Resistive Reach This setting determines the forward resistive reach of the zone 3 quadrilateral ground fault elements (if enabled).
14.53
Zone 3 Quadrilateral Reverse Resistive Reach This setting determines the reverse resistive reach of the zone 3 quadrilateral ground fault elements (if enabled).
16.54
16.55
Zone 4 Phase Angle This setting determines the postive-sequence angle that corresponds to the zone 4 phase fault elements.
16.56
16.57
Zone 4 Phase Minimum Pickup This is the actual current sensitivity of the zone 4 phase fault elements. It is controlled by the zone 4 phase reach and the zone 4 phase preferred pickup. See Section 16.4.
16.58
16.59
16.60
Zone 4 Residual Impedance This setting determines the residual impedance of the zone 4 ground fault elements. See Section 16.7. Note that the total loop impedance of the zone 4 ground fault elements equals the ground reach plus the residual reach.
16.61
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
16.62
Zone 4 Ground Preferred Pickup This setting is the preferred minimum amount of current for which the zone 4 ground fault elements will operate (custom only).
16.63
16.64
16.65
Load Blinders This setting enables the load blinders which are applied to the mho elements.
16.66
Zone 3 Blinder This setting selects whether the load blinders are applied to the zone 3 mho elements.
16.67
Forward Load Blinder This setting determines the forward resistive reach of the load blinders (if enabled).
16.68
Reverse Load Blinder This setting determines the reverse resistive reach of the load blinders (if enabled).
SECTION 17. DEF SETTINGS

Col 15 Row 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A Menu Text DEF SETTINGS DEF Polarising Char Angle Reverse Pickup Forward Pickup Level Det V0 DEF Inst Inst Direction Inst Pickup DEF BU1 BU1 Directional Values Zero Sequence Neg. Sequence 70 0.05A 0.05A 10V Enabled Disabled Foward Non-directional 10.0 A Enabled Disabled Forward Reverse Non-directional 10.0A 2.00s Min 0 10 0.05In 0.05In 3 0 0 0.2In 0 0 Max 1 80 1.2In 1.2In 20 1 1 30In 1 2 Step 1 1 3SFg 3SFg 1 1 1 3SFg 1 1
0B 0C
BU1 Pickup BU1 Time Delay
0.2In 0
30In 10s
3SFg 3SFg
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Enabled Disabled Forward Reverse Non-directional 10.0A 2.00s Enabled Disabled Forward Reverse Non-directional IEC SI IEC VI IEC EI IEC LTI US MI US SI US VI US EI 0.1A 1 0s 0 0 1 2 1 1
0D 0E
DEF BU2 BU2 Directional
0F 10 11 12
BU2 Pickup BU2 Time Delay DEF IDMT IDMT Direction
0.2In 0 0 0
30In 10s 1 2
3SFg 3SFg 1 1
13
IDMT Curve
14 15 16
Base Setting Time Multiplier Reset Timer
0.05In 0.025 0
1.2In 1 60s
3SFg 0.025 0.1s
17.1
DEF Polarizing This setting determines whether the DEF directional line is polarized by zerosequence or negative-sequence current.
17.2
DEF Characteristic Angle This setting determines the DEF characteristic angle.
17.3
Reverse Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the reverse-looking DEF element.
17.4
Forward Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the forward-looking DEF element.
17.5
V0 Level Detector This setting is used to enable weak infeed tripping within the permissive overreach 2 scheme when three pole tripping only is selected.
17.6
DEF Instantaneous This setting enables DEF instantaneous tripping.
17.7
DEF Instantaneous Direction This setting determines whether the DEF instantaneous element is forwardlooking or non-directional.
17.8
DEF Instantaneous Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the DEF instantaneous element.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
17.9
DEF Backup 1 This setting enables definite time-delayed ground overcurrent backup unit #1.
17.10
DEF Backup 1 Direction This setting determines the directionality of DEF backup unit #1.
17.11
DEF Backup 1 Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the DEF Backup unit #1.
17.12
DEF Backup 1 Delay This setting determines the definite time-delay of DEF Backup unit #1.
17.13
DEF Backup 2 This setting enables definite time-delayed ground overcurrent backup unit #2.
17.14
DEF Backup 2 Direction This setting determines the directionality of DEF backup unit #2.
17.15
DEF Backup 2 Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the DEF Backup unit #2.
17.16
DEF Backup 2 Delay This setting determines the definite time-delay of DEF Backup unit #2.
17.17
DEF IDMT This setting enables the DEF inverse definite minimum time element.
17.18
DEF IDMT Directionality This setting determines the directionality of the DEF IDMT element.
17.19
DEF IDMT Curve This setting determines the time-current characteristic for which the DEF IDMT element operates.
17.20
DEF IDMT Base This setting determines the current threshold of the DEF IDMT element.
17.21
DEF IDMT Time Multiplier This setting determines the time multiplier for the DEF IDMT element.
17.22
DEF IDMT Reset Time This setting determines the definite time reset delay time for the DEF IDMT element.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 18. EXTRA FEATURES

Col 16 Row 0 1 Menu Text EXTRA FEATURES Phase >I Function Phase >I Setting Loss-of-Load LoL Level PwrSwg Detector PwrSwg Timeout PwrSwg Zone 1 PwrSwg Zone 1X PwrSwg Zone 2 PwrSwg Zone 3 PwrSwg Zone 4 VT Supervision Zone 1X (T) Zone 2 (T) Z1+Aided 2&3Ph/F Z1+Aided 3Ph/F DEF Aided DEF Inst SOTF Values Stub Bus Instant Trip Disabled 4A Enabled Disabled 1A Indication Blocking Enabled Disabled Allow Block Allow Block Allow Block Allow Block Allow Block Indication Blocking Block A/R Allow A/R Block A/R Allow A/R Block A/R Allow A/R Block A/R Allow A/R Block A/R Allow A/R Block A/R Allow A/R Z1+Z2+Z3+LD Z1+Z2+Z3 Z1+Z2+LD Z1+LD TOR Logic Scheme Logic Z1+Z2+Z3+LD Z1+Z2+Z3 Z1+Z2+LD Z1+LD 1&3 Pole 3 Pole only Min 0 Max 2 Step 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13
0.2In 0 0.05In 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
30In 1 1In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3SFg 1 3SFg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
14 15
TripOnReclose TOR Logic
0 0
1 3
1 1
16
TOR Trip
18.1
Phase >I Function This setting determines the function of the high set phase overcurrent elements, to be instantaneous tripping, stub bus protection or disabled.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
18.2
Phase Overcurrent Pickup This setting determines the current sensitivity of the phase overcurrent elements.
18.3
Loss-of-Load This setting enables the Loss-of-Load accelerated tripping.
18.4
Loss-of-Load Level Detectors This setting determines the current sensitivity of the LoL level detectors.
18.5
Power Swing Blocking This etting controls whether the power swing element blocks the impedance elements. A power swing indication will still be produced even if blocking is disabled.
18.6
Power Swing Blocking Timeout If enabled this setting removes the block from an operated distance element after a 2 second delay.
18.7
Power Swing - Block Zone 1 This setting blocks zone 1 when a power swing is detected.
18.8
Power Swing - Block Zone 1X This setting blocks zone 1X when a power swing is detected.
18.9
18.10
18.11
18.12
Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) This setting determines whether VTS is used for indication only or to block tripping.
18.13
BAR - Zone 1X (T) This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for a zone 1X time-delayed trip.
18.14
BAR - Zone 2 (T) This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for a zone 2 time-delayed trip.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
18.15
BAR - Z1 + Aided 2&3Ph/F This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for multiphase faults cleared by an instantaneous trip.
18.16
BAR - Z1+Aided 3Ph/F This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for three phase faults cleared by an instantaneous trip.
18.17
BAR - DEF Aided This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for DEF channelaided trips.
18.18
BAR - DEF Instantaneous This setting determines whether a Block Auto-Reclose is issued for DEF instantaneous trips.
18.19
Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF) This setting determines which protection elements provide instantaneous tripping following a manual closure.
18.20
Trip on Reclose (TOR) This setting selects the tripping mode following auto-reclose. Standard scheme logic or TOR logic can be used.
18.21
TOR Logic This setting determines which elements provide instantaneous tripping following an auto-reclosure.
18.22
TOR Trip This setting determines whether three pole only or single and three pole tripping is enabled following automatic reclosure.
SECTION 19. OUTPUT CONTACTS

Col Row 1 2 OUTPUT CONTACTS Terminal 29-31 Terminal 29-33 Relay Inoperative ProtUnavailable Printer Fail TrAPh TrBPh TrCPh Tr3Ph TrAided TrAny TrDistDelay AlarmCBF TrTransfer TrInstOC
70
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

TrStubBus TrSOTF TrTOR TrLOL TrZone1 TrZone1X StZone1X TrZone2 StZone2 TrZone3 StZone3 TrZone4 StZone4 TrDEFInst TrDEFBU1 StDEFBU1 TrDEFBU2 StDEFBU2 TrDEFIDMT StDEFIDMT TrDEFDelay TrDistAid TrWIAid TrWIDistAid TrDEFAid TrWIDFAid FltAPh FltBPh FltCPh FltN AnyStart AlarmVTS AlarmPSB BAR SigSend1 SigStop1 SigSend2 SigStop2 Z1_A Z1_B Z1_C Z1_AB Z1_BC Z1_CA Z2_A Z2_B Z2_C Z2_AB Z2_BC Z2_CA Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z4HS DEFFWD DEFREV Unused Signal As above
Terminal 29-35
69
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As As above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above above 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20
Terminal 37-39 Terminal 41-43 Terminal 45-47 Terminal 49-51 Terminal 53-55 Terminal 30-32 Terminal 30-34 Terminal 30-36 Terminal 38-40 Terminal 42-44 Terminal 46-48 Terminal 50-52 Terminal 54-56 Terminal 57-59 Terminal 57-61 Terminal 57-63 Terminal 65-67 Terminal 69-71 Terminal 73-75 Terminal 77-79 Terminal 81-83 Terminal 58-60 Terminal 58-62 Terminal 58-64 Terminal 66-68 Terminal 70-72 Terminal 74-76 Terminal 78-80 Terminal 82-84
19.1
Output contact allocation This column of the database is used to allocate the function of the user programmable output contacts. The function of terminal 29-31 (row 1) is fixed for all relay models as the relay inoperative alarm. For LFZR111 all the above settings are available providing 31 allocatable contacts. LFZR112 and LFZR113 provide 15 allocatable contacts; the cells in rows 11 to 20 are not editable for these versions.
SECTION 20. FAULT LOCATOR

Col 18 Row 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Menu Text FAULT LOCATOR Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle Line Residual Residual Angle Susceptance B1 Susceptance B0 Values 100km 60miles 12.0 70.0 8.00 65.0 0.1 mho 0.2 mho Min Max Step
0.025/In 20 0.01/In -45 10nmho*In 10nmho*In
250/In 85 1000/In 85 10mho*In 10mho*In
3SFg 0.1 3SFg 0.1 3SFg 3SFg
20.1
Line Length This setting determines the line length using the currently selected distance units.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
20.2
Line Impedance This setting determines the magnitude for the positive-sequence line impedance of the protected line.
20.3
Line Angle This setting determines the angle for the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
20.4
Line Residual This setting determines the magnitude for the ground fault return impedance for the protected line. It is set in the same way as the residual setting for the ground fault distance elements.
20.5
Residual Angle This setting determines the angle for the ground fault return impedance for the protected line. It is set in the same way as the residual setting for the ground fault distance elements.
20.6
Susceptance B1 This setting determines the positive-sequence capacitive susceptance of the protected line. If the line susceptance is not known then this setting should be set low rather than high, however it should not be set less than 100pmho.
20.7
Susceptance B0 This setting determines the zero-sequence capacitive susceptance of the protected line. If the line susceptance is not known then this setting should be set low rather than high, however it should not be set less than 100pmho.
SECTION 21. DISTURBANCE RECORDS

Col 19 Row 0 1 2 3 4 Menu Text DISTURB RECORDS Prefault Duration Postfault Duration Samples/cycle Protection Trig Values 200 ms 500 ms 12 36 Trip Start+Trip Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Contact terminal 29-31 Contact terminal 29-33 Contact terminal 29-35 Contact terminal 37-39 Contact terminal 41-43 Contact terminal 45-47 Min 100ms 100ms 0 0 Max 500ms 5.00s 1 2 Step 100ms 100ms 1 1
5 6 7 8
Alarm Trig External H>L External L>H Digital Ch1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 53
1 1 1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Contact terminal 49-51 Contact terminal 53-55 Contact terminal 30-32 Contact terminal 30-34 Contact terminal 30-36 Contact terminal 38-40 Contact terminal 42-44 Contact terminal 46-48 Contact terminal 50-52 Contact terminal 54-56 Contact terminal 57-59 Contact terminal 57-61 Contact terminal 57-63 Contact terminal 65-67 Contact terminal 69-71 Contact terminal 73-75 Contact terminal 77-79 Contact terminal 81-83 Contact terminal 58-60 Contact terminal 58-62 Contact terminal 58-64 Contact terminal 66-68 Contact terminal 70-72 Contact terminal 74-76 Contact terminal 78-80 Contact terminal 82-84 Opto terminal 86-88 Opto terminal 90-92 Opto terminal 94-96 Opto terminal 98-100 Opto terminal 102-104 Opto terminal 106-108 Opto terminal 110-112 Opto terminal 85-87 Opto terminal 89-91 Opto terminal 93-95 Opto terminal 97-99 Opto terminal 101-103 Opto terminal 105-107 Opto terminal 109-111 Monitor bit 0 Monitor bit 1 Monitor bit 2 Monitor bit 3 Monitor bit 4 Monitor bit 5 Monitor bit 6 Monitor bit 7 As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above
9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Digital Ch2 Digital Ch3 Digital Ch4 Digital Ch5 Digital Ch6 Digital Ch7 Digital Ch8 Digital Ch9 Digital Ch10 Digital Ch11 Digital Ch12 Digital Ch13 Digital Ch14 Digital Ch15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above As above Save Group 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 FF
Digital Ch16 Digital Ch17 Digital Ch18 Digital Ch19 Digital Ch20 Digital Ch21 Digital Ch22 Digital Ch23 Digital Ch24 Digital Ch25 Digital Ch26 Digital Ch27 Digital Ch28 Digital Ch29 Digital Ch30 Digital Ch31 Digital Ch32 Group Control
21.1
Prefault Duration This setting determines the duration of the prefault data stored by the disturbance recorder.
21.2
Postfault Duration This setting determines the duration of the postfault data stored by the disturbance recorder.
21.3
Samples/cycle This setting determines the sample rate of the disturbance recorder.
21.4
Protection Trigger This setting determines whether a disturbance record is triggered by protection starts or protection starts and trips.
21.5
Scheme Alarm Trigger This setting determines whether a disturbance record is triggered by a scheme alarm; eg. detection of a power swing or VTS.
21.6
External H > L This setting determines whether a disturbance record is triggered by a high to low transition on the external trigger input.
21.7
External L > H This setting determines whether a disturbance record is triggered by a low to high transition on the external trigger input.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 22. RECORDER CONTROL

Col 90 Row 0 1 Menu Text RECORDER CONTROL Start/Trigger Values Stopped Triggered Running Samples Min 1 Max 2 Step 1
Recorder Source
22.1
Start/Trigger Selecting the setting Triggered via remote access issues a manual trigger for the disturbance recorder.
SECTION 23. RECORDER EXTRACTION

Col 91 Row 0 1 2 3 Menu Text RECORDER EXTRACTION Select Record No Trigger Time Channels Available Values Min Max Step 1
4 5 6 10 11 12 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2C 2D
Channel Types Channel Offsets Scaling Factors Record Length Trigger position Time Base Sample Timer Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 13
0 Latest Rec Oldest Rec 28/06/94 12:00 0011000111111111 Voltage A Voltage B Voltage C Voltage (Spare) Current A Current B Current C Current I0 Current (Spare) Digital Channel Digital Channel 0000111111111111 Upload Offsets Upload Scaling factors 4752 432 0.003 Upload sample times Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel Upload channel DigitalChannel Names (based on setting) Upload channel DigitalChannel Names (based on setting)
23.1
Disturbance recorder extraction This column of the database is used for extraction of the stored relay disturbance records. The column is used by the access software to produce a stored Comtrade record format. This column is not accessed directly by the user in normal use of the database.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 24. FAULT EXTRACTION

92 1 2 3 0 Event Date and Time Record Type (No header) 0 [Taken from record] Trip Trip on Reclose Switch onto Fault Start Zone: [1][1X][2][3][4] BU1 Transfer Trip Loss of Load Inst OC Stub Bus ABCN [PSB][VTS] 12km 8miles 50% 5.43 80ms 22ms 1 50.1Hz 89.0kV 0 89.0kV 120 89.0kV -120 123kV 30 123kV -90 123kV 150 89.0kV 0 0.00kV 0 0.00kV 0 1.00kA 0 1.00kA 120 1.00kA -120 1.40kA 30 1.40kA -90 1.40kA 150 1.0kA 0 0.00kA 0 0.00kA 0 Max Rec 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B
Distance Directional Earth Fault Event Type Event Type Event Type Faulted Phase Alarms Fault location
0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
Fault duration Operate time Active group System Frequency Prefault VA Amp Prefault VA Phase Prefault VB Amp Prefault VB Phase Prefault VC Amp Prefault VC Phase Prefault VAB Amp Prefault VAB Phase Prefault VBC Amp Prefault VBC Phase Prefault VCA Amp Prefault VCA Phase Prefault V1 Amp Prefault V1 Phase Prefault V2 Amp Prefault V2 Phase Prefault V0 Amp Prefault V0 Phase Prefault IA Amp Prefault IA Phase Prefault IB Amp Prefault IB Phase Prefault IC Amp Prefault IC Phase Prefault IAB Amp Prefault IAB Phase Prefault IBC Amp Prefault IBC Phase Prefault ICA Amp Prefault ICA Phase Prefault I1 Amp Prefault I1 Phase Prefault I2 Amp Prefault I2 Phase Prefault I0 Amp Prefault I0 Phase
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

89.0kV 0 89.0kV 120 89.0kV -120 123kV 30 123kV -90 123kV 150 89.0kV 0 0.00kV 0 0.00kV 0 1.00kA 0 1.00kA 120 1.00kA -120 1.40kA 30 1.40kA -90 1.40kA 150 1.0kA 0 0.00kA 0 0.00kA 0
34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Fault VA Amp Fault VA Phase Fault VB Amp Fault VB Phase Fault VC Amp Fault VC Phase Fault VAB Amp Fault VAB Phase Fault VBC Amp Fault VBC Phase Fault VCA Amp Fault VCA Phase Fault V1 Amp Fault V1 Phase Fault V2 Amp Fault V2 Phase Fault V0 Amp Fault V0 Phase Fault IA Amp Fault IA Phase Fault IB Amp Fault IB Phase Fault IC Amp Fault IC Phase Fault IAB Amp Fault IAB Phase Fault IBC Amp Fault IBC Phase Fault ICA Amp Fault ICA Phase Fault I1 Amp Fault I1 Phase Fault I2 Amp Fault I2 Phase Fault I0 Amp Fault I0 Phase
24.1
Fault extraction This column is used by the access software for automatic extraction of stored fault records. If manual browsing of the stored fault record information is required then the View Fault column (Col03) should be used.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 25. COMMISSIONING

Col 94 Row 0 1 2 3 Menu Text COMMISSION Monitor Option Monitor Status Output Contacts Values 12 01010101 Enabled Disabled Terminal 54-56 Only TripAPh TripBPh TripCPh Trip3Ph Terminal 29-33 Terminal 29-35 Terminal 37-39 Terminal 41-43 Terminal 45-47 Terminal 49-51 Terminal 53-55 Terminal 30-32 Terminal 30-34 Terminal 30-36 Terminal 38-40 Terminal 42-44 Terminal 46-48 Terminal 50-52 Terminal 54-56 Terminal 57-59 Terminal 57-61 Terminal 57-63 Terminal 65-67 Terminal 69-71 Terminal 73-75 Terminal 77-79 Terminal 81-83 Terminal 58-60 Terminal 58-62 Terminal 58-64 Terminal 66-68 Terminal 70-72 Terminal 74-76 Terminal 78-80 Terminal 82-84 Off On DSP_PSB_ACTIVE DSP_LDOC_A DSP_LDOC_B DSP_LDOC_C DSP_LOLA DSP_LOLB DSP_LOLC DSP_LDLSBN DSP_LDEHS1N DSP_LDEHS2N DSP_LDEHS3N DSP_LDV0VTS DSP_LDVN TrAny AlarmCBF Min 0 0 Max 28 2 Step 1 1
Select Contact
34
5 6
Control Contact Terminal 54-56
0 0
1 41
1 1
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

TrZone1 TrZone1X TrZone2 TrZone3 TrZone4 TrDEFInst TrDEFBU1 TrDEFBU2 TrDEFIDMT StDEFIDMT AlarmPSB BAR SigSend1 SigSend2 Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Z4HS DEFFWD DEFREV SOTF_En TOR_En PD_A PD_B PD_C Enabled Disabled
Phase Selector
25.1
Monitor Option This setting selects a monitor option. Monitor options provide scheme logic test signals in groups of 8 and can be accessed via the LCD or parallel port SK1.
25.2
Monitor Status This 8 bit binary flag represents the current status of the selected monitor signals.
25.3
Output Contacts This setting enables the output contacts or disables them. Contact testing can only be performed with the output contacts disabled. Terminal 54 - 56 can be left enabled and re-assigned to allow timing tests.
25.4
Select Contact Enable or disable these output contacts to allow commissioning tests.
25.5
Control Contact This command controls the state of the contact being tested.
25.6
Terminal 54 - 56 If enabled this test contact can be used for automated tests. This does not affect the normal assignment of the contact.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
25.7
Phase Selector This setting disables the phase selector. Note that this should only be done during a static test when the relay is not in service.
SECTION 26 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DATA

Col BF Row 0 1 2 3 Menu Text COMM SYS DATA Disturb Rec Cntrl Disturb Rec Ext Upload mode Values 9000 9100 [Normal] [Transfer] Min Max Step
26.1
Disturb Rec Cntrl This cell is used to point to the column of the relay database used for control of the integral distrubance recorder. It is used for automatic disturbance record extraction and control only.
26.2
Disturb Rec Ext This cell is used to point to the column of the relay database used for extraction of disturbance records. It is used for automatic disturbance record extraction only.
26.3
Upload mode This cell is used for automatic extraction of all user settings by the access software. It should not be edited directly by the user when accessing the relay database.
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Appendix C Relay Setting Sheets
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 14. 14.1 14.2 14.3 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. RELAY IDENTIFICATION SOFTWARE IDENTIFIERS Host processor Protection processor Analogue input Front panel DISPLAY OPTIONS EVENT TRIGGER DATE AND TIME PRINTING COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION MODEM SETUP DIAL-BACK TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS DISTANCE SCHEMES DEF SCHEME DISTANCE OPTIONS Zone 1 Zone 1x Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Load blinders DEF ELEMENT DEF instantaneous DEF backup DEF IDMT OVERCURRENT LOSS-OF-LOAD POWER SWING BLOCKING VT SUPERVISION BLOCK AUTO-RECLOSE TRIP ON CLOSE CONTACTS FAULT LOCATOR DISTURBANCE RECORD SETUP DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGER DISTURBANCE RECORD INPUTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 12 12 12
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 1 of 16
SECTION 1.
RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Serial number Frequency Date Engineer Password
Static distance protection type LFZR11 Model Description Plant reference Language Active settings group number
SECTION 2.
2.1
SOFTWARE IDENTIFIERS
Host processor
Software version Host PDU Serial comms PLD A PLD B PLD C 2.2 Protection processor
SLP software DSP software Scheme PDU PLD 2.3 Analogue input
Calibration software PLD 2.4 PLD Front panel
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
Values Distance units Complex
DISPLAY OPTIONS
Primary/secorary km/miles Polar/rectangular
Measuremement mode Measurement values Fault location Phase A label Phase B label Phase C label Ground label Self reset flags enabled/disabled Phase-ground/phase-phase Distance/% line/reactive ohms
SECTION 4.
Any contact Status input Scheme alarm Relay failure Setting change Event recording
EVENT TRIGGER
enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled
SECTION 5.
IRIG B Sync Local time = UTC
DATE AND TIME

enabled/disabled
SECTION 6.
Parallel A/print
PRINTING
Fault records/Event records/All records/Disabled
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 7.
Remote setting Comms port Comms mode Transmit delay Baud rate Inactivity timer Front port
COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION
enabled/disabled K-Bus/Front serial/Rear serial IEC 60870FT1.2/10bit/NA ms min DTE/DCE
SECTION 8.
Modem support
MODEM SETUP
enabled/disabled
Modem init string Modem strt string Modem disc string Modem dial string Init modem no/yes
SECTION 9.
Dial back Call place dly Connection dly Number Tx time Phone Rcvy time Site A ref Site A line 1 Site A line 2 Site A line 3 Site A line 4 Site A line 5 Site A line 6 Site A line 7 Site A line 8
DIAL-BACK
enabled/disabled s s s s
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Site B Refnum Site B line 1 Site B line 2 Site B line 3 Site B line 4 Site B line 5 Site B line 6 Site B line 7 Site B line 8 Site C Refnum Site C line 1 Site C line 2 Site C line 3 Site C line 4 Site C line 5 Site C line 6 Site C line 7 Site C line 8 Site D Refnum Site D line 1 Site D line 2 Site D line 3 Site D line 4 Site D line 5 Site D line 6 Site D line 7 Site D line 8
SECTION 10. TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS

Identifier Line type Line length Overhead line/cable
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 5 of 16 1&3 phase/3 phase only ms enabled/disabled ms forward/reverse :1 :1
Tripping Inst trip delay CB fail logic CB fail time Relay direction VT ratio CT ratio
SECTION 11. DISTANCE SCHEMES

Selection Basic /zone 1 extension /PUR /PUR Unblock /POR1 /POR1 Unblock /POR2 /POR2 WI /POR2 Unblock /POR2 Unblock WI /Blocking /Blocking 2 Tripping TP TD TW Disabled/phase/ground/phase + ground ms ms ms
SECTION 12. DEF SCHEME

Selection Disabled /shared channel /POR /POR Unblock
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 6 of 16 /POR WI /POR WI Unblock /Blocking /Blocking 2
TPG TDG
ms ms
SECTION 13 DISTANCE OPTIONS

Section Quadrilateral Custom options Angle setting Residual comp Custom sensitivity Directional pol 13.1 Zone 1 Phase reach Ph pref pickup Gnd reach Residual reach Quad res. Gnd pref pickup 13.2 Zone 1X Zone 1X delay Direction Phase reach Ph pref pickup Gnd reach Residual reach Quad res. forward/reverse degrees A degrees degrees Zone 1X Disabled/phase ony/ground only/phase + ground ms Zone 1 Disabled/phase only/ground only/phase + ground degrees A degrees degrees A enabled/disabled standard/alternate enabled/disabled enabled/disabled degrees degrees
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 7 of 16 A
Gnd pref pickup 13.3 Zone 2 Zone 2 delay Phase reach Ph pref pickup Gnd reach Residual reach Quad res. Gnd pref pickup 13.4 Zone 3 Zone 3 delay Offset Phase reach Phase offset Ph pref pickup Gnd reach Gnd offset Gnd pref pickup Residual reach Residual offset Quad res. fwd Quad res. rev 13.5 Zone 4 Zone 4 delay Phase reach Ph pref pickup Gnd reach Zone 4 forward/reverse Zone 3 Zone 2
disabled/phase only/ground only/phase + ground ms degrees A degrees degrees A
disabled/phase only/ground ony/phase + ground ms
degrees degrees A degrees degrees A degrees degrees
disabled/phase only/ground only/phase + ground ms degrees A degrees
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 8 of 16 degrees A
Residual reach Quad res. Gnd pref pickup 13.6 Status Zone 3 blinder Forward reach Reverse reach Load blinders active/disabled active/disabled
SECTION 14. DEF ELEMENT

Polarizing Characteristic angle Reverse pickup Forward pickup Level Det V0 14.1 Status Direction Inst pickup 14.2 DEF backup enabled/disabled foward/reverse/non-directional A s enabled/disabled forward/reverse/non-directional A s DEF instantaneous enabled/disabled forward/non-directional A zero sequence/negative sequence degrees A A V
DEF backup1 BU1 direction BU1 pickup BU1 delay DEF backup2 BU2 direction BU2 pickup BU2 delay
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
14.3 Status
DEF IDMT enabled/disabled forward/reverse/non-directional IEC SI /IEC VI /IEC EI IEC LTI US MI US SI US VI US EI
IDMT direction IDMT curve
Base setting Time multiplier Reset timer
SECTION 15. OVERCURRENT

Function Setting Stub bus/instant trip/disabled A
SECTION 16. LOSS-OF-LOAD

Status Level detector enabled/disabled A
SECTION 17. POWER SWING BLOCKING

Status PwrSwg timeout Block zone 1 Block aided Block zone 1X Block zone 2 Block zone 3 Block zone 4 indication/blocking enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 18. VT SUPERVISION

Status indication/blocking
SECTION 19. BLOCK AUTO-RECLOSE

Zone 1X (T) Zone 2 (T) Z1 + aided 2&3 ph/F Z1 + aided 3ph/F DEF aided DEF instantaneous Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose Block autoreclose/allow autoreclose
SECTION 20. TRIP ON CLOSE

SOTF Trip on reclose TOR logic TOR trip Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + LD/Z1 + Z2 + Z3/Z1 + Z2 + LD/ Z1 + LD TOR logic/scheme logic Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + LD/Z1 + Z2 + Z3/Z1 + Z2 + LD/Z1 + LD 1&3 pole/3pole only
SECTION 21. CONTACTS

LFZR111 default settings Terminal 29-33 Terminal 29-35 Terminal 37-39 Terminal 41-43 Terminal 45-47 Terminal 49-51 Terminal 53-55 Terminal 30-32 Terminal 30-34 Terminal 30-36 Terminal 38-40 Zone 1 trip Time delayed trip Trip A Trip B Signal send (1) Block autoreclose Trip C DEF trip Overcurrent trip Start Trip A LFZR112/113 default settings Zone 1 trip Time delayed trip Trip Trip Signal send (1) Block autoreclose Trip Trip DEF trip Switch onto Fault Aided trip
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943B Volume 2 Appendix C Page 11 of 16 Trip B Trip C Signal send (2) Any trip VTS PSB DEF Inst Trip A Trip B Trip C Block autoreclose Switch onto fault Start A Start B Start C Trip A Trip B Trip C Dist aided trip DEF aided trip PSB VTS Start Any trip N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Terminal 42-44 Terminal 46-48 Terminal 50-52 Terminal 54-56 Terminal 57-59 Terminal 57-61 Terminal 57-63 Terminal 65-67 Terminal 69-71 Terminal 73-75 Terminal 77-79 Terminal 81-83 Terminal 58-60 Terminal 58-62 Terminal 58-64 Terminal 66-68 Terminal 70-72 Terminal 74-76 Terminal 78-80 Terminal 82-84
SECTION 22. FAULT LOCATOR

Line length Line impedance Line residual Susceptance B1 Susceptance B0 degrees degrees mmho mmho
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 23. DISTURBANCE RECORD SETUP

Prefault Postfault Sample/cycle 12/24/36/72 ms ms
SECTION 24. DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGER

Protection Alarm trig External H>L External L>H Trip/trip + start/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled enabled/disabled
SECTION 25. DISTURBANCE RECORD INPUTS

Digital Ch1 Digital Ch2 Digital Ch3 Digital Ch4 Digital Ch5 Digital Ch6 Digital Ch7 Digital Ch8 Digital Ch9 Digital Ch10 Digital Ch11 Digital Ch12 Digital Ch13 Digital Ch14 Digital Ch15 Digital Ch16 Digital Ch17 Digital Ch18 Digital Ch19
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Digital Ch20 Digital Ch21 Digital Ch22 Digital Ch23 Digital Ch24 Digital Ch25 Digital Ch26 Digital Ch27 Digital Ch28 Digital Ch29 Digital Ch30 Digital Ch31 Digital Ch32
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
Volume 2 Appendix D Commissioning Test Record
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943C Volume 2 Appendix D Contents
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
CONTENTS 1. 2. 2.1 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 10.1 10.2 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 16.1 17. 18. 19. 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 20. 21. 22. RELAY IDENTIFICATION Preliminary checks Measurement checks REACH TESTS USING COMPUTER BASED TEST SET FAULT LOCATION OPERATION TIME POWER SWING BLOCKING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION SWITCH-ON-TO-FAULT TRIP ON RECLOSE LOSS-OF-LOAD ACCELERATED TRIP FEATURE High set overcurrent Loss of load testing INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE DETECTION DIRECTION REVERSAL ZONE 1 EXTENSION PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH Permissive overreach Variable voltage BLOCKING SIGNALLING CHANNEL CHECK DEF Instantaneous BU1 BU2 Operation time DEF aided tripping Independent channel DEF tripping LIVE SYSTEM CHECKS ON LOAD CHECKS ON LOAD CHECKS 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix D Page 1 of 8
SECTION 1.
RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Serial number System frequency Date Engineer Witness
Static distance protection type LFZR11 Model Station Circuit Scheme type Active settings group number
SECTION 2.
Rating details
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
CT shorting contacts DC supply Power up Wiring Relay inoperative alarm contact Calendar and clock check Output contacts Opto isolators 2.1 Measurement checks
Voltage measurements Current measurements Phase angles measurements Frequency measurements
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 3.
Relay Angle n/ph
REACH TESTS USING COMPUTER BASED TEST SET

Required Reach Zr Zone 1 Fault Type A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-G C-G A-G B-C C-A Relay Z Actual Z % Error
Quad
Zone 1X
Quad
Zone 2
Quad
Zone 3
Quad
Zone 3 offset Quad Fwd
Quad Rev
Zone 4
Quad Res. Load blinders
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix D Page 3 of 8 Required Reach Zr Zone 1 Fault Type A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A A-B B-C C-A Relay Z Actual Z % Error
Relay Angle n/ph
Zone 1X
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 3 offset Zone 4
Load blinders
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 4.
Line length Line residual Susceptance B1 Phase
FAULT LOCATION
Line impedance
Susceptance B0
Location given for Z1 reach % or km or miles Expected Actual
A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C C-A
SECTION 5.
Phase A-B B-C C-A A-G B-G C-G
OPERATION TIME
Zone 1X (s) Zone 2 (s) Zone 3 (s) Zone 4 (s)
Zone 1 (ms)
SECTION 6.
POWER SWING BLOCKING
Relay stable under power swing
SECTION 7.
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION

V s
Voltage for operation Operation time Indication Blocking indication Self resetting enabled/disabled Operation checked
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 8.
SOTF indication Trip time
SWITCH ON TO FAULT
ms
SECTION 9.
TOR indication Trip time
TRIP ON RECLOSE
ms
SECTION 10. LOSS OF LOAD ACCELERATED TRIP FEATURE

10.1 Level Detector PhA PhB PhC 10.2 High set overcurrent Relay Terminal Injected 19-20 21-22 23-24 Mon Opt 8 LCD POS 3 4 5 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up
Loss of load testing
Loss of load accelerated trip feature enabled/disabled Trip time Loss of load indication ms
SECTION 11. INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

Level Detector PhA PhB PhC Relay Terminal Injected 19-20 21-22 23-24 Mon Opt 8 LCD POS 0 1 2 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up
SECTION 12. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE DETECTION

Circuit breaker failure detection feature enabled/disabled Trip time Expected ms Actual ms
Circuit breaker failure indication
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 13. DIRECTION REVERSAL

Direction reversal check
SECTION 14. ZONE 1 EXTENSION

Reset Z1 extension energised, Z1 reach = Reset Z1 extension de-energised, Z1 reach =
SECTION 15. PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH

Aided trip check Signal send check TDW timer (if applicable) Channel out of service ms
SECTION 16. PERMISSIVE OVERREACH

16.1 Level Detector PhA PhB PhC Variable voltage Relay Terminal Injected 15-18 16-18 17-18 Mon Opt 6 LCD POS 6 6 6 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up
Aided trip check Signal send check TP time TD time TDW timer (if applicable) Echo Breaker open time (255-265ms) Signal send dwell time (100-110ms) Weak infeed trip Delay on tripping (54-66ms) ms ms ms ms ms ms
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
SECTION 17. BLOCKING

TP time TD time Signal send check Channel out of service check ms ms
SECTION 18. SIGNALLING CHANNEL CHECK

Signalling channel check
SECTION 19. DEF

19.1 Instantaneous Relay Terminal Injected 19-26 21-26 23-26 19.2 BU1 Relay Terminal Injected 19-26 21-26 23-26 19.3 BU2 Relay Terminal Injected 19-26 21-26 23-26 Mon Opt 6 LCD POS 5 5 5 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up Mon Opt 6 LCD POS 4 4 4 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up Mon Opt 6 LCD POS 3 3 3 Pick up Current Drop off Current Drop off % Pick up
SERVICE MANUAL LFZR
R5943D Volume 2 Appendix D Page 8 of 8 Current injected Curve selected Expected time Actual time
19.4
Operation time Phase injected A-G B-G C-G
19.5
DEF aided tripping ms ms
TDG timer (if applicable) TPG time (if applicable) Aided trip check Channel out of service check 19.6
Independent channel DEF tripping ms ms
TDG timer (if applicable) TPG time (if applicable) Aided trip check 20. Live system checks
Signalling channel check Trip test Final setting check 21. On load checks
Voltage correct Phase rotation correct CT/VT phasing correct Correct metering information
Engineer
Date
Witness
Date
Volume 2 Appendix E Return/Repair Form
REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd with the equipment to be repaired. This form may also be used in the case of application queries.
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd St. Leonards Works Stafford ST17 4LX, England For: After Sales Service Department _____________________ Model No: __________________ Serial No: _________
Customer Ref:
ALSTOM Contract Ref: _____________________ Date: 1. _____________________
What parameters were in use at the time the fault occurred? AC volts DC volts AC current Frequency _____________ Main VT/Test set _____________ Battery/Power supply _____________ Main CT/Test set _____________
2. 3. 4.
Which type of test was being used? ____________________________________________ Were all the external components fitted where required? (Delete as appropriate.) List the relay settings being used ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Yes/No
5.
What did you expect to happen? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

continued overleaf
6.
What did happen? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
7.
When did the fault occur? Instant Time delayed By how long? Yes/No Yes/No ___________ Intermittent Yes/No
(Delete as appropriate).
8.
What indications if any did the relay show? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
9.
Was there any visual damage? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
10. Any other remarks which may be useful: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________ Signature ______________________________________ Name (in capitals)
_______________________________________ Title _______________________________________ Company name

LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volumes 1 & 2

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volumes 1 & 2

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volumes 1 & 2

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

Caution: refer to product documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Decommissioning and Disposal

LFZR Service Manual R5943D Volume 1

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934D Volume 1 Contents

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934D Volume 1 Contents

CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3

INTRODUCTION APPLICATION NOTES TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

ISSUE C ISSUE B ISSUE C

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934D Volume 1 Contents

Volume 1 Chapter 1 Introduction

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5934C Volume 1 Chapter 1 Contents

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 1 of 16

Volume 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2

Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 2 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 3 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 4 of 16

Independent DEF (LFZR111 and LFZR112 only)

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 5 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 6 of 16

Zone 3 (forward offset)

Zone 2 Zone 1X Zone 1 Zone 3 (reverse offset)

Zone 1X (reverse) Blinder (reverse)

Phase-to-phase distance characteristics

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 7 of 16

zone 2 zone 1x zone 1

Phase-to-ground distance characteristics

3.4.1.1 Fixed setting

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 8 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 9 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 10 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 11 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 12 of 16

SERVICE MANUAL LFZR

R5943C Chapter 1 Volume 1 Page 13 of 16